Asme y14.5 m-2009
ManikandanNagarajan22
25,586 views
151 slides
Dec 28, 2021
Slide 1 of 151
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
About This Presentation
Standard
Slide Content
ASME Y14.5-2009
[Revision of ASME Y14.5M-1994 (R2004)]
Dimensioning
and Tolerancing
Engineering Drawing and Related
Documentation Practices
[Revision of ASME Y14.5M-1994 (R2004)]
Dimensioning
and Tolerancing
Engineering Drawing and Related
Documentation Practices
ASME YS
ADOPTION NOTICE,
ASME YI45, Dimensioing and Toleancing, was adopted on 9 February 2009 fr use by the Department of
Defense (Dab). Proposed changes by DoD activities mustbe submitted tothe DoD Adopting Activity: Commander,
US. Army Research, Development and Engineering Center (ARDEC), ATTN: AMSRD-AAR-QES-E, Picatiny
Arsenal, N} 7806 500. Cop ofthis document may be purchased from The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers (ASME), 22 Law Driv, PO. Box 290, Fail, NJ 0707-250, p://wwewasme or
Custodians Adopting Activity:
"Amy AR Army — AR
Navy — SA (Project DRPR 210-003)
Air Force — 16
Review Activities
Amy = CRIE, ML PE, TW
Navy — AS, CG, CH, FC, MC, NP, TD
Ait Fore — 13,99)
050 — St
NSA—NS
‘Other — CM, MP, DCZ
NOTE: The activites listed above were interest in this document as ofthe date
‘ofthis document. Since organizations and resposiiitis can change, you should
‘erty the currency of the information above using the ASSIST Online database
She) a dapa dla ml
AMSC N/A
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A. Approved for public release; di
AREA DRPR
ution is unlimited
ADOPTION NOTICE,
ASME YI45, Dimensioing and Toleancing, was adopted on 9 February 2009 fr use by the Department of
Defense (Dab). Proposed changes by DoD activities mustbe submitted tothe DoD Adopting Activity: Commander,
US. Army Research, Development and Engineering Center (ARDEC), ATTN: AMSRD-AAR-QES-E, Picatiny
Arsenal, N} 7806 500. Cop ofthis document may be purchased from The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers (ASME), 22 Law Driv, PO. Box 290, Fail, NJ 0707-250, p://wwewasme or
Custodians Adopting Activity:
"Amy AR Army — AR
Navy — SA (Project DRPR 210-003)
Air Force — 16
Review Activities
Amy = CRIE, ML PE, TW
Navy — AS, CG, CH, FC, MC, NP, TD
Ait Fore — 13,99)
050 — St
NSA—NS
‘Other — CM, MP, DCZ
NOTE: The activites listed above were interest in this document as ofthe date
‘ofthis document. Since organizations and resposiiitis can change, you should
‘erty the currency of the information above using the ASSIST Online database
She) a dapa dla ml
AMSC N/A
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A. Approved for public release; di
AREA DRPR
ution is unlimited
ASME Y14.5-20
[Revision of ASME Y14.5M-1994 (R2004)]
Dimensioning and
Tolerancing
Engineering Drawing and Related
Documentation Practices
AN INTERNATIONAL STANDARD
[Revision of ASME Y14.5M-1994 (R2004)]
Dimensioning and
Tolerancing
Engineering Drawing and Related
Documentation Practices
AN INTERNATIONAL STANDARD
“This Standard wil be revised when the Society approves the isuance of mew edition. There willbe no addenda or
wate intepetations ofthe eguiements of thi Standard issue to this edition.
Percdialy corn ations ofthe ASME YIS Committee may be published as Cass. Cases ae published onthe
ASME Web site under the Comite Pages at tp: estoolsasme ong a hey are issued
ASE eme adm o The American Set of Mehul Egin
hs code or sama vas deeded under prunes acid as meeting the era or American National Sanda. The
‘Sunda Comma at pon esd dan weaned o sas a da kom compet con nes
‘veh an opportunity frit The pn ade radar wan made ale for pace an cm a Pes
Ser nag ie ag pire
‘SME ces ay ponte ih pa ey ean a pace con thay Re men th
‘Somme yoni Veco dar pet and bl cren of nyo a ees
{the knee sich gh ey th on
ee face epee) op) a md hohe pra meme ra
Esopo eyo ne ineptos deceo naco withthe elite ASE poe
pin Ti ces tne once yds
tothe po wen pa oh pice
“Tear ene New York NY LD
“THE AMERICAN SEEN OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
TN
wate intepetations ofthe eguiements of thi Standard issue to this edition.
Percdialy corn ations ofthe ASME YIS Committee may be published as Cass. Cases ae published onthe
ASME Web site under the Comite Pages at tp: estoolsasme ong a hey are issued
ASE eme adm o The American Set of Mehul Egin
hs code or sama vas deeded under prunes acid as meeting the era or American National Sanda. The
‘Sunda Comma at pon esd dan weaned o sas a da kom compet con nes
‘veh an opportunity frit The pn ade radar wan made ale for pace an cm a Pes
Ser nag ie ag pire
‘SME ces ay ponte ih pa ey ean a pace con thay Re men th
‘Somme yoni Veco dar pet and bl cren of nyo a ees
{the knee sich gh ey th on
ee face epee) op) a md hohe pra meme ra
Esopo eyo ne ineptos deceo naco withthe elite ASE poe
pin Ti ces tne once yds
tothe po wen pa oh pice
“Tear ene New York NY LD
“THE AMERICAN SEEN OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
TN
CONTENTS
Foreword a
Commitee Rost nn -
Correspondence With the VIA Commitee =
Seaton Scope, Deflntlns, and General Dimension.
SP an eee -
References na = z
Definitions \ - \ =
Fundamental Rules =
Unis of Measure =
Typesof Dimension mm 7
Application of Dimensions a
Dimensioning Features = u
Location of Features = -
General Tolerancing and Related Pindples nn
General : a sis
Direct Tterancing Methods
‘Tolerance Expression =
Interpretation of Lite
Single Limit — cena ns
Tolerance Accumulation :
Limits of Si
Sew Threads “ a
Gesrsand Splines
Bowndary Conditions ee
Angular Surfaces a
Conil Tapes BIER
Fiat Tapers =~ 2 -
Radi una = a
Tangent Plane nu a E
Statistic Tolerancing
Symbol cc
Une of Notes to Supplement Symbols num
Symbol Construction +. SEE]
Feature Conta Frame Symbole
Feature Conta Frame Placement =
Definition ofthe Tlerance Zone „nm
‘Tobulated Tolerances ©
Datum Reference FAME nnn
General nn cn =
Ders ol Frosdom
Degros o Freedom Constrained by Primary Datum Features
Regardless of Materia Boundary =
44 Constaning Degres of Freedom ofa Part =
45 Datum Feature Simulator =
4 Theoretical and Physical Application of Datum Feature Simulator |
42 Datum Reference Frame
n
Gene = en
Applicability of Modiirs on Geometric Taerance Values and Datum Feature References
Buuss RES SRRERERE BARES EEEBNRERELEE Base ne
Foreword a
Commitee Rost nn -
Correspondence With the VIA Commitee =
Seaton Scope, Deflntlns, and General Dimension.
SP an eee -
References na = z
Definitions \ - \ =
Fundamental Rules =
Unis of Measure =
Typesof Dimension mm 7
Application of Dimensions a
Dimensioning Features = u
Location of Features = -
General Tolerancing and Related Pindples nn
General : a sis
Direct Tterancing Methods
‘Tolerance Expression =
Interpretation of Lite
Single Limit — cena ns
Tolerance Accumulation :
Limits of Si
Sew Threads “ a
Gesrsand Splines
Bowndary Conditions ee
Angular Surfaces a
Conil Tapes BIER
Fiat Tapers =~ 2 -
Radi una = a
Tangent Plane nu a E
Statistic Tolerancing
Symbol cc
Une of Notes to Supplement Symbols num
Symbol Construction +. SEE]
Feature Conta Frame Symbole
Feature Conta Frame Placement =
Definition ofthe Tlerance Zone „nm
‘Tobulated Tolerances ©
Datum Reference FAME nnn
General nn cn =
Ders ol Frosdom
Degros o Freedom Constrained by Primary Datum Features
Regardless of Materia Boundary =
44 Constaning Degres of Freedom ofa Part =
45 Datum Feature Simulator =
4 Theoretical and Physical Application of Datum Feature Simulator |
42 Datum Reference Frame
n
Gene = en
Applicability of Modiirs on Geometric Taerance Values and Datum Feature References
Buuss RES SRRERERE BARES EEEBNRERELEE Base ne
ss
mr
an
an
an
an
5
us
a
415
u
re
15
Sections
si
52
ES
Section 6
Section?
a
72
7a
75
76
17
Sections
x
$
ss
$
Section
EN
92
93
oa
95
96
Datum Festus . =
Datum Festur Controls nn aoe
Spectyng Datum Feature in an Order of Fra nn z
ED Dats v= 5
“Multiple Datum Features = - - Z
Mathematical Defined Surface = =
“Multiple Datum Reference Frames ammm So
Funebonal Datum Features = u
Rotational Constraint About a Datum Axis or Point S
Application of MMB, LME, and RMB regular Features of Size
‘Datum Feature Selection Practica Application 2 2
Simultaneous Requirements =
Restrained Condition a
Datum Reference Fame Mention aa ee
Customize Datum Reference Frame Construction ~ .
“Application a Customized Datum Reference Frame nn 3
Datum Targets E sun = E
MO te ee
General wa en Ei
For Control = z
Spealying For Tolerances += II
Form Tolerances Er à
Application of Pree State Symbol E Sen
Tolerances O3 nnn
Gener ener eee an
Orientation Control = = ES
Orientation Symbols. — seen Z
Speatying Orientation Tolerances a. = =
Tangent Plane hes aac
Alternative Practice = Ser
Tolerances Late. non
General DS SR
Positional Tolerancia = IL
Positional Tlerneing Fundament = 5 5
Positional Tlerancing Fundamentas .
Pattern Location sn oe
(Coaxial Feature Control nn = 2
“Toleancing for Symmetrical Relationships LT .
Tolerances of Profile
Gener = E
Paie mm u
Tolerance Zone Boundary na = 7
Profile Applications =
Material Condition and Boundary Condition Modes as
Related to Profil Contos = come
Composite role 7 u
‘Multiple Single Segment Profile Tolerancing = 2
Combined Controls. 2 =
Tolerances RUNDE un
Genera =
Ranout = 2 5 =
Ranout Tolerance . CTI
Types of Runout Tlrances nn = =:
Application = =
Speciation Seen
ERERFEITTTEETT
19
17
us
16
158
ls
be
158
15
197
17
1
vs
m
so
10
10
150
182
w
mr
an
an
an
an
5
us
a
415
u
re
15
Sections
si
52
ES
Section 6
Section?
a
72
7a
75
76
17
Sections
x
$
ss
$
Section
EN
92
93
oa
95
96
Datum Festus . =
Datum Festur Controls nn aoe
Spectyng Datum Feature in an Order of Fra nn z
ED Dats v= 5
“Multiple Datum Features = - - Z
Mathematical Defined Surface = =
“Multiple Datum Reference Frames ammm So
Funebonal Datum Features = u
Rotational Constraint About a Datum Axis or Point S
Application of MMB, LME, and RMB regular Features of Size
‘Datum Feature Selection Practica Application 2 2
Simultaneous Requirements =
Restrained Condition a
Datum Reference Fame Mention aa ee
Customize Datum Reference Frame Construction ~ .
“Application a Customized Datum Reference Frame nn 3
Datum Targets E sun = E
MO te ee
General wa en Ei
For Control = z
Spealying For Tolerances += II
Form Tolerances Er à
Application of Pree State Symbol E Sen
Tolerances O3 nnn
Gener ener eee an
Orientation Control = = ES
Orientation Symbols. — seen Z
Speatying Orientation Tolerances a. = =
Tangent Plane hes aac
Alternative Practice = Ser
Tolerances Late. non
General DS SR
Positional Tolerancia = IL
Positional Tlerneing Fundament = 5 5
Positional Tlerancing Fundamentas .
Pattern Location sn oe
(Coaxial Feature Control nn = 2
“Toleancing for Symmetrical Relationships LT .
Tolerances of Profile
Gener = E
Paie mm u
Tolerance Zone Boundary na = 7
Profile Applications =
Material Condition and Boundary Condition Modes as
Related to Profil Contos = come
Composite role 7 u
‘Multiple Single Segment Profile Tolerancing = 2
Combined Controls. 2 =
Tolerances RUNDE un
Genera =
Ranout = 2 5 =
Ranout Tolerance . CTI
Types of Runout Tlrances nn = =:
Application = =
Speciation Seen
ERERFEITTTEETT
19
17
us
16
158
ls
be
158
15
197
17
1
vs
m
so
10
10
150
182
w
Nonmandatory Appendices
A Principal Changes and Improverten un... a =
5 Formula for PosinalTolrancin - -
€ Form Proportion and Comparison of Sais RE
D Former Practices a \ \
E Decision Diagrams for Geometic Control nn = ==
A Principal Changes and Improverten un... a =
5 Formula for PosinalTolrancin - -
€ Form Proportion and Comparison of Sais RE
D Former Practices a \ \
E Decision Diagrams for Geometic Control nn = ==
FOREWORD
‘This sue ia revision of ASME Y14.5M-194, Dimensioning and Toleancing, The main objet fr this revision has
teen fo errang the material to better dns the thought proces ofthe user when applying Geometrk Dimensoning,
and Tolerancing. The sujet mater of Sections 1 though 4 remain the same a inthe previous revision. Sections 5
and 6 were formerly id “Tolerances of Location” and “Tolerances of Form, Profile, Orientation, and Runout” The
‘new order following Stan 4, Datum, Section 3, Tolerance of Form Seton Tlerances of Orientation: Section,
“Tolerance of Location; Section, Tolerances of Profile nd Section, Tolerances of Runost When applying GD&T Y
firstconsigeration sto establish datum reference frame based on he function ofthepar in the sem y with mat
ing pats. After the datum reference frame is exabished the form of the primary datum features conto, allowed
by the orientan and/or locaton ofthe secondary and teary datum featur. Ar the datum features re related.
relative each cher, the remaining fetus are contol or rtentatin and ection seat he datum reference
Framework Further arrangement hs cour wihin each section o hat he asi Concepts are presented Fs nd
then the material bu to tne more compl. The subcommtce Believes ths will ad the user of Standard totter
understand the sujet of Dimension and Toleranin
The nee ferme that are introduced are used only with datums. The terms are “maximum material boundary
(MM) "hast material boundan (MB) and regardless of mater boundary (RMB) Thee terms beer describe
‘hat there isa boundary defied when applying datums. MMB and LMB may bea maximum material or least material
boundary respectively, or the applicable virtual condition. The MMB would bean actual maximum materia boundary
ifthe tolerance (ation or orienta) fr that datum feature was Ze at MMC. The LMB would be an acta lst
materia boundary ifthe tolerance (nation o orientation) for that datum feature as er at LMC Inthe as of a
{ure of size as primary datum eta, the MMB or LME ould be the actual maim or east materi boundary 4
the orm ofthe feature of size was contra by Rule, ora zero at MMC or LMC tiges of the axis of fates of
the center plane was applied, RMB indicates hat the datum features apply at any boundary bass on the actualize of
the ature and any geometric tolerance appli hat together generate unique boundary.
Since many major industries ae becoming more plbıl, rung inthe decentralization of design and manufacture
ing, ts even more important that he design more pel sate the Functional requirements. o acomplish Ns
AR becoming increasingly important thatthe un of geometrie and dimensioning (DET) replace the forme it
‘imersionig for form orientation location and profile of par features. This revision contains paragraphs that give
A stranger admonition than in the post tht the ll defined drawing shouldbe dimensioned using GDET with it
dimensioning reserved primary fr the size dimensions for features o ze. Additonal recognizing the need lo
automate te design, analysis, and measurement procesos, and reduce the numberof view dependent kanes,”
‘tional symbelogy has ben introduce for some more common olorancing practice
‘Work on this sue an meting in Soros, Flori in January 199. Numerous defer commen fom he
public review forthe previous revision, aswell as proposals fo revision and improvement from the subeommite nd
Interested ports rom the user community, wer evaluated at subsequent semiannual meetings. The subcommittee
Alive into working groups for several mings and then roonvened aa subcommittee as à whole to review and
‘ensure the continu ofthe revision.
International, ne joint harmonization group formed in January 193 was cai the 1SO/TC 31057 JHG. The
tect was o harmoniz the work an principles among I50/TC3 Surface Texture, SO/TC 10SC 5 Dimensoning and
‘Tolerncing, and 1SO/TC 57 Measurement. The sk ofthis group was to identify and suggest resolution o problems
among he tee discipline. Many representative the ASME VIA Ssuhcommito part inthe meetings of hs
tp fom September 195 through Jura 1996. In Pais June 1996 the 180/1C 3.10.57 HGbecameSO/ TC 213 and
the ponte ol the thre other ISO commits were transfered fo ISO/TC 213. Reprsenativeso the US have
parapate inal the SO/TC 23 meetings rom une 196 tough any 1989 Because of dificult, the US. as
Pot represents gain until January 206 and representation now going,
In the US, a Simio comite was formed following the formation of IS0/TC 213 as a home for the US. TAG
(echnical Advisory Group to 150/TC 213 and aso to serve as an advisory commit o the tee US. commit
nd subcommittees hat ae orale othe ISO groups Surface Texture Bab, Dimensning and Tokrancing VIAS, and
“Measurement 159) This ner commit called ZI, was formed at à misting in 197 by representatives ofthe thee
US commit o subcommitees H21S does not have responsibility forall veo subjects as des the ISO committee,
but rather serves asa intermediay to ent and facilite a esltion to probleme tha may exist among the thee
Aiscplines aswell asthe heme for the US.
‘This sue ia revision of ASME Y14.5M-194, Dimensioning and Toleancing, The main objet fr this revision has
teen fo errang the material to better dns the thought proces ofthe user when applying Geometrk Dimensoning,
and Tolerancing. The sujet mater of Sections 1 though 4 remain the same a inthe previous revision. Sections 5
and 6 were formerly id “Tolerances of Location” and “Tolerances of Form, Profile, Orientation, and Runout” The
‘new order following Stan 4, Datum, Section 3, Tolerance of Form Seton Tlerances of Orientation: Section,
“Tolerance of Location; Section, Tolerances of Profile nd Section, Tolerances of Runost When applying GD&T Y
firstconsigeration sto establish datum reference frame based on he function ofthepar in the sem y with mat
ing pats. After the datum reference frame is exabished the form of the primary datum features conto, allowed
by the orientan and/or locaton ofthe secondary and teary datum featur. Ar the datum features re related.
relative each cher, the remaining fetus are contol or rtentatin and ection seat he datum reference
Framework Further arrangement hs cour wihin each section o hat he asi Concepts are presented Fs nd
then the material bu to tne more compl. The subcommtce Believes ths will ad the user of Standard totter
understand the sujet of Dimension and Toleranin
The nee ferme that are introduced are used only with datums. The terms are “maximum material boundary
(MM) "hast material boundan (MB) and regardless of mater boundary (RMB) Thee terms beer describe
‘hat there isa boundary defied when applying datums. MMB and LMB may bea maximum material or least material
boundary respectively, or the applicable virtual condition. The MMB would bean actual maximum materia boundary
ifthe tolerance (ation or orienta) fr that datum feature was Ze at MMC. The LMB would be an acta lst
materia boundary ifthe tolerance (nation o orientation) for that datum feature as er at LMC Inthe as of a
{ure of size as primary datum eta, the MMB or LME ould be the actual maim or east materi boundary 4
the orm ofthe feature of size was contra by Rule, ora zero at MMC or LMC tiges of the axis of fates of
the center plane was applied, RMB indicates hat the datum features apply at any boundary bass on the actualize of
the ature and any geometric tolerance appli hat together generate unique boundary.
Since many major industries ae becoming more plbıl, rung inthe decentralization of design and manufacture
ing, ts even more important that he design more pel sate the Functional requirements. o acomplish Ns
AR becoming increasingly important thatthe un of geometrie and dimensioning (DET) replace the forme it
‘imersionig for form orientation location and profile of par features. This revision contains paragraphs that give
A stranger admonition than in the post tht the ll defined drawing shouldbe dimensioned using GDET with it
dimensioning reserved primary fr the size dimensions for features o ze. Additonal recognizing the need lo
automate te design, analysis, and measurement procesos, and reduce the numberof view dependent kanes,”
‘tional symbelogy has ben introduce for some more common olorancing practice
‘Work on this sue an meting in Soros, Flori in January 199. Numerous defer commen fom he
public review forthe previous revision, aswell as proposals fo revision and improvement from the subeommite nd
Interested ports rom the user community, wer evaluated at subsequent semiannual meetings. The subcommittee
Alive into working groups for several mings and then roonvened aa subcommittee as à whole to review and
‘ensure the continu ofthe revision.
International, ne joint harmonization group formed in January 193 was cai the 1SO/TC 31057 JHG. The
tect was o harmoniz the work an principles among I50/TC3 Surface Texture, SO/TC 10SC 5 Dimensoning and
‘Tolerncing, and 1SO/TC 57 Measurement. The sk ofthis group was to identify and suggest resolution o problems
among he tee discipline. Many representative the ASME VIA Ssuhcommito part inthe meetings of hs
tp fom September 195 through Jura 1996. In Pais June 1996 the 180/1C 3.10.57 HGbecameSO/ TC 213 and
the ponte ol the thre other ISO commits were transfered fo ISO/TC 213. Reprsenativeso the US have
parapate inal the SO/TC 23 meetings rom une 196 tough any 1989 Because of dificult, the US. as
Pot represents gain until January 206 and representation now going,
In the US, a Simio comite was formed following the formation of IS0/TC 213 as a home for the US. TAG
(echnical Advisory Group to 150/TC 213 and aso to serve as an advisory commit o the tee US. commit
nd subcommittees hat ae orale othe ISO groups Surface Texture Bab, Dimensning and Tokrancing VIAS, and
“Measurement 159) This ner commit called ZI, was formed at à misting in 197 by representatives ofthe thee
US commit o subcommitees H21S does not have responsibility forall veo subjects as des the ISO committee,
but rather serves asa intermediay to ent and facilite a esltion to probleme tha may exist among the thee
Aiscplines aswell asthe heme for the US.
‘Suggestions for improvement of this Standard are welcome. They should be sent to The American Society of
Mechanical Engine At Secretary, VIA Standards Comite; Thre ark Avene New York, NY 1016
“This revision was approved as am American National Standard on February 6,209,
NOTE: The user's tention call to the possibility that compliance with this Standard may quiro use fan invon-
ton covered by patent rights
By publication ofthis Standard, no poston is aken with respect othe vat ofany such cai) oof any patent
rights in connection therewith a patent holder as fed a statement of willingness Lo gran license under these
Figs on resonable and nondisrimnatoy terms and conditions 1 applicant desing obtain such aliens, then
‘details may be baie fom te standard develope.
Acknowledgments
PJ. MeCulstion, Ohi University cate the illustrations for his Standard.
Mechanical Engine At Secretary, VIA Standards Comite; Thre ark Avene New York, NY 1016
“This revision was approved as am American National Standard on February 6,209,
NOTE: The user's tention call to the possibility that compliance with this Standard may quiro use fan invon-
ton covered by patent rights
By publication ofthis Standard, no poston is aken with respect othe vat ofany such cai) oof any patent
rights in connection therewith a patent holder as fed a statement of willingness Lo gran license under these
Figs on resonable and nondisrimnatoy terms and conditions 1 applicant desing obtain such aliens, then
‘details may be baie fom te standard develope.
Acknowledgments
PJ. MeCulstion, Ohi University cate the illustrations for his Standard.
ASME Y14 COMMITTEE
Engineering Drawing and Related Documentation Practices
(healing ste ft mn tie ppal Sa)
STANDARDS COMMITTEE OFFICERS
mA a ie ar
Camas scr
STANDARDS COMMITTEE PERSONNEL
‘A tern, Dinero Contrate
Diners Dre Le
I ur Comte
Bb Rte
bebe Sones PU Sata, ne / combi Des See
‘Clone Po ne oc cnica Espe
BA Hang. Poe Une
A aa spit routes ne
Pittston Ova en
3 Mende ones. kendo a Acts I.
LA Sm Ces ne
A Sat, pi ersten ne
KE Mg Sonda al tes
EG tin y on os
‘SUBCOMMITTEE 5 — DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING
AR Anon Car mesos ont Stem /
Biers yaoi ee
ALIS
bebe Sens Sota comic Dese Seve
ota asi ona re
Econ Sf Serta Te Amen ay of
Mak Jamon untar Corro
BP Ke ha ar seco Snes
PDK Sete tens
SUBCOMMITTEE 5 —
ME eet
XS. rest
‘Noa fete aio.
PL Ova Ue
E Potes sec Epes
M Seger step nds
‘ik aan me Bosa
A M aca rns
SUPPORT GROUP
A Me Loco Mari Ares
A carton Coon
LE Man Cosa
Engineering Drawing and Related Documentation Practices
(healing ste ft mn tie ppal Sa)
STANDARDS COMMITTEE OFFICERS
mA a ie ar
Camas scr
STANDARDS COMMITTEE PERSONNEL
‘A tern, Dinero Contrate
Diners Dre Le
I ur Comte
Bb Rte
bebe Sones PU Sata, ne / combi Des See
‘Clone Po ne oc cnica Espe
BA Hang. Poe Une
A aa spit routes ne
Pittston Ova en
3 Mende ones. kendo a Acts I.
LA Sm Ces ne
A Sat, pi ersten ne
KE Mg Sonda al tes
EG tin y on os
‘SUBCOMMITTEE 5 — DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING
AR Anon Car mesos ont Stem /
Biers yaoi ee
ALIS
bebe Sens Sota comic Dese Seve
ota asi ona re
Econ Sf Serta Te Amen ay of
Mak Jamon untar Corro
BP Ke ha ar seco Snes
PDK Sete tens
SUBCOMMITTEE 5 —
ME eet
XS. rest
‘Noa fete aio.
PL Ova Ue
E Potes sec Epes
M Seger step nds
‘ik aan me Bosa
A M aca rns
SUPPORT GROUP
A Me Loco Mari Ares
A carton Coon
LE Man Cosa
CORRESPONDENCE WITH THE Y14 COMMITTEE
General, ASME Standard are developed and maintsined with the intento represent he consensus of concerned
frets As such, user of thin Standard may interact with the Commitee by proposing revisions and atending
imite meetings, Comespondence should be addressed to
Secretary, VA Standards Commitee
‘The American Society of Mechanical Engineer
“Three Park Avene
Nes York, NY 10016-5990
Proposing Revisions. Revisions are made periodically to the Standard o incorporate changes that appear neces
sary or desable as demonstrated by the experience gained fom the application ofthe Standard. Approved nv
Sons will be published periodical
The Committee welcomes proposss or rvisions to this Standard. Such proposal should be a specific as possible,
citing the paragraph number(s) the proposed wording, and a detailed description ofthe reson foe the proposal
{cluding any pertinent documentation,
Proposing a Case. Cases may be ud for the purpose of providing alternative rales when justified, to permit
rly implementation of an approved revision when the need angen, or o provide rules not covered by ex
ing provisions, Cases are effective immediatly upon ASME approval and shal be posted on the ASME Commitee
Web page
Rest for Cases shall provide a Statement of Need and Background Information. The request should ¡det
(he dard, the paragraph igure or table umber), and be weiten as a Question and Reply in he same format
sensing Cases: Request for Cases shoul slo indicate the applicable edition ofthe standard to which the pros
posed Cae apple
Atending Committee Meetings. The YI Standards Commitee regularly hols meetings or telephone conferences,
which an open to the public Persons wishing to attend any meeting or telephone conference should contact he
Secretary ofthe Y Standards Commit or check ur Web site a htp//estonlaasmeorg/escannet/
General, ASME Standard are developed and maintsined with the intento represent he consensus of concerned
frets As such, user of thin Standard may interact with the Commitee by proposing revisions and atending
imite meetings, Comespondence should be addressed to
Secretary, VA Standards Commitee
‘The American Society of Mechanical Engineer
“Three Park Avene
Nes York, NY 10016-5990
Proposing Revisions. Revisions are made periodically to the Standard o incorporate changes that appear neces
sary or desable as demonstrated by the experience gained fom the application ofthe Standard. Approved nv
Sons will be published periodical
The Committee welcomes proposss or rvisions to this Standard. Such proposal should be a specific as possible,
citing the paragraph number(s) the proposed wording, and a detailed description ofthe reson foe the proposal
{cluding any pertinent documentation,
Proposing a Case. Cases may be ud for the purpose of providing alternative rales when justified, to permit
rly implementation of an approved revision when the need angen, or o provide rules not covered by ex
ing provisions, Cases are effective immediatly upon ASME approval and shal be posted on the ASME Commitee
Web page
Rest for Cases shall provide a Statement of Need and Background Information. The request should ¡det
(he dard, the paragraph igure or table umber), and be weiten as a Question and Reply in he same format
sensing Cases: Request for Cases shoul slo indicate the applicable edition ofthe standard to which the pros
posed Cae apple
Atending Committee Meetings. The YI Standards Commitee regularly hols meetings or telephone conferences,
which an open to the public Persons wishing to attend any meeting or telephone conference should contact he
Secretary ofthe Y Standards Commit or check ur Web site a htp//estonlaasmeorg/escannet/
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIMENSIONING
AND TOLERANCING
Section 1
Scope, Definitions, anı
11 score
‘his Standard establishes uniform practices for
stating and interpreting dimensioning, oran NE, and
related requirements for use on engineering drawings
And in related documents For a mathematical explo
‘ation of many ofthe principles inthis Standard see
ASMEVIAS.L Practices unique toarchlectural and civil
‘gineering and welding symbology are not included,
144 General
Section 1 establishes definitions, fundamental rules,
and practices for general dimensioning. Fo alerancing
practices, we Sections 2 rough 9 Additional informo:
Sion about tolrancing maybe found in Nonmandatory
‘Appendices A through E
142 Units
‘The Intemational System of Units (SD is featured in
this Standard because S unis ae expected to supersede
United Ste (US) citomary unis speci on engineer.
ing drawings. Customary unit cou equally wel have
sem un without prejudice tothe pringpes established
11.3 Reference to This Standard
‘Where drawings are bass on this Standard, his fst
shall be noted on Ihe drawings or ina document refer
‘cen the drawings. Reerencesto this Standard shall
Ste ASME V5 200.
144 Figures
The figures in this Standard ar intended only as
iustrtions lo aid the user in understanding the prin:
‘iples and methods of dimensioning and toerancing
“described in tb txt Te absence of figure tr
ing the desired application is neither reason 10 assume
nspplicabiy, nor basis for drawing rejection In some
inslanes, igure show added detail for emphasis
In ther instances, figures are incomplete by inten
[Numerical values of dimensions and tolerances are
‘istrative only. Maltvew drawings contained within
figures are rd angle projection.
d General Dimensioning
Peep tan eosin
Ip me Hse ay yt ring pet
115 Notes
Notes her in capital eters are intend to appesron
fished drawings: Noosin lower tes are explana
tory only and are nt intended to appear on drawings
1.16 Reference to Gaging
‘Thisdocumentsnotintended asa ogingstandord Any
reference o gaging i inchs for explanatory purposes
‘only. Fr gaging principes see GME Y1443 Dimension
Ingand Telerancang Principles for Gages and ites
147 Symbols
Adoption of symbols indicating dimensional
requirements, as shown in Fig. C2 of Nonmandatory
Appendix, does not preclude the use of equivalent
terms or abbreviations whee synbology i considered
Inappropriate
12 REFERENCES
‘The following revisions of American National
Standardsformapartofihis Standard theextentspech
fiedheein À mor cent revision may beused provided
‘here fo cont with dhe text of his Standard In the
‘vent ofa conflict etecen the texto his Standard and
ie references cited herein the texto this Standard shall
take precedence
121 Ged Standards
ANSI/ ASME B89.62-1973 (R200), Temperature
‘and Humidity Environment for Dimensional
Measurement
ANSI/ ASME 946-1984 (R200) Knurling,
‘ANSI 421978 (00), Preferred Met Limits
ans Fits
AND TOLERANCING
Section 1
Scope, Definitions, anı
11 score
‘his Standard establishes uniform practices for
stating and interpreting dimensioning, oran NE, and
related requirements for use on engineering drawings
And in related documents For a mathematical explo
‘ation of many ofthe principles inthis Standard see
ASMEVIAS.L Practices unique toarchlectural and civil
‘gineering and welding symbology are not included,
144 General
Section 1 establishes definitions, fundamental rules,
and practices for general dimensioning. Fo alerancing
practices, we Sections 2 rough 9 Additional informo:
Sion about tolrancing maybe found in Nonmandatory
‘Appendices A through E
142 Units
‘The Intemational System of Units (SD is featured in
this Standard because S unis ae expected to supersede
United Ste (US) citomary unis speci on engineer.
ing drawings. Customary unit cou equally wel have
sem un without prejudice tothe pringpes established
11.3 Reference to This Standard
‘Where drawings are bass on this Standard, his fst
shall be noted on Ihe drawings or ina document refer
‘cen the drawings. Reerencesto this Standard shall
Ste ASME V5 200.
144 Figures
The figures in this Standard ar intended only as
iustrtions lo aid the user in understanding the prin:
‘iples and methods of dimensioning and toerancing
“described in tb txt Te absence of figure tr
ing the desired application is neither reason 10 assume
nspplicabiy, nor basis for drawing rejection In some
inslanes, igure show added detail for emphasis
In ther instances, figures are incomplete by inten
[Numerical values of dimensions and tolerances are
‘istrative only. Maltvew drawings contained within
figures are rd angle projection.
d General Dimensioning
Peep tan eosin
Ip me Hse ay yt ring pet
115 Notes
Notes her in capital eters are intend to appesron
fished drawings: Noosin lower tes are explana
tory only and are nt intended to appear on drawings
1.16 Reference to Gaging
‘Thisdocumentsnotintended asa ogingstandord Any
reference o gaging i inchs for explanatory purposes
‘only. Fr gaging principes see GME Y1443 Dimension
Ingand Telerancang Principles for Gages and ites
147 Symbols
Adoption of symbols indicating dimensional
requirements, as shown in Fig. C2 of Nonmandatory
Appendix, does not preclude the use of equivalent
terms or abbreviations whee synbology i considered
Inappropriate
12 REFERENCES
‘The following revisions of American National
Standardsformapartofihis Standard theextentspech
fiedheein À mor cent revision may beused provided
‘here fo cont with dhe text of his Standard In the
‘vent ofa conflict etecen the texto his Standard and
ie references cited herein the texto this Standard shall
take precedence
121 Ged Standards
ANSI/ ASME B89.62-1973 (R200), Temperature
‘and Humidity Environment for Dimensional
Measurement
ANSI/ ASME 946-1984 (R200) Knurling,
‘ANSI 421978 (00), Preferred Met Limits
ans Fits
ANSIB89 31-1972 (R200), Measurement of
“Out Roundness
ANSI1821-1996, vole Splines and Inspection,
Inch Version|
ANSIB8222N19801 Metric Module, Involute
‘Splines
ANSIYI4.62001 (207) Screw Thread
Representation
(ANSE VIA 60-1981 (1998 Screw Thread
Representation (Metric Supplement)
Publisher: American National Standards Institute
(ANSI, 25 Wet Ard Sc, New York, NY 1036
ASME 5 1041994 Machine Tapers — Sel Holding
and Seep Taper Series
ASME 461-2002, Surface Texte,
Roughness, Waviness and Lay
ASME BA. 11M-1990, it Drill
‘ASME Y14:12005 Drawing Sheet Size and Format
‘ASME VIALIM-2UG, Met Drawing Shet Size
‘and Format
ASME VIA22008, Line Conventions and Lettering
‘ASME VIASIM-1994 (R200, Mathematical
Definition of Dimensionin and Tlerancing
inp
ASME YI48 2008, Castings and Forgings
‘ASME YI 36-199 (R208), Surface Texture
‘Symbols
ASME V4 41-203 2008), Digital Product,
Definition Data Practices
ASME Y1418-2005 (E2008), Dinensioningand
“Tolerancing Principles for Gages and Pure
Publisher: The American Society of Mechanical
"Engineers (ASME), Thee Park Avenue, New York, NY
10016; Onder Department 22 Law Deve, PO. Bax 230,
Fail NJ 07007-2300,
ABRE/ASTM SI 10-2002 ERRATA 2005, Standard for
Use ofthe International System of Units) — The
Modern Metric Sytem
Publisher: Institute of Eletrical and Electonics
Engine, (EEE), 45 Hoes Lane, Pisataway, NJ
asst
122 Additional Sources (Wot Cited)
ANSI/ ASME BL21983 (N), Gages and Gaging
for Unfit Inch crew Threads
ANSIIBLAMI88, Inspection of Workpices
Publisher: American National Standards Institute
(ANS), 25 Wet rd Street, New York, NY 10096
ASME V4 2.2005 (82008) Male and
‘Sectional View Drawing
ASME YHL3SM-2007, Abbreviations
‘ASME YH. 100-2004, Engineering Drawing Practices
Publisher The American Society of Mechanical
"Engineers (ASME), Thre Park Avenue New York, NY
10016; Order Department 22 Law Drive, PO. Bex 230,
Fairfield NJ 07007-2300
13. DEFINITIONS
‘The following terms are defined as their use applies
in this Standard. Additionally, ditions throughout
the Standard of Halczed terms are given insets
dseribing their application. Thor location muy bese
‘ie by ering to the index
134 Angulaity
angaleriy see pars 63.
132 Boundary, Inner
ondary. mer à worstease boundary generated by
{he smallest feature (MMC for an internal ea
LMC for an extemal feature) minus the stated geomet
ri tolerance and any additional geometric tolerance
Ut applicable) resulting from the feature’ departure
from its specified material condon. See Figs. 212
through 217
13:3 Boundary Least Material (LME)
ondary les! materi (LM: the mit defined by à
tolerance or combination of tolerances that exists on of
inside the material fa features).
134 Boundary, Maximum Material (MMB)
ound, maximun material (MMB: the mit defined
bya toleranceor combination oftlerances that exists on
outside the material fa ture.
135 Boundary, Outer
sundary ower a worst-case boundary generated
by the largest feature (LMC for an internal feature
and MMC for an external feature) plus the stated
eometrc tolerance and any additional geometric
tolerance (applicable) resulting from the estu
¿epartare from its specified material condition. Soe
Figs. 212 through 2-17,
136 Cirulaiy Raundness)
circularity (rats se pars 543.
“Out Roundness
ANSI1821-1996, vole Splines and Inspection,
Inch Version|
ANSIB8222N19801 Metric Module, Involute
‘Splines
ANSIYI4.62001 (207) Screw Thread
Representation
(ANSE VIA 60-1981 (1998 Screw Thread
Representation (Metric Supplement)
Publisher: American National Standards Institute
(ANSI, 25 Wet Ard Sc, New York, NY 1036
ASME 5 1041994 Machine Tapers — Sel Holding
and Seep Taper Series
ASME 461-2002, Surface Texte,
Roughness, Waviness and Lay
ASME BA. 11M-1990, it Drill
‘ASME Y14:12005 Drawing Sheet Size and Format
‘ASME VIALIM-2UG, Met Drawing Shet Size
‘and Format
ASME VIA22008, Line Conventions and Lettering
‘ASME VIASIM-1994 (R200, Mathematical
Definition of Dimensionin and Tlerancing
inp
ASME YI48 2008, Castings and Forgings
‘ASME YI 36-199 (R208), Surface Texture
‘Symbols
ASME V4 41-203 2008), Digital Product,
Definition Data Practices
ASME Y1418-2005 (E2008), Dinensioningand
“Tolerancing Principles for Gages and Pure
Publisher: The American Society of Mechanical
"Engineers (ASME), Thee Park Avenue, New York, NY
10016; Onder Department 22 Law Deve, PO. Bax 230,
Fail NJ 07007-2300,
ABRE/ASTM SI 10-2002 ERRATA 2005, Standard for
Use ofthe International System of Units) — The
Modern Metric Sytem
Publisher: Institute of Eletrical and Electonics
Engine, (EEE), 45 Hoes Lane, Pisataway, NJ
asst
122 Additional Sources (Wot Cited)
ANSI/ ASME BL21983 (N), Gages and Gaging
for Unfit Inch crew Threads
ANSIIBLAMI88, Inspection of Workpices
Publisher: American National Standards Institute
(ANS), 25 Wet rd Street, New York, NY 10096
ASME V4 2.2005 (82008) Male and
‘Sectional View Drawing
ASME YHL3SM-2007, Abbreviations
‘ASME YH. 100-2004, Engineering Drawing Practices
Publisher The American Society of Mechanical
"Engineers (ASME), Thre Park Avenue New York, NY
10016; Order Department 22 Law Drive, PO. Bex 230,
Fairfield NJ 07007-2300
13. DEFINITIONS
‘The following terms are defined as their use applies
in this Standard. Additionally, ditions throughout
the Standard of Halczed terms are given insets
dseribing their application. Thor location muy bese
‘ie by ering to the index
134 Angulaity
angaleriy see pars 63.
132 Boundary, Inner
ondary. mer à worstease boundary generated by
{he smallest feature (MMC for an internal ea
LMC for an extemal feature) minus the stated geomet
ri tolerance and any additional geometric tolerance
Ut applicable) resulting from the feature’ departure
from its specified material condon. See Figs. 212
through 217
13:3 Boundary Least Material (LME)
ondary les! materi (LM: the mit defined by à
tolerance or combination of tolerances that exists on of
inside the material fa features).
134 Boundary, Maximum Material (MMB)
ound, maximun material (MMB: the mit defined
bya toleranceor combination oftlerances that exists on
outside the material fa ture.
135 Boundary, Outer
sundary ower a worst-case boundary generated
by the largest feature (LMC for an internal feature
and MMC for an external feature) plus the stated
eometrc tolerance and any additional geometric
tolerance (applicable) resulting from the estu
¿epartare from its specified material condition. Soe
Figs. 212 through 2-17,
136 Cirulaiy Raundness)
circularity (rats se pars 543.
137 Coasalty
comity span...
138 Complex Feature
complex feature: single surface of compound curva:
re or a collection of oer features that contras up
We degrees freedom
139 Concert
concours so para. 764.
1340 Coplanarity
plaise para 84.11,
4341 Constraint
oran limito one or more degrees of cdot
1342 Cindy
dia see para. 544.
1343 Datum
ur a theoretically exact point, axis lie, plane, or
combination thereof derived from the theoretic datum
feature simulator
13.26 Datum Ass
atari he ais of datum fotune simulator eta
lished from the datum fate
1345 Datum Center Plane
atu center plane: te center plane of a datum feature
simulator established rom the atu feature
13.16 Datum Feature
aun ature: este tat ented with either à
dam feature symbol or a datum target symbol.
1.2.17 Datum Feature Simulator
atu tre simulator encompasses to types: theo-
retical and physica See paras 13171 and 13172
13474 Datum Feature Simulator Theoretical) tum
tue simubtor (reta. the cortical perfect
boundary used exi a datum fom a spect
atom este
‘hs Sano dr hee ls spec the
13.172 Datum Feature Simulator Physical). datum
fete Sms (pss the physical boundary use
to establish simulated datum fom a specified datum
feature
[NOTE For example ga test og dats ah
Simao iy ae pe» Fr mutes
‘te pls devel rn em are ul D ae
Sh ac di re tn a dp
1.3.18 Datum Reference Frame
at ference frame se para.
1349 Datum, Simulated
tatu, simulada paint, axis ie, or plane or combi
nation threo) colncident with or derived rom process
ing or inspection equipment, such a the following
simulator surface plate, age surface, a manda, or
‘mathematical simulation. Se para.
1320 Datum Target
tum target se pra. 24
1321 Diameter, Average
lames average: ee para. 583,
1322 Dimension
dimension: a numerical values) or mathematical
expresion in appropriate units of measure wid to
chino the form, sie, orientation or location, of apart
entre
1323 Dimension, Basie
dimension, use: theoretically xt dimension.
1324 Dimension Reference
dimension, reference: à dimension, usually without
ce hat is used for informational purposes.
comity span...
138 Complex Feature
complex feature: single surface of compound curva:
re or a collection of oer features that contras up
We degrees freedom
139 Concert
concours so para. 764.
1340 Coplanarity
plaise para 84.11,
4341 Constraint
oran limito one or more degrees of cdot
1342 Cindy
dia see para. 544.
1343 Datum
ur a theoretically exact point, axis lie, plane, or
combination thereof derived from the theoretic datum
feature simulator
13.26 Datum Ass
atari he ais of datum fotune simulator eta
lished from the datum fate
1345 Datum Center Plane
atu center plane: te center plane of a datum feature
simulator established rom the atu feature
13.16 Datum Feature
aun ature: este tat ented with either à
dam feature symbol or a datum target symbol.
1.2.17 Datum Feature Simulator
atu tre simulator encompasses to types: theo-
retical and physica See paras 13171 and 13172
13474 Datum Feature Simulator Theoretical) tum
tue simubtor (reta. the cortical perfect
boundary used exi a datum fom a spect
atom este
‘hs Sano dr hee ls spec the
13.172 Datum Feature Simulator Physical). datum
fete Sms (pss the physical boundary use
to establish simulated datum fom a specified datum
feature
[NOTE For example ga test og dats ah
Simao iy ae pe» Fr mutes
‘te pls devel rn em are ul D ae
Sh ac di re tn a dp
1.3.18 Datum Reference Frame
at ference frame se para.
1349 Datum, Simulated
tatu, simulada paint, axis ie, or plane or combi
nation threo) colncident with or derived rom process
ing or inspection equipment, such a the following
simulator surface plate, age surface, a manda, or
‘mathematical simulation. Se para.
1320 Datum Target
tum target se pra. 24
1321 Diameter, Average
lames average: ee para. 583,
1322 Dimension
dimension: a numerical values) or mathematical
expresion in appropriate units of measure wid to
chino the form, sie, orientation or location, of apart
entre
1323 Dimension, Basie
dimension, use: theoretically xt dimension.
1324 Dimension Reference
dimension, reference: à dimension, usually without
ce hat is used for informational purposes.
Fig. 1-1 Related and Unrelated Actual Mating Envelope
ae
Los
aa Y a
EL,
6.22 dtd and Uae cua Mao eos Cont
—
sue nee
Sen, :
de rs a mes
es 4 ——
ES en,
| y Stace
! Derive man Do
Someta
y
#006 pony ms are cal
ete mn tet vues shown on fhe ding or on related
1325 Envelope, Actual Mating
rvebpe, atu mating his envelope is outside the
material À similar perfect Katurgs) counterpart of
small size that can be contracted about an external
featur) or gest size hat an be expanded within an
internal estar) so that coincides withthe surfaces)
at the highest points, To types of actual mating enve-
lopez unrelated and related are described in paras.
132511413252
13254 Unrelated Actual Mating Envelope.
atl tal mating ele asimila perfect fates)
‘ounterpart expanded within an internal features) or
contaced about an external feature(s), and not con.
Strained to any datum) See Fig, I
ae
Los
aa Y a
EL,
6.22 dtd and Uae cua Mao eos Cont
—
sue nee
Sen, :
de rs a mes
es 4 ——
ES en,
| y Stace
! Derive man Do
Someta
y
#006 pony ms are cal
ete mn tet vues shown on fhe ding or on related
1325 Envelope, Actual Mating
rvebpe, atu mating his envelope is outside the
material À similar perfect Katurgs) counterpart of
small size that can be contracted about an external
featur) or gest size hat an be expanded within an
internal estar) so that coincides withthe surfaces)
at the highest points, To types of actual mating enve-
lopez unrelated and related are described in paras.
132511413252
13254 Unrelated Actual Mating Envelope.
atl tal mating ele asimila perfect fates)
‘ounterpart expanded within an internal features) or
contaced about an external feature(s), and not con.
Strained to any datum) See Fig, I
Fig.1-2. Related and Unelated Actual Minimum Envelope From Figure 1-1
‘Selon eal eee:
13252 Related Actual Mating Envelope. rato!
Act mating emelpe: similar perfs fete coun
ferpaet expanded within an internal Feature) or com
ted about an external feturets) while constrained
‘ther in orientation or location or both othe applicable
datums) See Fig
11326 Envelope, Actual Minimum Material
envelope, actual minim materia: this envelope is
within the mater. À similar perfect featre(s) cou.
part of largest size that
external feature(s) or sma
tracted about an internal feature(s) so that coincdes
‘withthe surfaces) at the lowest points. Two types
‘of actual minimum material envelopes — unrelated
And related — are described ln paras. 13261 and
13262
13264 Unrelated Actual Minimum Material Env
ope. ltd actual minimum material ere à
Similar perec feature(s) counterpart contracted about
an internal feature(s) or expanded within an external
stur), and not constraincd 10 any datum reference
frame See 12.
13262 Related Actual Minimum Material Env.
ope elated actus minimum materiaeneopeasinlar
perl ature) counterpart contract about an inter
a features) or expand within an eternal Kates)
‘stile constrained in ether orientation or cation or
both 1 he applicable datum). Se Fig. 12
1227 Feature
ature a physical portion of part such as surface,
pinhole, or lt o representation on deve mod
‘eo digit dat les
1328 Feature Ads
ature as he ais of the unrelated actual mating
envebope of etre
‘thot kn ating ce ne
1329 Feature, Center Plane of
fore, conte plane of the center
actual mating envelope a feature
lane ofthe unelatet
‘Selon eal eee:
13252 Related Actual Mating Envelope. rato!
Act mating emelpe: similar perfs fete coun
ferpaet expanded within an internal Feature) or com
ted about an external feturets) while constrained
‘ther in orientation or location or both othe applicable
datums) See Fig
11326 Envelope, Actual Minimum Material
envelope, actual minim materia: this envelope is
within the mater. À similar perfect featre(s) cou.
part of largest size that
external feature(s) or sma
tracted about an internal feature(s) so that coincdes
‘withthe surfaces) at the lowest points. Two types
‘of actual minimum material envelopes — unrelated
And related — are described ln paras. 13261 and
13262
13264 Unrelated Actual Minimum Material Env
ope. ltd actual minimum material ere à
Similar perec feature(s) counterpart contracted about
an internal feature(s) or expanded within an external
stur), and not constraincd 10 any datum reference
frame See 12.
13262 Related Actual Minimum Material Env.
ope elated actus minimum materiaeneopeasinlar
perl ature) counterpart contract about an inter
a features) or expand within an eternal Kates)
‘stile constrained in ether orientation or cation or
both 1 he applicable datum). Se Fig. 12
1227 Feature
ature a physical portion of part such as surface,
pinhole, or lt o representation on deve mod
‘eo digit dat les
1328 Feature Ads
ature as he ais of the unrelated actual mating
envebope of etre
‘thot kn ating ce ne
1329 Feature, Center Plane of
fore, conte plane of the center
actual mating envelope a feature
lane ofthe unelatet
eke reso he er plane of he red cl mati
‘eigen ci ber
1220 Derived Median Plane
derived medion plan, an imperia (abstract) plane
formedby the center points aline segments bounded
bythe entre. These ie segments are normal (pepen-
lula) othe center plane ofthe unrelted actual mat-
ingenvelope
13.31 Derived Median Line
¿erica mation ne: an impercc (abstract) ne formed,
he center point of al rs sections ofthe feature
These cose socio are normal (perpendicular) o the
xi of the unrelated acta mating envelop,
1332 FeatureofSize
feature of sce: encompasses two types: regular and
irregular Soe paras LA and 13322.
1392.1 Regular Feature of Size. rouler future of
siz! one epindical or spherical surfe, a eur le
ment, and à st of two opposed parallel elements or
oppose parallel surfaces, each of which is associted
sth diet tlerncnd dimension See para. 22.
13322 regular Feature of Size. regule ture
a the two types of regalar fetus l size ar as
follows
(a) directly toleranced feature or collection of fe
tures hat may contain be contained by an cial ma
ingenvelope Maris a sphere cylinder, oF pai of parallel
planes
(0) a directly tolerance festure or collection of fes
tures that may contain or be contained by an actual mat
ing envelope other than à sphere, cylinder par of
pale planes
13.33 Feature Control Frame
tue conta frame se para. 341
1334 Featue-Reating Tolerance Zone Framework
CRT
fetus tolerance zone framework FRTZE te
tolerance zone framework) that controls the basic
relationship beten the entre in à pattern with hat
Framework constrained in rtatonal degrees of freedom
relative to ny references datum feature,
1335 Freestate
esta the condition ofa prt re of applied forces
1336 Free State Variation
Fresse raton ee para. 55,
1337 Flatness
aimes: ee par. 542.
1328 Least Material Condition (UNO)
lest material condition (LMC): tn condition in which
a feature of size contains the last amount od muera
tin he stat limits of size (eg maximum ho
lamer minimum shaft diameter)
1.3.39 Maximum Material Condition (MMC)
mar materia condition (MMC he condition in
which feature of sie contains the maximum amount
‘of material within the sated mis of ie mn
‘um hole diameter, maximum shat diameter)
12.40 Non-Unitorm Tolerance Zone.
or uni tlerance sone se pora. $32.
1342 Paralleism
parle se pars. 632.
1342 Pattern
pater: two or more features or features of size to
wich a cational geometric tekrance is applied and
re grouped by one of the following methods: nn
COANAL HOLES, ALL OVER, A. 8, m SURFACES,
eos requirements, or INDICATED,
1343 Patter-Locating Tolerance Zone Framework
(eu)
pater cui olorance zone frameuork (LIZ) the
tolerance zoe framework that controls the base elie
(üonahip between the features in a pate with that
imevor contained in transitional and rotational
degree of fisedom reve lo the referenced datum
fur.
13.48 Perpendicularty
perpendicular so pa. 633.
1345 Plane, Tangent
Plane tangent plane that contacts the high points of
the specified featuresurace
13.46 Position
postion: se pora. 72
‘eigen ci ber
1220 Derived Median Plane
derived medion plan, an imperia (abstract) plane
formedby the center points aline segments bounded
bythe entre. These ie segments are normal (pepen-
lula) othe center plane ofthe unrelted actual mat-
ingenvelope
13.31 Derived Median Line
¿erica mation ne: an impercc (abstract) ne formed,
he center point of al rs sections ofthe feature
These cose socio are normal (perpendicular) o the
xi of the unrelated acta mating envelop,
1332 FeatureofSize
feature of sce: encompasses two types: regular and
irregular Soe paras LA and 13322.
1392.1 Regular Feature of Size. rouler future of
siz! one epindical or spherical surfe, a eur le
ment, and à st of two opposed parallel elements or
oppose parallel surfaces, each of which is associted
sth diet tlerncnd dimension See para. 22.
13322 regular Feature of Size. regule ture
a the two types of regalar fetus l size ar as
follows
(a) directly toleranced feature or collection of fe
tures hat may contain be contained by an cial ma
ingenvelope Maris a sphere cylinder, oF pai of parallel
planes
(0) a directly tolerance festure or collection of fes
tures that may contain or be contained by an actual mat
ing envelope other than à sphere, cylinder par of
pale planes
13.33 Feature Control Frame
tue conta frame se para. 341
1334 Featue-Reating Tolerance Zone Framework
CRT
fetus tolerance zone framework FRTZE te
tolerance zone framework) that controls the basic
relationship beten the entre in à pattern with hat
Framework constrained in rtatonal degrees of freedom
relative to ny references datum feature,
1335 Freestate
esta the condition ofa prt re of applied forces
1336 Free State Variation
Fresse raton ee para. 55,
1337 Flatness
aimes: ee par. 542.
1328 Least Material Condition (UNO)
lest material condition (LMC): tn condition in which
a feature of size contains the last amount od muera
tin he stat limits of size (eg maximum ho
lamer minimum shaft diameter)
1.3.39 Maximum Material Condition (MMC)
mar materia condition (MMC he condition in
which feature of sie contains the maximum amount
‘of material within the sated mis of ie mn
‘um hole diameter, maximum shat diameter)
12.40 Non-Unitorm Tolerance Zone.
or uni tlerance sone se pora. $32.
1342 Paralleism
parle se pars. 632.
1342 Pattern
pater: two or more features or features of size to
wich a cational geometric tekrance is applied and
re grouped by one of the following methods: nn
COANAL HOLES, ALL OVER, A. 8, m SURFACES,
eos requirements, or INDICATED,
1343 Patter-Locating Tolerance Zone Framework
(eu)
pater cui olorance zone frameuork (LIZ) the
tolerance zoe framework that controls the base elie
(üonahip between the features in a pate with that
imevor contained in transitional and rotational
degree of fisedom reve lo the referenced datum
fur.
13.48 Perpendicularty
perpendicular so pa. 633.
1345 Plane, Tangent
Plane tangent plane that contacts the high points of
the specified featuresurace
13.46 Position
postion: se pora. 72
1347 Profile
profile sce para. 82
1.248 Regardless of Feature Size (RFS)
reparle of fue sc (RAS indicates a geometric
tolerance applies at any increment of sizeof the actual
‘mating envelope of he feature of size
1.349 Regardless of Material Boundary (RMB)
gins of material boundary (RMB): indicates th
datum feature simulator progress fom MMB toward
LME until it makes maximum contact with the extrem
ties ofa features)
1.250 Restraint
saint the application of forces toa art to simu-
Inte ite assembly” or functional condition resting in
possible isorion ofa part rom itsfre-stat condition.
Eee par. 42.
1351 Resultant Condition
resultat condition: the single worstcase bound:
acy generated by the collective effects of feature of
the ae speci MMC or LMC, the geometrk tole
nce for that marl condition, the size tolerance, and
the additional geometric tolerance derived from the
este deporte from is specified material condi
tion Soe Fige 212,213, 2-15, and 216
1352 Runout
mo: see par. 92.
1.353 Simultaneous Requirement
Sida oquirement se para 4.18.
13.58 Size, Actual Local
sis, actual loa: the measured value of any individ-
ua distance at any cross section ofa feature of size. See
Ag.
1355 Sie, Limits of
size, mis of the specified maximum and minimum
sizes Se para.27.
13.56 Size, Nominal
sis, mina: the designation used for purposes of
general identification.
1357 Staighiness
trains: se para. SA
1.258 Statistical Toerancing.
Statistical olerencin se para. 217.
1359 Symmetry
amet: see por.772
1360 Tolerance
tolerance: the total amount a specie dimensions pe
mita to vary. The tolerance the difference between.
ema and minimum ii
1.361 Tolerance, Bilateral
tolerance bate tolerance in which variation isper-
mitte in both directions from the specified! dimension
1.362 Tolerance, Geometric
toleran, geometric: the general term applied tothe cat
gory of tolerances used o contro size, form, pre,
rentar location, and runout
1363 Tolerance, Unilateral,
rue, wae tolerance in hich variation is
permitted in ne direcion from the specifi dimension
1364 True Position
¿rue pto: the theoretically exact location ofa fea-
ture of size, as established by basic dimensions
1365 True Profile
true rfl: se par. 82.
1.266 Uniform Tolerance Zone
amorce sone: ee par. 83.
1367 Vinual Condition
ital contin: constant boundary generate by the
olive effects oa considered feature the izes spe
Mid MMC or LMC and the geomet tolerance for at
material condition. See Fig 212,213,215 and 216
14. FUNDAMENTAL RULES
Dimensioning and tolerancing shall karly define
engineering inten nd shal conform othe following
profile sce para. 82
1.248 Regardless of Feature Size (RFS)
reparle of fue sc (RAS indicates a geometric
tolerance applies at any increment of sizeof the actual
‘mating envelope of he feature of size
1.349 Regardless of Material Boundary (RMB)
gins of material boundary (RMB): indicates th
datum feature simulator progress fom MMB toward
LME until it makes maximum contact with the extrem
ties ofa features)
1.250 Restraint
saint the application of forces toa art to simu-
Inte ite assembly” or functional condition resting in
possible isorion ofa part rom itsfre-stat condition.
Eee par. 42.
1351 Resultant Condition
resultat condition: the single worstcase bound:
acy generated by the collective effects of feature of
the ae speci MMC or LMC, the geometrk tole
nce for that marl condition, the size tolerance, and
the additional geometric tolerance derived from the
este deporte from is specified material condi
tion Soe Fige 212,213, 2-15, and 216
1352 Runout
mo: see par. 92.
1.353 Simultaneous Requirement
Sida oquirement se para 4.18.
13.58 Size, Actual Local
sis, actual loa: the measured value of any individ-
ua distance at any cross section ofa feature of size. See
Ag.
1355 Sie, Limits of
size, mis of the specified maximum and minimum
sizes Se para.27.
13.56 Size, Nominal
sis, mina: the designation used for purposes of
general identification.
1357 Staighiness
trains: se para. SA
1.258 Statistical Toerancing.
Statistical olerencin se para. 217.
1359 Symmetry
amet: see por.772
1360 Tolerance
tolerance: the total amount a specie dimensions pe
mita to vary. The tolerance the difference between.
ema and minimum ii
1.361 Tolerance, Bilateral
tolerance bate tolerance in which variation isper-
mitte in both directions from the specified! dimension
1.362 Tolerance, Geometric
toleran, geometric: the general term applied tothe cat
gory of tolerances used o contro size, form, pre,
rentar location, and runout
1363 Tolerance, Unilateral,
rue, wae tolerance in hich variation is
permitted in ne direcion from the specifi dimension
1364 True Position
¿rue pto: the theoretically exact location ofa fea-
ture of size, as established by basic dimensions
1365 True Profile
true rfl: se par. 82.
1.266 Uniform Tolerance Zone
amorce sone: ee par. 83.
1367 Vinual Condition
ital contin: constant boundary generate by the
olive effects oa considered feature the izes spe
Mid MMC or LMC and the geomet tolerance for at
material condition. See Fig 212,213,215 and 216
14. FUNDAMENTAL RULES
Dimensioning and tolerancing shall karly define
engineering inten nd shal conform othe following
(a) Each dimension hall have a tolerance, except for
{hone dimensions api sented reference mus
imum, minimum, or stock (commercial sack sie). The
toleran may be applied dit to the dimension (or
indirect inthe case of basi dimensions), indicated by
a general ote located in a supplementary blk ofthe
‘tang ormat See ASME VIA, amd ASMEYILIM.
(0) Dimensioning and tlerancing shall be complete
so there is fll understanding of he characteris of
‘ich feature Values may be expressed in an engineering
drawing or in a CAD product definition dat st. Soe
[ASME VI4AL Neither scaling (measuring dirty fom
an engineering drawing) nor assumplon of à distance
fr size permitted, except as follows: undimensioned
ring such as of, printed wiring, templates,
and master layouts prepared on stable materia, pro.
‘id the necessary contol dimensions ae speed
(6) Each nenn dimension ofan end produc shall
hou, No mo dimensions than those neces fOr
complet definition shal be given. The use of reference
Alimensions on a drawing should be minimized
(a) Dimensions shall be selected and arranged to uit
the Function and mating relationship of apart and shall
not be subject to more than one interpretation.
(e) The drawing should define a part without spec
fying manufacturing methods. Thus only the diameter
fa hoe given without indicating whether it is tobe
dalled, reamed, punched, or made by any other oper
tion: However in ose instances where manufactur:
ing, processing, quality assurance, or environmental
information essential to the definition of engineering
requirements itshall be specified onthe drawing on
‘document referenced onthe drawing
D Nonmandstory.procesing dimensions
shall be identified by an appropriate note, such as
FNONNANDATORY (MFG DATA)" Examples of nonman-
Aatory data are processing dimensions that provide for
nich allowance svink allowance, and ofr require.
ments, provided the final dimensions ae given on the
drawing.
(9 Dimensions should be amangad to pro-
vide required information for optimum readability
Dimensions should be shown in ic profile views and
oferto vs outs
(i) Wires, cables, Sheets rds, and other material
manufactured o gage or code numbers shall e spec
el by linear dimensions indicating the diameter or
thickness. Gage or code numbers may be shown in
parents following the dimension
{iA angle applies where center lines and ines
depicting features are shown on a 2D orthographic
“drawing at right angles and no ange is specie. See
porn 2113,
{)-A90° basic angle applies where center Ines offen-
tures in à patter ares shown aright angles on à
2D orthographic drawing arelocstd o defined by baie
imensions and no angles specified. See para. 21.14.
(4) Azerobasic dimension applies where aves, center
planes, or surfaces ao shown coincident on à draw
Ing, and geometric tolerances establish the relationship
mong the features. See pars 21.14,
(0 Unless otherwise specified, all dimensions and
tolerances are applicable at 20°C (°F) in accordance
‘wih ANSI/ ASME B9.62. Compensation may be made
{or measurements made at other temperature.
(it) Unies these specie, al dimensions and
Jerances applyi arte condition. For exceptions
10 his rule see paras. 420 and 53,
(Unless otherwise specified, all tolerances apply
{or fll depth Length, and with ofthe feature.
(o) Dimensions nd toleran apply only a he drow
ing level where they are spi. A dimension specified
fora given estro on one level of drawing (e, a detal
rang) à ot mandatory for that enanos ny er
level fog an assembly ding)
{p) Where a coordinate system is shown onthe draw
Ing it shall be right-handed unless otherwise specified
Each axlshallbeabeed and the positive direction shall
beshown,
Re comp wahASMENIGAT
15 UNITS OF MEASURE
For uniformity, all dimensions inthis Standard are
venin Sl units: However, the unit of mesure selected
hold bein accordance withthe policy of the ur.
15.1 SI Metric Linear Units
The SI linear unit commonly wed on engineering
rowing isthe millimeter,
152 US. Customary Linear Units
The US. Customary linear unit commonly and on
engineering drawings the decimal inch.
153 Identification of Linear Units
‘On drawings where al dimensions ar in millimeters,
or all dimensions ave in inches, individual identifie.
Won of linear unis is no! required. However the draw
ing shall contain a note sing “UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED, ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS (or
INCHES, as applicable)”
15.4 Combination SI (Metre) and US. Customary
near Units
\Wheresomeinch dimensions areshown onamillineter-
¿tension drawing, the aeration IW shal follow
the inch vu. Where some milite dimensions are
shown onan chienne drwing the symbol me
‘al elon the milimeter values
{hone dimensions api sented reference mus
imum, minimum, or stock (commercial sack sie). The
toleran may be applied dit to the dimension (or
indirect inthe case of basi dimensions), indicated by
a general ote located in a supplementary blk ofthe
‘tang ormat See ASME VIA, amd ASMEYILIM.
(0) Dimensioning and tlerancing shall be complete
so there is fll understanding of he characteris of
‘ich feature Values may be expressed in an engineering
drawing or in a CAD product definition dat st. Soe
[ASME VI4AL Neither scaling (measuring dirty fom
an engineering drawing) nor assumplon of à distance
fr size permitted, except as follows: undimensioned
ring such as of, printed wiring, templates,
and master layouts prepared on stable materia, pro.
‘id the necessary contol dimensions ae speed
(6) Each nenn dimension ofan end produc shall
hou, No mo dimensions than those neces fOr
complet definition shal be given. The use of reference
Alimensions on a drawing should be minimized
(a) Dimensions shall be selected and arranged to uit
the Function and mating relationship of apart and shall
not be subject to more than one interpretation.
(e) The drawing should define a part without spec
fying manufacturing methods. Thus only the diameter
fa hoe given without indicating whether it is tobe
dalled, reamed, punched, or made by any other oper
tion: However in ose instances where manufactur:
ing, processing, quality assurance, or environmental
information essential to the definition of engineering
requirements itshall be specified onthe drawing on
‘document referenced onthe drawing
D Nonmandstory.procesing dimensions
shall be identified by an appropriate note, such as
FNONNANDATORY (MFG DATA)" Examples of nonman-
Aatory data are processing dimensions that provide for
nich allowance svink allowance, and ofr require.
ments, provided the final dimensions ae given on the
drawing.
(9 Dimensions should be amangad to pro-
vide required information for optimum readability
Dimensions should be shown in ic profile views and
oferto vs outs
(i) Wires, cables, Sheets rds, and other material
manufactured o gage or code numbers shall e spec
el by linear dimensions indicating the diameter or
thickness. Gage or code numbers may be shown in
parents following the dimension
{iA angle applies where center lines and ines
depicting features are shown on a 2D orthographic
“drawing at right angles and no ange is specie. See
porn 2113,
{)-A90° basic angle applies where center Ines offen-
tures in à patter ares shown aright angles on à
2D orthographic drawing arelocstd o defined by baie
imensions and no angles specified. See para. 21.14.
(4) Azerobasic dimension applies where aves, center
planes, or surfaces ao shown coincident on à draw
Ing, and geometric tolerances establish the relationship
mong the features. See pars 21.14,
(0 Unless otherwise specified, all dimensions and
tolerances are applicable at 20°C (°F) in accordance
‘wih ANSI/ ASME B9.62. Compensation may be made
{or measurements made at other temperature.
(it) Unies these specie, al dimensions and
Jerances applyi arte condition. For exceptions
10 his rule see paras. 420 and 53,
(Unless otherwise specified, all tolerances apply
{or fll depth Length, and with ofthe feature.
(o) Dimensions nd toleran apply only a he drow
ing level where they are spi. A dimension specified
fora given estro on one level of drawing (e, a detal
rang) à ot mandatory for that enanos ny er
level fog an assembly ding)
{p) Where a coordinate system is shown onthe draw
Ing it shall be right-handed unless otherwise specified
Each axlshallbeabeed and the positive direction shall
beshown,
Re comp wahASMENIGAT
15 UNITS OF MEASURE
For uniformity, all dimensions inthis Standard are
venin Sl units: However, the unit of mesure selected
hold bein accordance withthe policy of the ur.
15.1 SI Metric Linear Units
The SI linear unit commonly wed on engineering
rowing isthe millimeter,
152 US. Customary Linear Units
The US. Customary linear unit commonly and on
engineering drawings the decimal inch.
153 Identification of Linear Units
‘On drawings where al dimensions ar in millimeters,
or all dimensions ave in inches, individual identifie.
Won of linear unis is no! required. However the draw
ing shall contain a note sing “UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED, ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS (or
INCHES, as applicable)”
15.4 Combination SI (Metre) and US. Customary
near Units
\Wheresomeinch dimensions areshown onamillineter-
¿tension drawing, the aeration IW shal follow
the inch vu. Where some milite dimensions are
shown onan chienne drwing the symbol me
‘al elon the milimeter values
Fig.1-3- Angular Unis
Fig.1-5 Decimal inch Dimensions
ae ap OE
Im r
Pi Her
I” pus
[AE]
Fig. 1-4 Millimeter Dimensions
a
Ar
qe
15.5 Angular Units
Angular dimensions are expressed in both degrees
“and decimal parts of degree or in grecs, minutes,
nd seconds. These later dimensions ae expressed by
the following symbols
(a) degrees”
(0 minas
fe) sonde
Where degrees ate indicted alone, the numerical
value shal be lowest by the symbol Where only min-
is or seconds are specified the numberof minutes oF
‘seconds shal be preceded by 0 or 0%; as applicable
Where decimal degrees les than one re specified, a
zero shal precede the decimal value. Se Fig 1
216 TYPES OF DIMENSIONING
Decimal dimensioning shall be used on drawings
‘except where certain comercial commodities are iden-
tied by standardized nominal size designations, such
à pipe and lumber sizes
16.1 Millimeter Dimensioning
The following halbe observed where sping mil
limeter dimensions on drawings:
(a) Where the dimension isles han one milimeer 9
zero precedes the decimal point See Fig I
(9) Where the dimension isa whole number, neither
the decimal point nora ze shown. Se Fig LL
(e) Where the dimension exceeds» whole number by
decimal fraction of ene milimete the last ig he
Fight ofthe decimal point not flow by a zero Soe
Fig
(a) Nether commas nor spaces shall wed to sep
e digi into groups in peciing millimeter dimen
diana on ding.
162 Decimal Inch Dimensioning
‘The following shall be observed where specifying
decimal inch dimensions on dewinge
(a) Azero is nat used before the decimal point for val
estes than Tin
0) A dimension is exprese tothe same numberof
décimal places as lts tolerance. Zero are added o the
Fight of the decimal point where necessary Ses Fig. LA
‘and para. 232,
Fig.1-5 Decimal inch Dimensions
ae ap OE
Im r
Pi Her
I” pus
[AE]
Fig. 1-4 Millimeter Dimensions
a
Ar
qe
15.5 Angular Units
Angular dimensions are expressed in both degrees
“and decimal parts of degree or in grecs, minutes,
nd seconds. These later dimensions ae expressed by
the following symbols
(a) degrees”
(0 minas
fe) sonde
Where degrees ate indicted alone, the numerical
value shal be lowest by the symbol Where only min-
is or seconds are specified the numberof minutes oF
‘seconds shal be preceded by 0 or 0%; as applicable
Where decimal degrees les than one re specified, a
zero shal precede the decimal value. Se Fig 1
216 TYPES OF DIMENSIONING
Decimal dimensioning shall be used on drawings
‘except where certain comercial commodities are iden-
tied by standardized nominal size designations, such
à pipe and lumber sizes
16.1 Millimeter Dimensioning
The following halbe observed where sping mil
limeter dimensions on drawings:
(a) Where the dimension isles han one milimeer 9
zero precedes the decimal point See Fig I
(9) Where the dimension isa whole number, neither
the decimal point nora ze shown. Se Fig LL
(e) Where the dimension exceeds» whole number by
decimal fraction of ene milimete the last ig he
Fight ofthe decimal point not flow by a zero Soe
Fig
(a) Nether commas nor spaces shall wed to sep
e digi into groups in peciing millimeter dimen
diana on ding.
162 Decimal Inch Dimensioning
‘The following shall be observed where specifying
decimal inch dimensions on dewinge
(a) Azero is nat used before the decimal point for val
estes than Tin
0) A dimension is exprese tothe same numberof
décimal places as lts tolerance. Zero are added o the
Fight of the decimal point where necessary Ses Fig. LA
‘and para. 232,
Fig. 1-6 Application of Dimensions
Fig. 1-8 Spacing of Dimension Lines
bre
N
TT
N Vs
Es Fo
E 17
Hl
Fig. 147 Grouping of Dimensions
oe es
Fig. 19° Staggered Dimensions
163 Decimal
Deximal points must be uniform, denso, and lago
enough to be clearly visible and meet the reproduc-
tion nequirement of ASME YI42M Decimal pots ae
pce ln ie wit the bottom ofthe associate digits
ints
164 Conversion and Rounding of Linear Units
For information on conversion and rounding of US.
‘Customary near units, se IERE/ASTM SI10,
17. APPLICATION OF DIMENSIONS.
Dimensions are applied by means of dimension ies,
‘extension lines, chain ines, or a Tender from a dimen-
Sion, not, or specification directed 10 the appropriate
ssl Se Fig 16. General notes are used o convey
tion information. For further information on
dimension lios extension Inc, chain Hines, and led:
fers see ASMEYÍAZ
173 Dimension Lines
A dimension line, with its arrowheads, shows the
lection and extent of à dimension, Numeral indicate
thenumber of units of measurement Preferably dimer
son lines should be broken for insertion of numerals a
=
shown in Fig, 16. Wher horizontal dimension ines are
ol broken, numerals are placed above and paralelo
the dimension ines.
EN
HAE
Se out ld be, or à Contato of anya thee ne
‘ale in mn pe
1744 Alignment. Dimension ines ha be aligned
A practicable and groupe or uniform appearance See
B17,
17:12 Spacing. Dimension ine ae drawn pole
tothe direction of measurement. The space beten the
first dimension ine and the part outline shouldbe no es
than mm: esco tween succeeding paallldien-
online shou be not les than 6mm. Se Fig 1.
mb Sen een hop
Where there ae several parallel dimension Ins, the
numerals should be staggered for easier reading, See
Fig 13,
Fig. 1-8 Spacing of Dimension Lines
bre
N
TT
N Vs
Es Fo
E 17
Hl
Fig. 147 Grouping of Dimensions
oe es
Fig. 19° Staggered Dimensions
163 Decimal
Deximal points must be uniform, denso, and lago
enough to be clearly visible and meet the reproduc-
tion nequirement of ASME YI42M Decimal pots ae
pce ln ie wit the bottom ofthe associate digits
ints
164 Conversion and Rounding of Linear Units
For information on conversion and rounding of US.
‘Customary near units, se IERE/ASTM SI10,
17. APPLICATION OF DIMENSIONS.
Dimensions are applied by means of dimension ies,
‘extension lines, chain ines, or a Tender from a dimen-
Sion, not, or specification directed 10 the appropriate
ssl Se Fig 16. General notes are used o convey
tion information. For further information on
dimension lios extension Inc, chain Hines, and led:
fers see ASMEYÍAZ
173 Dimension Lines
A dimension line, with its arrowheads, shows the
lection and extent of à dimension, Numeral indicate
thenumber of units of measurement Preferably dimer
son lines should be broken for insertion of numerals a
=
shown in Fig, 16. Wher horizontal dimension ines are
ol broken, numerals are placed above and paralelo
the dimension ines.
EN
HAE
Se out ld be, or à Contato of anya thee ne
‘ale in mn pe
1744 Alignment. Dimension ines ha be aligned
A practicable and groupe or uniform appearance See
B17,
17:12 Spacing. Dimension ine ae drawn pole
tothe direction of measurement. The space beten the
first dimension ine and the part outline shouldbe no es
than mm: esco tween succeeding paallldien-
online shou be not les than 6mm. Se Fig 1.
mb Sen een hop
Where there ae several parallel dimension Ins, the
numerals should be staggered for easier reading, See
Fig 13,
Fig. 1-10. Oblique Extension Lines
Fig.1-13. Limited Length or rea Indication
fal
ar
=
DA
©
"a
pa]
1713 Angle Dimensions. ‘The dimension tine of
angie an ae drawn with its center atthe apex ofthe
“angle The amoncheads terminate at the extensions of the
two sides. Soe Fig 19 ad 16
17.1.4 Crossing Dimension Lines. Crossing dimen-
‘son lines should be avoided. Where unavoidable, the
‘Simension ines are unbroken
417.2 Extension (Projection Lines
Extension lines are use to indie the extension of
surface o point tos location preferably aude the part
‘ulin. See para. 173. On 2D orthographic deawing,
extension ines start wth ashort inte gap fom theo
neo the por and extend beyond the otermenrelted
dimension line, See Fig, 18: Extension lines are drawn
perpendicular to dimension lines. Where space is lime
ed extension ies may be drawnatan clique angle to
‘eal laste where they apply Where clique lines
Se used, the dimension ines ae shown nthe direction
in which they apply. Se ig LI
1724 CrossingExtensonLines, Wherever practica-
be extension lines should neither cross one another nor
os dimension lines. To minimize such cosángs, the
Shortest dimension line is shown nearest the auine of
the object See Fig, 19. Where extension ins must os
“other extension ines dimension nes or lines depicting
feature, they ae notbroken Where extension ines ross
amowads or dimension lines close to ao, a
tsk inthe extension lines permissible See Fig LIL
1722 Locating Points or intersections. Where a
point is located by extension lies only the extension
nes rom surfaces should passthrough the point or
intersection See Fig. 2.
173 Limited Length or Area Indication
‘Where ts desire to indicate tht iit length
‘rare of surface sto ceive atonal treatment oF
onsiderabon within limits specified on the drawing,
the extent of these mis may be indicated by use of
chain ine. See Fig, 1
Fig.1-13. Limited Length or rea Indication
fal
ar
=
DA
©
"a
pa]
1713 Angle Dimensions. ‘The dimension tine of
angie an ae drawn with its center atthe apex ofthe
“angle The amoncheads terminate at the extensions of the
two sides. Soe Fig 19 ad 16
17.1.4 Crossing Dimension Lines. Crossing dimen-
‘son lines should be avoided. Where unavoidable, the
‘Simension ines are unbroken
417.2 Extension (Projection Lines
Extension lines are use to indie the extension of
surface o point tos location preferably aude the part
‘ulin. See para. 173. On 2D orthographic deawing,
extension ines start wth ashort inte gap fom theo
neo the por and extend beyond the otermenrelted
dimension line, See Fig, 18: Extension lines are drawn
perpendicular to dimension lines. Where space is lime
ed extension ies may be drawnatan clique angle to
‘eal laste where they apply Where clique lines
Se used, the dimension ines ae shown nthe direction
in which they apply. Se ig LI
1724 CrossingExtensonLines, Wherever practica-
be extension lines should neither cross one another nor
os dimension lines. To minimize such cosángs, the
Shortest dimension line is shown nearest the auine of
the object See Fig, 19. Where extension ins must os
“other extension ines dimension nes or lines depicting
feature, they ae notbroken Where extension ines ross
amowads or dimension lines close to ao, a
tsk inthe extension lines permissible See Fig LIL
1722 Locating Points or intersections. Where a
point is located by extension lies only the extension
nes rom surfaces should passthrough the point or
intersection See Fig. 2.
173 Limited Length or Area Indication
‘Where ts desire to indicate tht iit length
‘rare of surface sto ceive atonal treatment oF
onsiderabon within limits specified on the drawing,
the extent of these mis may be indicated by use of
chain ine. See Fig, 1
Fig. 1-16 Minimizing Leaders
sxe
a0
ca cal
Fig. 147 Leader Directions
rl mal
1.734 Chain Uns, In an appropriate view or sec
tio. a chai inet drawn parallel the surface profile
at à short distance from # Dimensions are added for
length and location. I applied toa sure of revolution,
{he indication may be shown on one side only Se Fiz.
1-1, sation ().
1.732 Omiting Chaine Dimensions. Ifthe chain
tine leary indicates the location and extent of the sur-
face arcs, dimensions may be omited. See Fig. 1.13,
lation D}
1733 Aus Indication Identification. Where the
esr area is shown on a irc view ofthe sure,
‘wea à sation lined within the chain line boundary and
appropriately dimensiones. Soe ig, 1-1, ilustran (9.
17.4, Leaders (Leader Lines)
Aleader i sed o dret a dimension, note or sym-
tol o the intended place on the drawing, Normal
leader termites in an aronhend, However, whe
À intended fora leader o refer to à surace by ending
within the outine ofthat surface, he Inder should tr.
‘inate ina dot A leader should bean inclined straight
line except for a short horizontal portion extending to
the mid height ofthe fist or st eter or dig of the
ote or dimension. Two or more leaders to adjacent
ons on the draing should bo drawn parle
‘ther Se Fig 1
1744 Leader Directo Dimensions. Lesderdincte
dimensions are specified individually o avoid om
Pleated laden. Se Fig 1-15, Where foo many leaders
‘would impair the eit of hedrawing eters or sym
tok should be ud o sen fntars Soe Fg 16
1742 Circle and Arc. Where à leader is directe
to a cire or an ar, lis direction should be roda
Seg 17.
175 Reading Direction
Reading dicton for following specications apply:
1754 Notes. Notes should be place t end from
(hebottom ofthe drawing with regard to he orientation
ofthe drawing forma
1752 Dimensions. Dimensions shoven with im
lon lines and arrowheads should be placed to ead
fem the Doom of the drawing See Fi. 1-16
1753 Baseline Dimensioning. cine dimen
sions should be shown aligned to thee extension ines
nd red fom the bottom or right id the drawing,
Seo Fig 1-50.
1754 Feature Control Frames. Feature control
frames shouldbe placed t wad rom the bottom of the
‘rowing
sxe
a0
ca cal
Fig. 147 Leader Directions
rl mal
1.734 Chain Uns, In an appropriate view or sec
tio. a chai inet drawn parallel the surface profile
at à short distance from # Dimensions are added for
length and location. I applied toa sure of revolution,
{he indication may be shown on one side only Se Fiz.
1-1, sation ().
1.732 Omiting Chaine Dimensions. Ifthe chain
tine leary indicates the location and extent of the sur-
face arcs, dimensions may be omited. See Fig. 1.13,
lation D}
1733 Aus Indication Identification. Where the
esr area is shown on a irc view ofthe sure,
‘wea à sation lined within the chain line boundary and
appropriately dimensiones. Soe ig, 1-1, ilustran (9.
17.4, Leaders (Leader Lines)
Aleader i sed o dret a dimension, note or sym-
tol o the intended place on the drawing, Normal
leader termites in an aronhend, However, whe
À intended fora leader o refer to à surace by ending
within the outine ofthat surface, he Inder should tr.
‘inate ina dot A leader should bean inclined straight
line except for a short horizontal portion extending to
the mid height ofthe fist or st eter or dig of the
ote or dimension. Two or more leaders to adjacent
ons on the draing should bo drawn parle
‘ther Se Fig 1
1744 Leader Directo Dimensions. Lesderdincte
dimensions are specified individually o avoid om
Pleated laden. Se Fig 1-15, Where foo many leaders
‘would impair the eit of hedrawing eters or sym
tok should be ud o sen fntars Soe Fg 16
1742 Circle and Arc. Where à leader is directe
to a cire or an ar, lis direction should be roda
Seg 17.
175 Reading Direction
Reading dicton for following specications apply:
1754 Notes. Notes should be place t end from
(hebottom ofthe drawing with regard to he orientation
ofthe drawing forma
1752 Dimensions. Dimensions shoven with im
lon lines and arrowheads should be placed to ead
fem the Doom of the drawing See Fi. 1-16
1753 Baseline Dimensioning. cine dimen
sions should be shown aligned to thee extension ines
nd red fom the bottom or right id the drawing,
Seo Fig 1-50.
1754 Feature Control Frames. Feature control
frames shouldbe placed t wad rom the bottom of the
‘rowing
Fig. 1-18 Reading Direction
Fig.1-20 Overall Reference Dimension
N NS
E
ALA
po
CC
pa]
g.1-19 Intermediate Reference Dimension TL
os
17:55 Datum Feature Symbols. Datum feature
symbols should be placed to rad from the botom of
he drawing
176 Reference Dimensions
‘The method for dentin a reference dimension (or
reference dat) on drawinge to enclose the dimension
{or data} within parentheses Soe Figs I-19 and 1-2
177 Overall Dimensions
We an overall dimension specific, one interme
dite dimension is omited or denied as a reference
dimension. Se Fig. 1-19. Where he intermediate dimen
sions are more important than the overall dimension,
the overall dimension if usd, is Mente asa rele
tence dimension: Se ig. 120
41.78 Dimensioning Within the Outline ofa View
Dimensions are usually placed outside the outinc of
‘view Where direcmese of application makes it dire
Abe, or where extension lines or leader lines would be
excesivo lng, dimensions may be place within the
‘ulin ofa view
179 Dimensions Notto Scale
Agreement should exist beeen the pictorial presen
tation of feature and its defining dimension, Where 3
changetoa feature ismade the following asappliable,
must be observed.
a) Where the sole author for the product dein
tion isa hardcopy original drawing prepared either
‘manually or on an interactive computer graphics ya
fem, and it nt able to update the pictorial view of
the feature, the defining dimension ist be underline
‘with straight thick ie, Where a asi dimension sy
Polis used the In is placed beneath the symbol
0) Where the sole authority for the product dein
‘ion ea model (gia), or 6 ASME VIA
18. DIMENSIONING FEATURES
Varios characteristics and features require unique
methods of dimensioning
182 Diameters
“The diameter symbol precedes diametalvalues See
Fig. 121 and para 337, Where the diameter la sper
cal features specified, the dlamerl value is preceded
by the sper ameter symbol. See Fig. 3-11 and para
337. Where the diameter of à number of concentre
Fig.1-20 Overall Reference Dimension
N NS
E
ALA
po
CC
pa]
g.1-19 Intermediate Reference Dimension TL
os
17:55 Datum Feature Symbols. Datum feature
symbols should be placed to rad from the botom of
he drawing
176 Reference Dimensions
‘The method for dentin a reference dimension (or
reference dat) on drawinge to enclose the dimension
{or data} within parentheses Soe Figs I-19 and 1-2
177 Overall Dimensions
We an overall dimension specific, one interme
dite dimension is omited or denied as a reference
dimension. Se Fig. 1-19. Where he intermediate dimen
sions are more important than the overall dimension,
the overall dimension if usd, is Mente asa rele
tence dimension: Se ig. 120
41.78 Dimensioning Within the Outline ofa View
Dimensions are usually placed outside the outinc of
‘view Where direcmese of application makes it dire
Abe, or where extension lines or leader lines would be
excesivo lng, dimensions may be place within the
‘ulin ofa view
179 Dimensions Notto Scale
Agreement should exist beeen the pictorial presen
tation of feature and its defining dimension, Where 3
changetoa feature ismade the following asappliable,
must be observed.
a) Where the sole author for the product dein
tion isa hardcopy original drawing prepared either
‘manually or on an interactive computer graphics ya
fem, and it nt able to update the pictorial view of
the feature, the defining dimension ist be underline
‘with straight thick ie, Where a asi dimension sy
Polis used the In is placed beneath the symbol
0) Where the sole authority for the product dein
‘ion ea model (gia), or 6 ASME VIA
18. DIMENSIONING FEATURES
Varios characteristics and features require unique
methods of dimensioning
182 Diameters
“The diameter symbol precedes diametalvalues See
Fig. 121 and para 337, Where the diameter la sper
cal features specified, the dlamerl value is preceded
by the sper ameter symbol. See Fig. 3-11 and para
337. Where the diameter of à number of concentre
Fig. 1-22 Ra
Fig. 1-24 Radi With Unocated Centers
>
y
irr)
Fig. 123, Radius With Located Center
Ga]
cylindric features ar specified, such diameter should
dimensions ina longitudinal view i practical
182 Radi
Esch radius vale is proceed by the appropriate
radius symbol. See Figs. 122 and 3-1 and par, 237.
‘Aradius dimension ine uses one arrowhead, a the arc
end. An arrowhead is never used atthe rads center.
‘Where location ofthe centers important and space per-
‘ila dimension line is drawn from the rads center
‘vith Ihearonhed touching the ae and the dimension
E plced between the arowhead and the center Where
space I mite, the dimension ine extended through
the radius center. Where ii inconvenient to place the
ron between the radius center and the ac, muy
In placo outside the are witha lender Where the center
radios isnot dimensionally leat, the centr shall
‘ot be indicted. See Fig, 122
1821 Center of Radius. Where à dimension is
ven tte conter o radius a small ros ls des at
the center. Extension ins and dimension lines are used
to bate the center See Fig, 1-2: Where location ofthe
entr is unimportant the drawing must clearly show
thot the arc lotion control by other dimensioned
features suchas tangent surfaces See Fig. 124
1822 Foreshortened Radl. Where the center of 3
radius is outside the drawing ox interferes with another
view, the radius dimension Ine may be fresh
ened, Soe Fig, 125. That portion ofthe dimension line
Sstending fom the arowhead l adil relative to the
re Where the radi dimension line is foreshortened
nd the center located by coordinate dimensions, the
“dimension line eating the centers als forehortened
1823 True Radius. On » 2D orthographic draw
ing, where a radius is dimensioned in a view that does
fot show the trae shape of he radius, TRUE is added
one the edits dimension See Fi, 126 Tis practice
E applicable to other fresortene features as ll as
ra See Fig 428
Fig. 1-24 Radi With Unocated Centers
>
y
irr)
Fig. 123, Radius With Located Center
Ga]
cylindric features ar specified, such diameter should
dimensions ina longitudinal view i practical
182 Radi
Esch radius vale is proceed by the appropriate
radius symbol. See Figs. 122 and 3-1 and par, 237.
‘Aradius dimension ine uses one arrowhead, a the arc
end. An arrowhead is never used atthe rads center.
‘Where location ofthe centers important and space per-
‘ila dimension line is drawn from the rads center
‘vith Ihearonhed touching the ae and the dimension
E plced between the arowhead and the center Where
space I mite, the dimension ine extended through
the radius center. Where ii inconvenient to place the
ron between the radius center and the ac, muy
In placo outside the are witha lender Where the center
radios isnot dimensionally leat, the centr shall
‘ot be indicted. See Fig, 122
1821 Center of Radius. Where à dimension is
ven tte conter o radius a small ros ls des at
the center. Extension ins and dimension lines are used
to bate the center See Fig, 1-2: Where location ofthe
entr is unimportant the drawing must clearly show
thot the arc lotion control by other dimensioned
features suchas tangent surfaces See Fig. 124
1822 Foreshortened Radl. Where the center of 3
radius is outside the drawing ox interferes with another
view, the radius dimension Ine may be fresh
ened, Soe Fig, 125. That portion ofthe dimension line
Sstending fom the arowhead l adil relative to the
re Where the radi dimension line is foreshortened
nd the center located by coordinate dimensions, the
“dimension line eating the centers als forehortened
1823 True Radius. On » 2D orthographic draw
ing, where a radius is dimensioned in a view that does
fot show the trae shape of he radius, TRUE is added
one the edits dimension See Fi, 126 Tis practice
E applicable to other fresortene features as ll as
ra See Fig 428
Fig. 1-26. Tre Radius
Fig. 1.29 Slotted Holes
py T €
a (+ +
o LX i
a) axa pur
Fig. 127 Spherical Radius
pza
Fig.1:28. Dimensioning Chords, Ares, and Angles
sal
1824 Muliple Rad. Whore à port hs a number
of radi of the same dimension, a note may be used
{nated of dimensioning ech radis separately
18:25 Sphetical adil Whore aspherical surfaces
imensioned by a radius, the dius mension e pre-
de by the symbol SR. See Fig. 127
1.83 Chords, Ars, and Angles
‘The dimensioning of chords, ars, and angles shall be
shonen ln Fig. 126.
1.84 Rounded Ends and Slotted Holes
Features having rounded ends, including slot
ted holes, are dimensioned using one ofthe methods
Fig.1-31. Rounded Corners
E so
red
shown in Fig. 129. For full rounded ends, the radi
re indicated but not dimensioned. For features with
portal rounded ends the rad ae dimension Soe
Fig. 10,
185 Rounded Comers
Where corners are rounded, dimensions define the
‘ges and the as ar tangent. Soe Fig EL
Fig. 1.29 Slotted Holes
py T €
a (+ +
o LX i
a) axa pur
Fig. 127 Spherical Radius
pza
Fig.1:28. Dimensioning Chords, Ares, and Angles
sal
1824 Muliple Rad. Whore à port hs a number
of radi of the same dimension, a note may be used
{nated of dimensioning ech radis separately
18:25 Sphetical adil Whore aspherical surfaces
imensioned by a radius, the dius mension e pre-
de by the symbol SR. See Fig. 127
1.83 Chords, Ars, and Angles
‘The dimensioning of chords, ars, and angles shall be
shonen ln Fig. 126.
1.84 Rounded Ends and Slotted Holes
Features having rounded ends, including slot
ted holes, are dimensioned using one ofthe methods
Fig.1-31. Rounded Corners
E so
red
shown in Fig. 129. For full rounded ends, the radi
re indicated but not dimensioned. For features with
portal rounded ends the rad ae dimension Soe
Fig. 10,
185 Rounded Comers
Where corners are rounded, dimensions define the
‘ges and the as ar tangent. Soe Fig EL
ig. 134, Tabulated Outline
mi
v Tesfezfrefrsfen]
Fig.1-33. Coordinate or Offset Outline _
Fig.1-35. Symmetrical Outines
186 Outines Consisting of Arcs
A curved outline composed of to oF more acs is
dimensined by giving re rai of all orcs and loca
ing the necessary centers with coordinate dimensions.
Other rai ae cad onthe asistir points olla
ren: Se Fig. LA.
187 IregularOuttines
Irregular outlines may be dimensioned as shown in
gs. 13 and 1-34 Giralorornoncircalar oulines may
1x dimension by the rectangular coordinate o ose
method. See Fig, 1-3, Coorinats are dimensioned
From base nes. Where many coordinates ae required o
define an ouline, the vertical and horizontal coordinate
dimensions may be tabulate, asin ig 134
188 Grid System
‘Curved peces that represen pattems may be defined
bya grid system with numbered gid lines
189 Symmetial Outlines
‘Symmetical outlines maybe dimensioned on one side
of the enter line of symmetry. Such is the ease Whee,
due to the size ofthe part or space imitations, nly part
‘ofthe outline canbe convensely shown See Fig, 138.
(Oneal he outline ofthe symmetrical shape de hou
and symmetry indicated by applying symbol or part
Symmetry tothe centerline See ASME YI42.
1840 Round Holes
Round holes ae dimensioned as shown in Fig. 136.
Where mot clear hat a ho goes through the nota
Sion THRU follows a dimension Where mule futures
are involved, additional lrifation may be seguis
The depth dimension of blind hoe the depi of the
{ul diameter from the outer surface of he part Where
the depth dimension not cleat as fom a curved su
face the depth should be dimensioned pictorial For
methods of specifying blind holes se Fig, 136
18.11 Counterbored Holes
‘Countebored holes may be specified as shown in
ig. 1-7. Where the thickness of the remaining mate.
fl has Significance, this thickness (rather than the
opt) is dimensioned. The relationship ofthe cou.
ore and the hole shall be specifies. See Figs. 721
and 725. For oles having more than one counterbore,
mi
v Tesfezfrefrsfen]
Fig.1-33. Coordinate or Offset Outline _
Fig.1-35. Symmetrical Outines
186 Outines Consisting of Arcs
A curved outline composed of to oF more acs is
dimensined by giving re rai of all orcs and loca
ing the necessary centers with coordinate dimensions.
Other rai ae cad onthe asistir points olla
ren: Se Fig. LA.
187 IregularOuttines
Irregular outlines may be dimensioned as shown in
gs. 13 and 1-34 Giralorornoncircalar oulines may
1x dimension by the rectangular coordinate o ose
method. See Fig, 1-3, Coorinats are dimensioned
From base nes. Where many coordinates ae required o
define an ouline, the vertical and horizontal coordinate
dimensions may be tabulate, asin ig 134
188 Grid System
‘Curved peces that represen pattems may be defined
bya grid system with numbered gid lines
189 Symmetial Outlines
‘Symmetical outlines maybe dimensioned on one side
of the enter line of symmetry. Such is the ease Whee,
due to the size ofthe part or space imitations, nly part
‘ofthe outline canbe convensely shown See Fig, 138.
(Oneal he outline ofthe symmetrical shape de hou
and symmetry indicated by applying symbol or part
Symmetry tothe centerline See ASME YI42.
1840 Round Holes
Round holes ae dimensioned as shown in Fig. 136.
Where mot clear hat a ho goes through the nota
Sion THRU follows a dimension Where mule futures
are involved, additional lrifation may be seguis
The depth dimension of blind hoe the depi of the
{ul diameter from the outer surface of he part Where
the depth dimension not cleat as fom a curved su
face the depth should be dimensioned pictorial For
methods of specifying blind holes se Fig, 136
18.11 Counterbored Holes
‘Countebored holes may be specified as shown in
ig. 1-7. Where the thickness of the remaining mate.
fl has Significance, this thickness (rather than the
opt) is dimensioned. The relationship ofthe cou.
ore and the hole shall be specifies. See Figs. 721
and 725. For oles having more than one counterbore,
8.136
Round Holes
so
Fig. 1-37 Counterbored Hotes
Fig. 1-38 Counterbored Hotes
3 & Epos e
en y
Bou
” os L
Es à
Saum 8
4 ken ha
hal mem Timer
see ig. 138 Were ala, file as may be
eid “
1842 countersunk and Counter oles
For colon oly, he dlmetr and inch
angi of he coca ar Specie. For coute pass
A holy deter a depo cute Siem | ak
Send Sc we Delage the care Conse | 0
‘rit opal Seng 19 Te dpi ion »
the dept hf eto he cour fm
Seva sue of thpr
184 spaces
1813 chamfered and Countersunk Holes on Curved
Surfaces
Wherea hale is chamfered orcountersunkona curved
surface, the diameter specified onthe drawing applcsat
the minor diameter ofthe chamfer or countersink, See
Fig 140
Where the diameter of the space surface is
specified, either the depth or Ihe remaining thickness
‘of material may be specified I no depth or remain:
ing thickness of material is specified, the spoface f=
the minimum depth necessary to clan up he surface
to the specified diameter Where applicable, a fillet
Round Holes
so
Fig. 1-37 Counterbored Hotes
Fig. 1-38 Counterbored Hotes
3 & Epos e
en y
Bou
” os L
Es à
Saum 8
4 ken ha
hal mem Timer
see ig. 138 Were ala, file as may be
eid “
1842 countersunk and Counter oles
For colon oly, he dlmetr and inch
angi of he coca ar Specie. For coute pass
A holy deter a depo cute Siem | ak
Send Sc we Delage the care Conse | 0
‘rit opal Seng 19 Te dpi ion »
the dept hf eto he cour fm
Seva sue of thpr
184 spaces
1813 chamfered and Countersunk Holes on Curved
Surfaces
Wherea hale is chamfered orcountersunkona curved
surface, the diameter specified onthe drawing applcsat
the minor diameter ofthe chamfer or countersink, See
Fig 140
Where the diameter of the space surface is
specified, either the depth or Ihe remaining thickness
‘of material may be specified I no depth or remain:
ing thickness of material is specified, the spoface f=
the minimum depth necessary to clan up he surface
to the specified diameter Where applicable, a fillet
Fig.1-39 Countersunk and Counterräled Holes
gos zo
so N aio
dera
Brose.
Fig. 1-40. Countersink ona Curved Surface
err
c=
te q =
BEE
= u
css may be nda forthe sic In same 185 Mach Centers
Se sl va og me air ay
EE icon la bed, Me ing en am neta ne er
SEE n'a urls may be pe lyse apo le by anor entr
only and need not be shown pictorial on the draning,
gos zo
so N aio
dera
Brose.
Fig. 1-40. Countersink ona Curved Surface
err
c=
te q =
BEE
= u
css may be nda forthe sic In same 185 Mach Centers
Se sl va og me air ay
EE icon la bed, Me ing en am neta ne er
SEE n'a urls may be pe lyse apo le by anor entr
only and need not be shown pictorial on the draning,
Fig. 48. Spotced oles Fig. 1-46 trl Cante
wae 0
re N yd
H DB
YA
5 — se
fa ine
Fig. 1-42. Chamfers Fig. 1-45 Chamfers Between Surfaces at Other
ra
Pen
dal
D
<A A,
E LA
km 2
SL I aa
Fig. 1-43 45° Chamfer = : se
De Fig. 46 Kent
Sa à
ren &:
‘Chasers ae merle y a riens and ren
an ange, or by two linear dimensions. See Fig. 1-42
{hough 145. Where an angle and a near dimension
ar specified, e liar dimension i the distance rom
{he indicated surface ofthe part to the stato th cha
fer So ig. 142
12816. Chamfers Speciid by Note. À note maybe
sed o spei 45" chamferson perpendiculr surfaces.
See Fig 143. This method is used nly with chamo
fer, athe linea value applies nether direction,
18.162 Round Holes. Where the edge of a round
hole is chamfered, the practice of para. 18.161 6 fo
Towed, exept where Ihe chaner diameter requires
imensional contol Se Fig. 1-4, This typeof contol
may also be applied tothe chamfer diameter on a shat
18163 NomPerpendkular Intersecing Surface
To scceptabl method of dimensionin chamfer for
ares tenait eter han ight angles ae shown
ing, 145
1.817 Keyseats
Keyseats are dimensioned by width, depth, location,
and if required length. The depth may be dimensioned
the shat or ole. See Fig. 1-1,
wae 0
re N yd
H DB
YA
5 — se
fa ine
Fig. 1-42. Chamfers Fig. 1-45 Chamfers Between Surfaces at Other
ra
Pen
dal
D
<A A,
E LA
km 2
SL I aa
Fig. 1-43 45° Chamfer = : se
De Fig. 46 Kent
Sa à
ren &:
‘Chasers ae merle y a riens and ren
an ange, or by two linear dimensions. See Fig. 1-42
{hough 145. Where an angle and a near dimension
ar specified, e liar dimension i the distance rom
{he indicated surface ofthe part to the stato th cha
fer So ig. 142
12816. Chamfers Speciid by Note. À note maybe
sed o spei 45" chamferson perpendiculr surfaces.
See Fig 143. This method is used nly with chamo
fer, athe linea value applies nether direction,
18.162 Round Holes. Where the edge of a round
hole is chamfered, the practice of para. 18.161 6 fo
Towed, exept where Ihe chaner diameter requires
imensional contol Se Fig. 1-4, This typeof contol
may also be applied tothe chamfer diameter on a shat
18163 NomPerpendkular Intersecing Surface
To scceptabl method of dimensionin chamfer for
ares tenait eter han ight angles ae shown
ing, 145
1.817 Keyseats
Keyseats are dimensioned by width, depth, location,
and if required length. The depth may be dimensioned
the shat or ole. See Fig. 1-1,
Fig. 1-48 ours for Press Fits
220 MIN AFTER AURAS
TT eons
Tw.
12 FULL au
18.18 Kouring
Kur is speciid in terms of ype, pith, and
diameter beloe and ater knurling Where controls not
tired, the dlametr after king is ont, Where
‘only a potion ofa feature requires nun, the location
nd eng ofthe knurlahal be spo, Se ig 14.
18181 Kouring for Press FR. Where roquied
to provide a pres ht between parts, knrling is spec
fit by à note that includes the ype of Ke required,
is pitch, the toleranced diameter of the feature before
kauling, and the minimum accepabl diameter afer
ling Seo Fig 14.
15:82 Kouring Standard. For information on
inch kong, soe ANSI/ ASME BO,
1849 Rods and Tubing Details
Rods and tubing may be dimensioned in tree coor-
dinate diecions and toleranced using geometr toler
nc or by speciying the straight length, bend md,
Angles of Bend, and angles of twist fr all portions of
tach feature. This may be done by means of auiiry
‘ows tabulation, or supplementary data.
1820 Screw Threads
Methods of specíying and dimensioning. screw
threads am covered in ASMEYIL.
1821 Surface Texture
Methods of specióiny surface texture requirements
are covered in ASME YIAL3SM. For adios] form
tio, soc ASME BG.
1822 Involute Splines
Methods of specifying involute spline requirements
recovers in the ANSI B92 series of stands
118.23 Castings, Forgings, and Molded Parts
Methods of specfying requirements peculiar to coste
forgings and madd parts are covered in ASME
viña.
19 LOCATION OF FEATURES.
Rectangular coordinate or polar coordinte dimen-
sions locate features with respecto one another, and as
3 group or individually rom à datum or an ong. The
features thatesablsh his datum ororigin must ee.
‘ied. See para. 7213. Round hoes or other features of
symmetrical contour re located by giving stances, oF
‘stances and directions, t he fate senor
19.1 Rectangular Coordinate Dimensioning
Where rectangular coordinate dimensioning is used
to ocae fates, nese dimensions specify distances
in coordinate directions from two or thse mutusly
perpendicular planes, See Fg. 1-49. Coordinate dimen.
ting must cleat indicate which fetus of the pat
Stabi these planes For methods to accomplish Ii,
Se Figs 42 and 48
192 Rectangular Coordinate Dimensioning Without
Dimension Lines
Dimensions maybe shown on extension lines without
the us of dimension ins or rrocheadh The bse lines
re indicated as ero coordinates See Fig. 1.0.
193 Tabular Dimensioning
Tabular dimensioning is a type of rectangular
coordinate dimensioning in which dimensions from
‘mutually perpendicular plies are listed in a able on
the drawing rather than on the pictorial delineation, See
Fig. 151, Tables are prepared in any suitable manner
that adequately locas the features
220 MIN AFTER AURAS
TT eons
Tw.
12 FULL au
18.18 Kouring
Kur is speciid in terms of ype, pith, and
diameter beloe and ater knurling Where controls not
tired, the dlametr after king is ont, Where
‘only a potion ofa feature requires nun, the location
nd eng ofthe knurlahal be spo, Se ig 14.
18181 Kouring for Press FR. Where roquied
to provide a pres ht between parts, knrling is spec
fit by à note that includes the ype of Ke required,
is pitch, the toleranced diameter of the feature before
kauling, and the minimum accepabl diameter afer
ling Seo Fig 14.
15:82 Kouring Standard. For information on
inch kong, soe ANSI/ ASME BO,
1849 Rods and Tubing Details
Rods and tubing may be dimensioned in tree coor-
dinate diecions and toleranced using geometr toler
nc or by speciying the straight length, bend md,
Angles of Bend, and angles of twist fr all portions of
tach feature. This may be done by means of auiiry
‘ows tabulation, or supplementary data.
1820 Screw Threads
Methods of specíying and dimensioning. screw
threads am covered in ASMEYIL.
1821 Surface Texture
Methods of specióiny surface texture requirements
are covered in ASME YIAL3SM. For adios] form
tio, soc ASME BG.
1822 Involute Splines
Methods of specifying involute spline requirements
recovers in the ANSI B92 series of stands
118.23 Castings, Forgings, and Molded Parts
Methods of specfying requirements peculiar to coste
forgings and madd parts are covered in ASME
viña.
19 LOCATION OF FEATURES.
Rectangular coordinate or polar coordinte dimen-
sions locate features with respecto one another, and as
3 group or individually rom à datum or an ong. The
features thatesablsh his datum ororigin must ee.
‘ied. See para. 7213. Round hoes or other features of
symmetrical contour re located by giving stances, oF
‘stances and directions, t he fate senor
19.1 Rectangular Coordinate Dimensioning
Where rectangular coordinate dimensioning is used
to ocae fates, nese dimensions specify distances
in coordinate directions from two or thse mutusly
perpendicular planes, See Fg. 1-49. Coordinate dimen.
ting must cleat indicate which fetus of the pat
Stabi these planes For methods to accomplish Ii,
Se Figs 42 and 48
192 Rectangular Coordinate Dimensioning Without
Dimension Lines
Dimensions maybe shown on extension lines without
the us of dimension ins or rrocheadh The bse lines
re indicated as ero coordinates See Fig. 1.0.
193 Tabular Dimensioning
Tabular dimensioning is a type of rectangular
coordinate dimensioning in which dimensions from
‘mutually perpendicular plies are listed in a able on
the drawing rather than on the pictorial delineation, See
Fig. 151, Tables are prepared in any suitable manner
that adequately locas the features
a 8
le) Hé
4a NOÉ
Fig. 150 Rectangular ing Without Dimension Lines
= ER
ee
TT Tit
ea + BEES
+ =
Fig. 1.51 Rectangular Coordinate Dimensioning in Tabular Form
le) Hé
4a NOÉ
Fig. 150 Rectangular ing Without Dimension Lines
= ER
ee
TT Tit
ea + BEES
+ =
Fig. 1.51 Rectangular Coordinate Dimensioning in Tabular Form
Fig. 1.52. Polar Coordinate Dimensioning ig. 1-55 Repetitive Features and Dimensions
En
Fig.153 Repetitive Features ig. 1-56 Repetitive Features and Dimensions
go wor
wen
Fig.1-57. Repetitive Features and Dimensions
F
a
e
19.4 Polar Coordinate Dimensioning 19.5 Repetitive Features or Dimensions
Where polarcoondinate dimensioning sus toca
features alinear and an angular dimension specifies a
distance roma fixed point at an angular direcion rom
two or thee mutually perpendicular planes. The fixed
ofan
uml of plac
Where wsdl witha asc dimension,
pin ithe intention of these planes Se Fig. 52. placed etherinsid rouse heback dimension frame.
8
En
Fig.153 Repetitive Features ig. 1-56 Repetitive Features and Dimensions
go wor
wen
Fig.1-57. Repetitive Features and Dimensions
F
a
e
19.4 Polar Coordinate Dimensioning 19.5 Repetitive Features or Dimensions
Where polarcoondinate dimensioning sus toca
features alinear and an angular dimension specifies a
distance roma fixed point at an angular direcion rom
two or thee mutually perpendicular planes. The fixed
ofan
uml of plac
Where wsdl witha asc dimension,
pin ithe intention of these planes Se Fig. 52. placed etherinsid rouse heback dimension frame.
8
A space & used between the X and the dimension.
Seien 409287
19:54 SeresandPattems. Features, suchas hoes
and sits, which are repeated in a series or pater, may
be specific by giving the required number of festures
And an X flowed by the size dimension of the feature
À space is wed bete the X and the dimension. See
ign 159 through 17.
19:52 Spacing. Equal spacing of features in a
series o pattem may bespecihed by giving the required
‘number of spaces and an X, followed by the applica
be dimension. À space i used Ben the X and the
‘imenson, See Figs. 1.55 through 1-7. Where ts dif
cul to distingue between the dimension and the
number of spacey as in Fig. 1-5, ane space may be
‘Simensioned and ented as reference.
196 UseofXto Indicate "By"
An X may be used to indicate “by” between coord
fate dimensions as shown in Fg. LAS In such ease,
{the X shal be proved and followed by one character
space
spot dee
Seien 409287
19:54 SeresandPattems. Features, suchas hoes
and sits, which are repeated in a series or pater, may
be specific by giving the required number of festures
And an X flowed by the size dimension of the feature
À space is wed bete the X and the dimension. See
ign 159 through 17.
19:52 Spacing. Equal spacing of features in a
series o pattem may bespecihed by giving the required
‘number of spaces and an X, followed by the applica
be dimension. À space i used Ben the X and the
‘imenson, See Figs. 1.55 through 1-7. Where ts dif
cul to distingue between the dimension and the
number of spacey as in Fig. 1-5, ane space may be
‘Simensioned and ented as reference.
196 UseofXto Indicate "By"
An X may be used to indicate “by” between coord
fate dimensions as shown in Fg. LAS In such ease,
{the X shal be proved and followed by one character
space
spot dee
Section 2
General Tolerancing and Related Principles
21 GENERAL
“This Section establishes paces for expressing tale.
ances on linear and angular dimensions applcaiity of
‘atrial condition modifiers on geometric trance val
‘oes and interpretations governing its nd oras.
[NOTE Ia motel (gt u define he ern fhe
so ASME VIA lo sio erent
244 Application
“Tolerances may be expressed as follows
(a) as dnt Tints or as tolerance values applied
int toa dimension See par. 22.
(b) a promet tolerance descibedin Section 5
theough®.
(e) ina note or table referring to specific dimensions,
(a) as specified in other documents referenced on the
drawing for specific features or processes,
(e) ina general tolerance lock relrring tall dimen-
sions on a drawing for which tolerances are not oe
is specie.
244 Positional Tolerancing Method. Preferably,
tolerances on dimensions that locate features of size
te specified by the posional tolerncing. method
‘esrb in Section 7. In certain coses, such an at
ing iregslarshaped features, the prof tolerancing
method describe in Section 5 may be used,
2112 BasicDimensions, Basic dimensions moy be
indicated on he drawing in the flowing ways
(a) applying tn base dimension symbel teach of he
asie dimensions See Fig. 71 stations (2) a D}
(0) specifying on the drawing (or in à docu
ment ‘efeenced on the drawing) 3 general note
Such as: UNTOLERANCED DIMENSIONS ARE BASIC. "Soe
ig. 7-1 lation (o)
NOTE Whe ty ht n/n oe ne
(©) For specifying and querying basic dimensions
on madels or digital drawings with modal, see ASME
Var
2113 Impleé90" angle. Dycomention wherecenter
tins and surfaces of fus ae depicted on 2D on
phic engineering drin ines a eight anges
Sx? angle asp Init AP ang are under
vo apply The tolerance on these impli 0° anges the
‘meas forall other angulr tar shown the ld
(he drawing governed by general angular tolerance notes
‘or general Banc lock values Se para 140)
2114 Implied 90° oO Basle Angle. Wherecenter
lines an surfaces are depicted on 2D orthographic eng
cetng drawings intersecting at ight anges or parallel
Vo ch other and asie dimensions or geometric tole
ces have been spied implied 9 or asi angle
fre understood to apply. The tolerance on the festa
‘sociated with these implied 90° or 0° basic angles is
provided by feature contol frames that govern the
Action, orientan, pro, oF runout of features. See
puras LQ) and
122. DIRECT TOLERANCING METHODS.
Limits and dirty appli tolerance values ae spec
Sid a follows
(a) Lint Dinesiming Thehighlimt (maximum value)
ls placed above the low limit (minimum value). When
pre in a singe lin, the low limi precedes the high
lian à dash separates theo vales See Fig, 21
10) Pls and Mins Teron. The dimensions given
rs and followed bys plus and minus expression of
tolerance Se Fg 22
16) Geometric armes Dinelly Applied 10 Feature
See Sections 5 though 3
22.1 Metric Limit and Fits
For met application of limits and fis, the tolerance
may be indicted by abuse sie and tolerance symbol
Sin Fig. 2:3 Soe ANSI BA for complet information on
system.
221.1 Limits and Tolerance Symbols. The method
shown in Fig, 23, illustration (2) recommended when
the sjstem is Introducnd by an organization. In thiscase,
limit dimensions are specified and the base size and
tolerance symbol a ented as reference
2.2.4.2 Tolerance Symbol and Limits.
experience
station (>)
rd took, gages, and stock materials ae avaiable with
Size and symbol identification, de method shown in
ig. 23 lation () may be und
General Tolerancing and Related Principles
21 GENERAL
“This Section establishes paces for expressing tale.
ances on linear and angular dimensions applcaiity of
‘atrial condition modifiers on geometric trance val
‘oes and interpretations governing its nd oras.
[NOTE Ia motel (gt u define he ern fhe
so ASME VIA lo sio erent
244 Application
“Tolerances may be expressed as follows
(a) as dnt Tints or as tolerance values applied
int toa dimension See par. 22.
(b) a promet tolerance descibedin Section 5
theough®.
(e) ina note or table referring to specific dimensions,
(a) as specified in other documents referenced on the
drawing for specific features or processes,
(e) ina general tolerance lock relrring tall dimen-
sions on a drawing for which tolerances are not oe
is specie.
244 Positional Tolerancing Method. Preferably,
tolerances on dimensions that locate features of size
te specified by the posional tolerncing. method
‘esrb in Section 7. In certain coses, such an at
ing iregslarshaped features, the prof tolerancing
method describe in Section 5 may be used,
2112 BasicDimensions, Basic dimensions moy be
indicated on he drawing in the flowing ways
(a) applying tn base dimension symbel teach of he
asie dimensions See Fig. 71 stations (2) a D}
(0) specifying on the drawing (or in à docu
ment ‘efeenced on the drawing) 3 general note
Such as: UNTOLERANCED DIMENSIONS ARE BASIC. "Soe
ig. 7-1 lation (o)
NOTE Whe ty ht n/n oe ne
(©) For specifying and querying basic dimensions
on madels or digital drawings with modal, see ASME
Var
2113 Impleé90" angle. Dycomention wherecenter
tins and surfaces of fus ae depicted on 2D on
phic engineering drin ines a eight anges
Sx? angle asp Init AP ang are under
vo apply The tolerance on these impli 0° anges the
‘meas forall other angulr tar shown the ld
(he drawing governed by general angular tolerance notes
‘or general Banc lock values Se para 140)
2114 Implied 90° oO Basle Angle. Wherecenter
lines an surfaces are depicted on 2D orthographic eng
cetng drawings intersecting at ight anges or parallel
Vo ch other and asie dimensions or geometric tole
ces have been spied implied 9 or asi angle
fre understood to apply. The tolerance on the festa
‘sociated with these implied 90° or 0° basic angles is
provided by feature contol frames that govern the
Action, orientan, pro, oF runout of features. See
puras LQ) and
122. DIRECT TOLERANCING METHODS.
Limits and dirty appli tolerance values ae spec
Sid a follows
(a) Lint Dinesiming Thehighlimt (maximum value)
ls placed above the low limit (minimum value). When
pre in a singe lin, the low limi precedes the high
lian à dash separates theo vales See Fig, 21
10) Pls and Mins Teron. The dimensions given
rs and followed bys plus and minus expression of
tolerance Se Fg 22
16) Geometric armes Dinelly Applied 10 Feature
See Sections 5 though 3
22.1 Metric Limit and Fits
For met application of limits and fis, the tolerance
may be indicted by abuse sie and tolerance symbol
Sin Fig. 2:3 Soe ANSI BA for complet information on
system.
221.1 Limits and Tolerance Symbols. The method
shown in Fig, 23, illustration (2) recommended when
the sjstem is Introducnd by an organization. In thiscase,
limit dimensions are specified and the base size and
tolerance symbol a ented as reference
2.2.4.2 Tolerance Symbol and Limits.
experience
station (>)
rd took, gages, and stock materials ae avaiable with
Size and symbol identification, de method shown in
ig. 23 lation () may be und
Fig 2 Limit dimensioning Fig.22 Plus and Minus Tolerancing
Le] =
El Fg. 23 Indiating Symbols for Metric ints and Fs
23 TOLERANCE EXPRESSION EE
he convention shawn In he flowing paragraph (a) en
«tale obere pertaining tote number a deal 2) =
Places cared ne leone ld ne Ban
234 MilineterTolerances
Where mime dimensions are use en the de 8) When iter olerancing i used bo the plas
‘ings, the following apply. and minus values have the same number of decimal
(0) Whereunistraltkrarcng sus andeterthe Places ing eos where neces In ths rompe the
plus or minis valu iria single mor isshown without 32 Vale is the nominal size
3 plu or minus sigan this example the 32 values the EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE: ==
A o 22 19%? (o) Where limit dimensioning, is used and either
‘the maximum or minimum value has digit following
Le] =
El Fg. 23 Indiating Symbols for Metric ints and Fs
23 TOLERANCE EXPRESSION EE
he convention shawn In he flowing paragraph (a) en
«tale obere pertaining tote number a deal 2) =
Places cared ne leone ld ne Ban
234 MilineterTolerances
Where mime dimensions are use en the de 8) When iter olerancing i used bo the plas
‘ings, the following apply. and minus values have the same number of decimal
(0) Whereunistraltkrarcng sus andeterthe Places ing eos where neces In ths rompe the
plus or minis valu iria single mor isshown without 32 Vale is the nominal size
3 plu or minus sigan this example the 32 values the EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE: ==
A o 22 19%? (o) Where limit dimensioning, is used and either
‘the maximum or minimum value has digit following
à decimal point, the other value has zero added for EXAMPLE:
tility u
Eso EME
(4) Where basic dimensions are used, associated tok
ances contain the numberof decimal places necessary
for contol. The base dimension value observes the
practices of para. LE
ns
g
star "are
232 Inch Tolerances
Where inch dimensions are sc onthe drawing, the
folowing apply
(a) Where unilateral tolerancing i wed and either
the pls or minus value i il, dimension shall be
expressed with the some number of decimal paces, and
the appropriate plu or minus sign
EXAMPLE:
(0) Where bilateral terancing is used, bah the plus
and minus values and the dimension have the ame
‘numberof decimal places
EXAMPLES
(©) Where limit dimensioning is used and either the
maximum or minimum vale hs gts allowing dec
‘al point, theater valu has er aed or uniform
EXAMPLE:
(a) Where basic dimensions are used, aociated
tolerances contain the number of decimal places neces
sary for contol Thee is no requirement for the basic
mencion value to e expressed with the same number
decimal places as he tolerance
233 Angle Tolerances
Where angle dimensions ae used, both the plus and
‘minus values and the angle have the same number of
decimal plc
EXAMPLE:
24 INTERPRETATION OF LIMITS
All it are absolute. Dimensions init regards
‘ofthe number of decimal places, ares asi they ere
<ontinued with zeros
EXAMPLES:
24 Plated or Coated Parts
Where part isto be plates or cote, the drawing or
referenced document shall specify whether the dimen
Sons apply before or afte plating Typical examples of
notes ar the following
(a) “DIMENSIONAL LIMITS APPLY AFTER PLATING.”
(0) “DIMENSIONAL UIT APPLY BEFORE PLATING.”
(For processes other than plating, substitute the
appropriate tem)
25 SINGLE UMITS
MUM or MAX i paced after a dimension where other
clement of the design definitely determine the other
specified limit. Features, such as depths of hole,
lengths of threads, comer rad, chamier, ee, may be
Limited in ths way: Single Git are used where the
intent willbe lar, and the urapeifio limit ca be zero
‘ce approsch infinity nd will not malt in à condition
Satrimentalto the design,
26 TOLERANCE ACCUMULATION
igure 24 compares the tolerance values resting
from the following ree methods of dimensioning.
tility u
Eso EME
(4) Where basic dimensions are used, associated tok
ances contain the numberof decimal places necessary
for contol. The base dimension value observes the
practices of para. LE
ns
g
star "are
232 Inch Tolerances
Where inch dimensions are sc onthe drawing, the
folowing apply
(a) Where unilateral tolerancing i wed and either
the pls or minus value i il, dimension shall be
expressed with the some number of decimal paces, and
the appropriate plu or minus sign
EXAMPLE:
(0) Where bilateral terancing is used, bah the plus
and minus values and the dimension have the ame
‘numberof decimal places
EXAMPLES
(©) Where limit dimensioning is used and either the
maximum or minimum vale hs gts allowing dec
‘al point, theater valu has er aed or uniform
EXAMPLE:
(a) Where basic dimensions are used, aociated
tolerances contain the number of decimal places neces
sary for contol Thee is no requirement for the basic
mencion value to e expressed with the same number
decimal places as he tolerance
233 Angle Tolerances
Where angle dimensions ae used, both the plus and
‘minus values and the angle have the same number of
decimal plc
EXAMPLE:
24 INTERPRETATION OF LIMITS
All it are absolute. Dimensions init regards
‘ofthe number of decimal places, ares asi they ere
<ontinued with zeros
EXAMPLES:
24 Plated or Coated Parts
Where part isto be plates or cote, the drawing or
referenced document shall specify whether the dimen
Sons apply before or afte plating Typical examples of
notes ar the following
(a) “DIMENSIONAL LIMITS APPLY AFTER PLATING.”
(0) “DIMENSIONAL UIT APPLY BEFORE PLATING.”
(For processes other than plating, substitute the
appropriate tem)
25 SINGLE UMITS
MUM or MAX i paced after a dimension where other
clement of the design definitely determine the other
specified limit. Features, such as depths of hole,
lengths of threads, comer rad, chamier, ee, may be
Limited in ths way: Single Git are used where the
intent willbe lar, and the urapeifio limit ca be zero
‘ce approsch infinity nd will not malt in à condition
Satrimentalto the design,
26 TOLERANCE ACCUMULATION
igure 24 compares the tolerance values resting
from the following ree methods of dimensioning.
Fig. 2-4 Tolerance Accumulation
Fig. 245 Relating Dimensional Limit to an Origin
Tso he do
me À
ee
Ens tratos orn pan
e
EAS ini
(a) Chain Dimension. The maximum. vain
ote two features sale sum toleran
on the Intermediate distances this ess in the grestst
tolerance accumulation. nF. 24 station (thet
france accumulation between surfaces Xand Vis 2015,
(0) Base Line Dinensoning. The maximum var
ation between two features Is equal to the sum of the
tolerances onthe two dimensions From their origin to
the features this results in à reduction of the tolerante
ccomulation. In Fig 24, istration (ho tolerance
Sccumlation between surfaces Xand Y 0.
(0 Direct Dimensbning. The maximum variation
cree wo features is controled by he terance on
the dimension betwoen the features this resus in the
leas tolerance In Fi, 2-4 istration (), he tolerance
between surfaces X and Vis 2005.
Et
126.1 Dimensional Limits Related to an Origin
In certain cs, is necessary 1 indicate tata dimer-
sion between two features shall originale rom one of
{hve features and nt the other. The high points of the
are indicated as the origin deine à plane for mess
‘urement The dimensions reat to the Origin ar akon
{rom the plane or ais and deine a zone within which
the thor features must ie, This concept doc not estab:
Tisha datum reference frame as describo in Section 4
Such a ases ustated in Fig. 25, where à part having
‘bro parallel surfaces of unequal length tobe mounted
fon the shorter sure. In this example, the dimension
origin symbol described in para. 3317 signin that
the dimension originates fom the plane establish by
the shorter surface and dimensional mit apply to te
‘other surface. Without such indication, the longer sur
{ace could have been selected asthe origin, us permi
ting greater angular variation between surface
27 UMTS OF SIZE
Unless otherwise specifi, the limit of size of a fe
ture prescribe the extent within which variations of geo.
metio form, as wel as size, are allowed. This contol
Apples solely to Individual regular features of sizes
Fig. 245 Relating Dimensional Limit to an Origin
Tso he do
me À
ee
Ens tratos orn pan
e
EAS ini
(a) Chain Dimension. The maximum. vain
ote two features sale sum toleran
on the Intermediate distances this ess in the grestst
tolerance accumulation. nF. 24 station (thet
france accumulation between surfaces Xand Vis 2015,
(0) Base Line Dinensoning. The maximum var
ation between two features Is equal to the sum of the
tolerances onthe two dimensions From their origin to
the features this results in à reduction of the tolerante
ccomulation. In Fig 24, istration (ho tolerance
Sccumlation between surfaces Xand Y 0.
(0 Direct Dimensbning. The maximum variation
cree wo features is controled by he terance on
the dimension betwoen the features this resus in the
leas tolerance In Fi, 2-4 istration (), he tolerance
between surfaces X and Vis 2005.
Et
126.1 Dimensional Limits Related to an Origin
In certain cs, is necessary 1 indicate tata dimer-
sion between two features shall originale rom one of
{hve features and nt the other. The high points of the
are indicated as the origin deine à plane for mess
‘urement The dimensions reat to the Origin ar akon
{rom the plane or ais and deine a zone within which
the thor features must ie, This concept doc not estab:
Tisha datum reference frame as describo in Section 4
Such a ases ustated in Fig. 25, where à part having
‘bro parallel surfaces of unequal length tobe mounted
fon the shorter sure. In this example, the dimension
origin symbol described in para. 3317 signin that
the dimension originates fom the plane establish by
the shorter surface and dimensional mit apply to te
‘other surface. Without such indication, the longer sur
{ace could have been selected asthe origin, us permi
ting greater angular variation between surface
27 UMTS OF SIZE
Unless otherwise specifi, the limit of size of a fe
ture prescribe the extent within which variations of geo.
metio form, as wel as size, are allowed. This contol
Apples solely to Individual regular features of sizes
Fig.2-6 Extreme Variations of Form Allowed by a Size Tolerance
em ET]
psa
¿qe pu,
FL rome
pre
oma 2000)
CET
Sosy
sirenas
panique
SE
Fig.2:7. Independency and Flatness Application
BIO
T
cn
defined in para, 1332.1. The actual loa size of anindi-
‘id feature a each cross section shall be within the
pied tolerance of size.
2.7.4 Varations of Form (Rule #1: Envelope Principle)
‘The form of an individual regula feature of size is
contra by is ls of sie tothe extent prescribe in
the following paragraphe and illustrated in Fig 2-6.
(a) The surface or surfaces of regular feature of size
shall no extend beyond a boundary envelope) of per-
fect form at MMC. This boundary he true geometric
form represented by the desing, No variation in form
‘permite ifthe regular fet of size produced at
ite MMC limit of size unless 9 simighines or ltness
tolerance is associated wih the size dimension or the
Independency symbol is applied per para. 273. See
[49
Ti) Where the actual local size of a regula stur
of size has departed from MMC toward LMC, à local
variation inform is allowed equal tothe amount of such
departure
16) Where sno default requirement fora boundary
of perfect form at LMC. Thus, a regular Feature of size
produced atts LMC limit of size l permitted to vary
rom true form to the masimum variation alowed by
the boundary of eset form at MMC.
(a) ln cases where a geometric tolerance is specified
tw apply st LMC, pere form at LMC i required. Soe
pora 735.
272 Form Control Does Not Apply (Exceptions to
Rule)
‘The conta of geometri form prscribed by limits of
size dows not apply othe following:
(a) stock, such as bars, sheets, tubing, structural
shapes and ater items produced to sables indus
try or government standards at prescribe mis for
straightness, Hse, and other grometeic character
[ics Unless geometric tolerances are spied on the
rowing ofa part made from these items, standards for
these items govern the surfaces that remain in Ihe as-
furnished condition onthe finished pa
19) parts subject to Freestate variation in the unre-
strained condition See para 55.
27.3 Perfect Form at MMC Not Required
Where parce frm at MMC is not rogird, the
Indeperieny symbol may be place eat tothe approprié
ate dimension or notation Soe Pig, 3-1 and por 3.334,
2.7.4 Relationship Between Individual Features
The limits of size do not contol the orientation or
location relationship between. individual” fetuses
Features shown perpendicular, comia, or symmetrical
em ET]
psa
¿qe pu,
FL rome
pre
oma 2000)
CET
Sosy
sirenas
panique
SE
Fig.2:7. Independency and Flatness Application
BIO
T
cn
defined in para, 1332.1. The actual loa size of anindi-
‘id feature a each cross section shall be within the
pied tolerance of size.
2.7.4 Varations of Form (Rule #1: Envelope Principle)
‘The form of an individual regula feature of size is
contra by is ls of sie tothe extent prescribe in
the following paragraphe and illustrated in Fig 2-6.
(a) The surface or surfaces of regular feature of size
shall no extend beyond a boundary envelope) of per-
fect form at MMC. This boundary he true geometric
form represented by the desing, No variation in form
‘permite ifthe regular fet of size produced at
ite MMC limit of size unless 9 simighines or ltness
tolerance is associated wih the size dimension or the
Independency symbol is applied per para. 273. See
[49
Ti) Where the actual local size of a regula stur
of size has departed from MMC toward LMC, à local
variation inform is allowed equal tothe amount of such
departure
16) Where sno default requirement fora boundary
of perfect form at LMC. Thus, a regular Feature of size
produced atts LMC limit of size l permitted to vary
rom true form to the masimum variation alowed by
the boundary of eset form at MMC.
(a) ln cases where a geometric tolerance is specified
tw apply st LMC, pere form at LMC i required. Soe
pora 735.
272 Form Control Does Not Apply (Exceptions to
Rule)
‘The conta of geometri form prscribed by limits of
size dows not apply othe following:
(a) stock, such as bars, sheets, tubing, structural
shapes and ater items produced to sables indus
try or government standards at prescribe mis for
straightness, Hse, and other grometeic character
[ics Unless geometric tolerances are spied on the
rowing ofa part made from these items, standards for
these items govern the surfaces that remain in Ihe as-
furnished condition onthe finished pa
19) parts subject to Freestate variation in the unre-
strained condition See para 55.
27.3 Perfect Form at MMC Not Required
Where parce frm at MMC is not rogird, the
Indeperieny symbol may be place eat tothe approprié
ate dimension or notation Soe Pig, 3-1 and por 3.334,
2.7.4 Relationship Between Individual Features
The limits of size do not contol the orientation or
location relationship between. individual” fetuses
Features shown perpendicular, comia, or symmetrical
Fig. 2 Continuous Feature, External Clinica!
This be are
oS | +i
Eng of pac am at uc
No pon ef te coruna re
AS
Lo ead other must be tolerancs for location or orient
tion to avoid incomplete drawing requirements These
tolerances maybe specific by one the methode given
in Sections 6 through 9. If it is necessary o establish à
boundary of pere format MMC to contol the rela
onu between features, one of the following methods
maybe we
la) Specity a zero tolerance of orientation at MMC,
including a datum reference (at MMB if applicable, 10
contol angulaniy, perpendicular, or potalllsm of
the feature Se poa. 644.
(0) Specify a zem postional tolerance at MMC,
including any specified datum reference (a! MMB if
applicable) to control cosa or symmetrical features
She paras 76220047711.
Te) Indicate thi contol fr he features involved by
1 mote such as "PERFECT ORIENTATION (or COAMALITY
ar LOCATION OF SYMMETRICAL FEATURES) AT MMC
REQUIRED FOR RELATED FEATURES.”
275 limits of Size and Continuous Features of Size
The note “CONTINUOUS FEATURE” or continuous
feature symbol is used to identify a group of two or
‘more features of size where there sa equirement that
they be trated gcometricall a. single feature size
‘When using the continuous feature symbol, extension
lines between the features may be shown or omited:
however extension Ines by themselves do not indicate
continous feature. So Fig 28 through 210.
2.8 APPLICABILITY OF MODIFIERS ON GEOMETRIC
‘TOLERANCE VALUES AND DATUM FEATURE
REFERENCES
RFS, MMC, and LMC may be applied geometri tl
crane vals on features of sive, Se Pipa Pad $24.
RMB, MMB, and LAB may be applied o datum feature
references. Rule 12 RES appli, with spect to the ind
vidal tolerance, and RMB apples, with respect tthe
Individual datum feature reference, where no modifying
symbols specified. MMC, LMC, MMB, or LMB sabe
Specific onthe desing where itis required.
(0) The min paragraph deca the pip ses nn
sth pra oe RES NBIC LC In ri l
‘to aan un coer ple oy nte sgae
se mtn dp
es clayey nd mery rates
ET onan Sts ar nd
282 Effect of RFS
Where a promet tolerance is applied on an RFS
bass the spec tolerance is independent ofthe ize
‘of theconsidered ture o size. The tolerances limite
to the specified value regardes of the size of the une
Tate actual mating envelope
282 Effect of MMC
Where a geometric tolerance is applied on an MMC
bass Ihe allowed tolerances dependent on the sizeof
the unrelated actua mating envelope of the considered
feature when considering effects based on the axis
Interpretation. The tolerance limited to the spec
‘ale if the features produced atts MMC hai of ze
Where the sie ofthe unelated actual mating envelope
‘ofthe feature has deported from MMC, an increase in
the trance qual to the amount of such depor
This be are
oS | +i
Eng of pac am at uc
No pon ef te coruna re
AS
Lo ead other must be tolerancs for location or orient
tion to avoid incomplete drawing requirements These
tolerances maybe specific by one the methode given
in Sections 6 through 9. If it is necessary o establish à
boundary of pere format MMC to contol the rela
onu between features, one of the following methods
maybe we
la) Specity a zero tolerance of orientation at MMC,
including a datum reference (at MMB if applicable, 10
contol angulaniy, perpendicular, or potalllsm of
the feature Se poa. 644.
(0) Specify a zem postional tolerance at MMC,
including any specified datum reference (a! MMB if
applicable) to control cosa or symmetrical features
She paras 76220047711.
Te) Indicate thi contol fr he features involved by
1 mote such as "PERFECT ORIENTATION (or COAMALITY
ar LOCATION OF SYMMETRICAL FEATURES) AT MMC
REQUIRED FOR RELATED FEATURES.”
275 limits of Size and Continuous Features of Size
The note “CONTINUOUS FEATURE” or continuous
feature symbol is used to identify a group of two or
‘more features of size where there sa equirement that
they be trated gcometricall a. single feature size
‘When using the continuous feature symbol, extension
lines between the features may be shown or omited:
however extension Ines by themselves do not indicate
continous feature. So Fig 28 through 210.
2.8 APPLICABILITY OF MODIFIERS ON GEOMETRIC
‘TOLERANCE VALUES AND DATUM FEATURE
REFERENCES
RFS, MMC, and LMC may be applied geometri tl
crane vals on features of sive, Se Pipa Pad $24.
RMB, MMB, and LAB may be applied o datum feature
references. Rule 12 RES appli, with spect to the ind
vidal tolerance, and RMB apples, with respect tthe
Individual datum feature reference, where no modifying
symbols specified. MMC, LMC, MMB, or LMB sabe
Specific onthe desing where itis required.
(0) The min paragraph deca the pip ses nn
sth pra oe RES NBIC LC In ri l
‘to aan un coer ple oy nte sgae
se mtn dp
es clayey nd mery rates
ET onan Sts ar nd
282 Effect of RFS
Where a promet tolerance is applied on an RFS
bass the spec tolerance is independent ofthe ize
‘of theconsidered ture o size. The tolerances limite
to the specified value regardes of the size of the une
Tate actual mating envelope
282 Effect of MMC
Where a geometric tolerance is applied on an MMC
bass Ihe allowed tolerances dependent on the sizeof
the unrelated actua mating envelope of the considered
feature when considering effects based on the axis
Interpretation. The tolerance limited to the spec
‘ale if the features produced atts MMC hai of ze
Where the sie ofthe unelated actual mating envelope
‘ofthe feature has deported from MMC, an increase in
the trance qual to the amount of such depor
Fig. 2-9 Continuous Feature, Internal Cytindical
err Tan e
‘as vag pat um à
= {hol eng eo Ta a
: cael
Enescntrs sm
y ed I
i 1
sa) LE
Ea
my be town or rs
y En al
Fig.2:10. Continuous Feature, External Width
Tso be ame eos m
sal “eee y
allowed, The total permisible variation inthe specified. is maximum when the entuneis at LMC, unlessa maxi
some characters maximum when the festure mamis speciied See Figs. 6-14 and 15,
SY LMC, unless a maximum pec.
284 Efctofimc
283 Eectof Zero Tolerance at MMC Where a geometric tolerance à appli on an LMC
Wherea tolerance of poston or orientation applied tas, erect form at LMC 8 required. Perfect form.
cas zerotoerance st MMC Ras thetkranceisttlly st MMC no equi. This the reciprocal of the
dependent onthe size of the unrelated actual mating, MMC concep, Se Fig, 211, Where a geomet tok
‘envelope ofthe considered este Notoleance ofpont ances applied on an LMC bass, the alowed tolerance
tionororienttonisalowed ifthe fetus produced at dependent on he unvebted actual minimum material
He MMC limito sie; and is case itmustbelcated envelope othe considered feature. The tolerance im-
true postie be pefetimorienation, applicable. felt espec valu the feature isproduced ati
Whore he sizeof the una actu matingenvelope LMC mit size Where the una otal minimum
ofthe considered feturehasdeparted rom MMC, ato material envelope ofthe feature ha departed fom MC,
eranceequaltotheameountof such departreisalowed, an nerds inthe tolerance equal ote amount of such
hetotlpermisibe variation in poston or orientation departure is allowed, The il permissible variation
x0
err Tan e
‘as vag pat um à
= {hol eng eo Ta a
: cael
Enescntrs sm
y ed I
i 1
sa) LE
Ea
my be town or rs
y En al
Fig.2:10. Continuous Feature, External Width
Tso be ame eos m
sal “eee y
allowed, The total permisible variation inthe specified. is maximum when the entuneis at LMC, unlessa maxi
some characters maximum when the festure mamis speciied See Figs. 6-14 and 15,
SY LMC, unless a maximum pec.
284 Efctofimc
283 Eectof Zero Tolerance at MMC Where a geometric tolerance à appli on an LMC
Wherea tolerance of poston or orientation applied tas, erect form at LMC 8 required. Perfect form.
cas zerotoerance st MMC Ras thetkranceisttlly st MMC no equi. This the reciprocal of the
dependent onthe size of the unrelated actual mating, MMC concep, Se Fig, 211, Where a geomet tok
‘envelope ofthe considered este Notoleance ofpont ances applied on an LMC bass, the alowed tolerance
tionororienttonisalowed ifthe fetus produced at dependent on he unvebted actual minimum material
He MMC limito sie; and is case itmustbelcated envelope othe considered feature. The tolerance im-
true postie be pefetimorienation, applicable. felt espec valu the feature isproduced ati
Whore he sizeof the una actu matingenvelope LMC mit size Where the una otal minimum
ofthe considered feturehasdeparted rom MMC, ato material envelope ofthe feature ha departed fom MC,
eranceequaltotheameountof such departreisalowed, an nerds inthe tolerance equal ote amount of such
hetotlpermisibe variation in poston or orientation departure is allowed, The il permissible variation
x0
Fig. 211 Extreme Variations of Form Allowed by a Geometric Tolerance — Perfect Form at LMC
3 al) 205 0m)
| MT
¡ |
| sou
o on Po
SE somo
in position is maximum when the fst
unless maximum i specified, Se Fig 7.1
285 Effect of Zero Tolerance at MC
her a tolerance of position or orientation is applet
‘ona zero tolerance at LMC bass, the tolerance itty
‘dependent on the size of the actual minimum material
envelope of the considered feature: No tolerance of
Postion or orientation is allowed if he feature de
Produced at is LMC limit of size; and in this case e
must be located at tue postion or be perfect in orient
ton as applicable. Where the actual minimum material
envelope of the considered feature has departed rom
MC, a tolerance equal 1 the amount of such departure
is allowed. The total permissible variation in positon
‘orientation maximum when the feature Lat MMC
‘lesa maximum api Se ig 615 and 7-4
29 SCREW THREADS
Each tolerance of orientation or positon and datum
reference specified fora eve thread applies tothe axis
‘ofthe thre derived from the pitch cylinder Where am
exception to this practice necessary the specifies
tures thescre thread (such as "MAJOR DIA or" MINOR
DÍA") shal be stated beneath the fentur contol fame,
or benenth or adjacent o the datum feature symbol, as
Applcabe. Soe Fig. 7-38,
2.10 GEARS AND SPLINES,
Each tolerance of orenaton or positon and datum
reference specie fr features oer than screw threads,
sch as gear and splines, must designate the specific
feature ofthe gear or spline to which ech applis (uch
35 "MAJOR DIA” “PITCH DIA” or "MINOR DIA”. This
Information is stated beneath the fest contr! fame
or bones he datum tar symbols applicable
2.11 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS.
Depending upon is function, a feature of size is con
role by is size and any applicable geometric toler
ances Material condition (RFS, MMC, or LMC) may
lo be applicable. Consideration must be given to the
alive fects of MMC and applicable tolerances in
‘etermining the clearance between part fixed or Ht
ing fastener formula) and in establishing gage feature
sizes. Consideration must be given to the collective
Sci of LMC and applicable tolerances in determin
ing guaranteed are of contact, thin wall conservation,
Sin alignment hole locaton in establishing gage es
ture sic. Consideration must be given to the collective
‘fects of RS and any applicable tolerances in determin
Ing psrantoed contol ofthe center pont, feature ax,
otre center plane. Se ig 2-12 through 217
2.12 ANGULAR SURFACES,
Whore an angular surfaces defined by à combination
‘of a dirty toleranced linear and an angular dimen-
Son, the surface must ie within tlerance zone rep.
‘sented by two nonparall planes. See Fi, 218. The
tolerance one wil widen asthe distance fom the apex
‘ofthe angle increases. Where 3 tolerance zone with pur
lel boundaries is desicd, angulaity or profile tle
Ance may be used. See Fig, 1 and Sections and 8.
3 al) 205 0m)
| MT
¡ |
| sou
o on Po
SE somo
in position is maximum when the fst
unless maximum i specified, Se Fig 7.1
285 Effect of Zero Tolerance at MC
her a tolerance of position or orientation is applet
‘ona zero tolerance at LMC bass, the tolerance itty
‘dependent on the size of the actual minimum material
envelope of the considered feature: No tolerance of
Postion or orientation is allowed if he feature de
Produced at is LMC limit of size; and in this case e
must be located at tue postion or be perfect in orient
ton as applicable. Where the actual minimum material
envelope of the considered feature has departed rom
MC, a tolerance equal 1 the amount of such departure
is allowed. The total permissible variation in positon
‘orientation maximum when the feature Lat MMC
‘lesa maximum api Se ig 615 and 7-4
29 SCREW THREADS
Each tolerance of orientation or positon and datum
reference specified fora eve thread applies tothe axis
‘ofthe thre derived from the pitch cylinder Where am
exception to this practice necessary the specifies
tures thescre thread (such as "MAJOR DIA or" MINOR
DÍA") shal be stated beneath the fentur contol fame,
or benenth or adjacent o the datum feature symbol, as
Applcabe. Soe Fig. 7-38,
2.10 GEARS AND SPLINES,
Each tolerance of orenaton or positon and datum
reference specie fr features oer than screw threads,
sch as gear and splines, must designate the specific
feature ofthe gear or spline to which ech applis (uch
35 "MAJOR DIA” “PITCH DIA” or "MINOR DIA”. This
Information is stated beneath the fest contr! fame
or bones he datum tar symbols applicable
2.11 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS.
Depending upon is function, a feature of size is con
role by is size and any applicable geometric toler
ances Material condition (RFS, MMC, or LMC) may
lo be applicable. Consideration must be given to the
alive fects of MMC and applicable tolerances in
‘etermining the clearance between part fixed or Ht
ing fastener formula) and in establishing gage feature
sizes. Consideration must be given to the collective
Sci of LMC and applicable tolerances in determin
ing guaranteed are of contact, thin wall conservation,
Sin alignment hole locaton in establishing gage es
ture sic. Consideration must be given to the collective
‘fects of RS and any applicable tolerances in determin
Ing psrantoed contol ofthe center pont, feature ax,
otre center plane. Se ig 2-12 through 217
2.12 ANGULAR SURFACES,
Whore an angular surfaces defined by à combination
‘of a dirty toleranced linear and an angular dimen-
Son, the surface must ie within tlerance zone rep.
‘sented by two nonparall planes. See Fi, 218. The
tolerance one wil widen asthe distance fom the apex
‘ofthe angle increases. Where 3 tolerance zone with pur
lel boundaries is desicd, angulaity or profile tle
Ance may be used. See Fig, 1 and Sections and 8.
Fig.2:12. Virtual and Resultant Condition Boundaries Using MMC Concept — Internal Feature
erry
£
LES
fear)
=
Fig.2:13. Virtual and Resltant Condition Boundaries Using LMC Concept — Internal Feature
erry
£
LES
fear)
=
Fig.2:13. Virtual and Resltant Condition Boundaries Using LMC Concept — Internal Feature
Fig.2-14 Inner and Outer Boundaries Using RES Concept — Internal Feature
a] | ET
SFR
a
[Ela
ñ
!
E
Mr
i
i
F
i
i
|
7
4
À
E
4
!
4
dl
|
i
N
i
i
Fig. 245
Viral and Resultant Condition Boundaries Using MMC Concept — External Feature
Tine on
90 Pa
a] | ET
SFR
a
[Ela
ñ
!
E
Mr
i
i
F
i
i
|
7
4
À
E
4
!
4
dl
|
i
N
i
i
Fig. 245
Viral and Resultant Condition Boundaries Using MMC Concept — External Feature
Tine on
90 Pa
Fig. 246. Virtual and Resultant Condition Boundaries Using LMC Concept — External Feature
2 EH
eye
oR
Gone pits
FATE
mt pe
[os
GTI zu
E
Es
i
2 EH
eye
oR
Gone pits
FATE
mt pe
[os
GTI zu
E
Es
i
Fig. 248 Tolerancng an Angular Surface Using a
Combination of Linear and Angular Dimensions
Fig.219 Specifying Tapers
THIS ON THE DRAWING: 1
oe 1 | [3
1 @| —
nun
E CE MER
Zi
». sols Eos
ns ci en
Le cord rd an ay
Ieee
LI TS, ee
= a |
223 como TAPERS per = = 29/4
Canal topes Inde de ateo of snd a
cine pes wed ios fin das br En
D sc Ss Aves Sonar Sling and ia
Step Taper serie. See ASME 05.10. American Standart
machine tapers are usually dimensioned by specifying
the taper name and number. See Fig 2-19, istration
(0). The diameter atthe gage line and the length may
so be specified, The taper in inches per foot and the
‘iameter of he smallend may beshown as reference A
nisl taper may as be pected by one of the kl
ing method
Ta) abasic taper and a base diameter (oe Fig. 228.
(0) 3 size tolerance combined witha profile oa sur
face tolerance applied to the taper (see para 842),
(e) à tolerance diameter at both ends ofa operand
toleranced length Se Fig 21 lation (o)
a) a composite profile tolerance
Conical tapers the ati ofthe sifrence in the diam-
ctersoftwosectons (perpendicular o theaxs)ofacene
{othe distance between these sections
“The symbol fora conical taper isshown in Fig. 221
214 FLATTAPERS
AAfttapermay bespecific by toleranced slope and
a toleranced height atone end. See Fi, 220 Sloe may
especie as the inclination ofa surface exprese asa
ti ofthe ferner inthe eights at each end (above
And at right angles base line) to the distance between
hose highs
“Thus slope = (412) 2.
= »
Ss
“The symbol for slope shown in Fig. 220.
Combination of Linear and Angular Dimensions
Fig.219 Specifying Tapers
THIS ON THE DRAWING: 1
oe 1 | [3
1 @| —
nun
E CE MER
Zi
». sols Eos
ns ci en
Le cord rd an ay
Ieee
LI TS, ee
= a |
223 como TAPERS per = = 29/4
Canal topes Inde de ateo of snd a
cine pes wed ios fin das br En
D sc Ss Aves Sonar Sling and ia
Step Taper serie. See ASME 05.10. American Standart
machine tapers are usually dimensioned by specifying
the taper name and number. See Fig 2-19, istration
(0). The diameter atthe gage line and the length may
so be specified, The taper in inches per foot and the
‘iameter of he smallend may beshown as reference A
nisl taper may as be pected by one of the kl
ing method
Ta) abasic taper and a base diameter (oe Fig. 228.
(0) 3 size tolerance combined witha profile oa sur
face tolerance applied to the taper (see para 842),
(e) à tolerance diameter at both ends ofa operand
toleranced length Se Fig 21 lation (o)
a) a composite profile tolerance
Conical tapers the ati ofthe sifrence in the diam-
ctersoftwosectons (perpendicular o theaxs)ofacene
{othe distance between these sections
“The symbol fora conical taper isshown in Fig. 221
214 FLATTAPERS
AAfttapermay bespecific by toleranced slope and
a toleranced height atone end. See Fi, 220 Sloe may
especie as the inclination ofa surface exprese asa
ti ofthe ferner inthe eights at each end (above
And at right angles base line) to the distance between
hose highs
“Thus slope = (412) 2.
= »
Ss
“The symbol for slope shown in Fig. 220.
Fig.2-20 Speciying a Flat Taper
8.222. Speciing a Radius
DETTE LT
ml =
“ Par contour
zei
Fig.223 SpeciyingaContolled Radius
Ten be anne | Mans ie
215 RADIUS
Aradiusis any straight ine extending fom the center
to the periphery ofa cele or phere.
215.1 Radius Tolerance
radius symbol, cretos one defined by two ates
(the minimum and maximum radi The por surface
must he within ths zone. See Fig. 222.
2152 Controlled Radls Tolerance
A controlled radius symbol, CR, cretes à tolerance
one defined by tuo ars (the minimum and maximum.
mel
radi) that are tangent 10 he adjcent surfaces. Where
controlled radius à specified, the part contour within
the crescent-shaped tolerance zone must bea fir cu
‘without reversal is recommended thatthe CR be fe
ther defined with an engineering contol speciation,
‘Additionally ai taken ata poison the pat contour
Stall nether be smaller than the specie minimum
limit nor larger han the maximum it See Pig, 223.
‘Where it ismecessary o apply further restrictions 1 the
pet ads, they sl e specified on the drawingorin.
document eerenesd on the drawing
216 TANGENT PLANE
Where ts deste to control a tangent plane eb:
lished by the contacting point ofa surface, the tangent
plane symbol sale added in the feature conto fame
Mtr the tated tolerance See Fig. 6:18. the tangent
Planet uatable it may be optimized. See para. A112
fd ASMEYIS.IM
217 STATISTICAL TOLERANCING
Statistical tolerancing à the assigning of tolerances o
‘ated components ofan assembly on the basis of ound
Statistics (sch as the assembly tolerance is equal to the
Square root ofthe sum ofthe squats ofthe individual
tolerances
247.4 Application to Assemblies
‘The tolerances assigned to component items of an
sembly ate determined by arithmekally dividing the
8.222. Speciing a Radius
DETTE LT
ml =
“ Par contour
zei
Fig.223 SpeciyingaContolled Radius
Ten be anne | Mans ie
215 RADIUS
Aradiusis any straight ine extending fom the center
to the periphery ofa cele or phere.
215.1 Radius Tolerance
radius symbol, cretos one defined by two ates
(the minimum and maximum radi The por surface
must he within ths zone. See Fig. 222.
2152 Controlled Radls Tolerance
A controlled radius symbol, CR, cretes à tolerance
one defined by tuo ars (the minimum and maximum.
mel
radi) that are tangent 10 he adjcent surfaces. Where
controlled radius à specified, the part contour within
the crescent-shaped tolerance zone must bea fir cu
‘without reversal is recommended thatthe CR be fe
ther defined with an engineering contol speciation,
‘Additionally ai taken ata poison the pat contour
Stall nether be smaller than the specie minimum
limit nor larger han the maximum it See Pig, 223.
‘Where it ismecessary o apply further restrictions 1 the
pet ads, they sl e specified on the drawingorin.
document eerenesd on the drawing
216 TANGENT PLANE
Where ts deste to control a tangent plane eb:
lished by the contacting point ofa surface, the tangent
plane symbol sale added in the feature conto fame
Mtr the tated tolerance See Fig. 6:18. the tangent
Planet uatable it may be optimized. See para. A112
fd ASMEYIS.IM
217 STATISTICAL TOLERANCING
Statistical tolerancing à the assigning of tolerances o
‘ated components ofan assembly on the basis of ound
Statistics (sch as the assembly tolerance is equal to the
Square root ofthe sum ofthe squats ofthe individual
tolerances
247.4 Application to Assemblies
‘The tolerances assigned to component items of an
sembly ate determined by arithmekally dividing the
Fig. 2.24, StatsicalTolerancag
"peewee
| KT
TI
— and
Fig. 2.25. Statistical Tolerancing With Arithmetic mis
Fig. 2-26. Statistical Tolerancing With
Geometric Controls
rro
7 sets
[tés
al
2
Bons
Branson
À no sch 2 a ooo
ee
assembly tolerances among the individual components
‘ofthe assembly Where tolerances assigned by athe
tic sacking are restrictive, statistical toleamcing may
be used for incensed individual future tolerance. The
Increased toleran may reduce manufacturing cost, but
shallonly be employed where the appropriate statistics]
proces contol wil be used or application sce appro-
rite statistics or enginering design manual
2472 Mentifcation
Statistical tolerances on dimensions ate designated as
lysate in Figs 224 trough 226.
la) A note such asthe following shall be pleat on
the’ drawing: "FEATURES IDENTIFI AS STATISTICALLY
fes]
TOLERANCED GD SHALL BE PRODUCED WITH STATISTICAL
PROCESS CONTROLS” Se Fig. 2-24
10) 1 may be necessary to designate both the stats
nits and the ariel stacking limit where the
¿imension has the posit of being produced with
‘ut statistic! process conto (SPC). À mate such a the
following <hal be placed on the drawing: "FEATURES
IDENTIFIED AS STATISTICALLY TOLERANCED ED SHALL
BE PRODUCED WITH STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROLS,
OR TO THE MORE RESTRICINE ARITHMETIC LIMITS.”
See Fig 225,
‘CAUTION: Were win th ait toleran pmol the
‘cv io inden habe pci
"peewee
| KT
TI
— and
Fig. 2.25. Statistical Tolerancing With Arithmetic mis
Fig. 2-26. Statistical Tolerancing With
Geometric Controls
rro
7 sets
[tés
al
2
Bons
Branson
À no sch 2 a ooo
ee
assembly tolerances among the individual components
‘ofthe assembly Where tolerances assigned by athe
tic sacking are restrictive, statistical toleamcing may
be used for incensed individual future tolerance. The
Increased toleran may reduce manufacturing cost, but
shallonly be employed where the appropriate statistics]
proces contol wil be used or application sce appro-
rite statistics or enginering design manual
2472 Mentifcation
Statistical tolerances on dimensions ate designated as
lysate in Figs 224 trough 226.
la) A note such asthe following shall be pleat on
the’ drawing: "FEATURES IDENTIFI AS STATISTICALLY
fes]
TOLERANCED GD SHALL BE PRODUCED WITH STATISTICAL
PROCESS CONTROLS” Se Fig. 2-24
10) 1 may be necessary to designate both the stats
nits and the ariel stacking limit where the
¿imension has the posit of being produced with
‘ut statistic! process conto (SPC). À mate such a the
following <hal be placed on the drawing: "FEATURES
IDENTIFIED AS STATISTICALLY TOLERANCED ED SHALL
BE PRODUCED WITH STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROLS,
OR TO THE MORE RESTRICINE ARITHMETIC LIMITS.”
See Fig 225,
‘CAUTION: Were win th ait toleran pmol the
‘cv io inden habe pci
Section 3
Symbology
32 GENERAL
‘This Section establishes the symbuls fr speciving
ssometriccharactriaicsand other dimensional quite:
‘ents onenginserng drawings Symbolsshllbe ofsuf-
cient clarity to meet the lo and nproducilty
requirements of ASME VIA 2M. Symbols shall be used
Only as described herein
3.2 USE OF NOTES TO SUPPLEMENT SYMBOLS
Situations may aise where the denied geometric
requirements cannot be completely conveyed by sym-
tology. In auch cass note may be used o describe the
requirement, either separately or lo supplement à geo
ret symbol See Fig 616, 617, and 758
33. SYMBOL CONSTRUCTION
Information related to the construction, form, and
proportion of individual symbols described herein is
Stine in Nonmandatory Appendix.
33.1 Geometrie Characteristic Symbols
"The symbolic means of indicating geometric charac
heit am shown in ig 1
33.2 Datum Feature Symbol
“The symbole means ofindietinga datum feature con
sists of capital ete enclosed Ina square r rectangular
frame and à leader in extending rom the fame to the
feature terminating with angle. The tangle moy be
filled or not filed, Soe Fig. 32. Letters ofthe alphabet,
(except, O, and Q) sal be use as datum idetying
letra Each datum feature ofa part rung identi
‘ation shall be assign a different lt, When datum
features requiring sentation on a drawing are so
numerous st exhaust the single alpha series, the dou
Ue alpha series (AA through AZ, BA through BZ, ec)
shalt used and endowed in avectangular frame. Where
the same datum feature symbol repeated to dent,
the sme feature nother location ol drwing it need
rot be identified a reference. The datum feature symbol
applied tothe feature surface outline, extension line,
dimension line, o feature control frame a follows:
(a) placed on the outline of feature surface, on an
extension line ofthe feature outine, lel separated
Irom the dimension ine, when the datum feture the
surface isl, ron a leder line directed tothe surface.
(On 20 orthographic drawing where the datum fos
tures ot on the visible surface, the leader ine may be
shown asa dashed ine Se Fig. 34.
(1) plced on the dimension ineoran extension of the
dimension line ofa featur of size when the datum isan
isis or center plane. there insulin space forte
{wo aros, ne f them may be eplacod y th datum
feature triangle. See Figs. 34, illustrations) through
(0.0,ond (438; and 435, ustrations() and (9,
fe) placed onthe cutie of acylindralfesturesuface
or an tension line othe feature ulin sept from
he ze dimension, chen the datum isan avs For diga
‘it les, the tangle maybe tangent to the tur Soe
Fig. 34 illustrations (0 and (8)
la) placed on the horizontal portion of à dimension
Tender in for he size dimension See Figs 3-4, asta
Sion (0438 and 435, lustros (9) and (PL
‘placed above or below and attached othe feature
contra frame, Se para. 36nd Figs 35 and 3.27.
{P places on à chain Tine that indicates a partit
atu feature, So Fig. 427
333 Datum Target Symbol
‘The symbulic mesns of indican a datum target shall
bea cire divided horizontal nto halves. The ler all
contains à ker iemifyng the suc datum, folk
lowed by the target number assigned sequentially stating
with foreach datum. See Figs and AR Arline
tach to the symbol dit to tre point, arg
line, target ara, as applicable. Seo para 1241. Where
‘he datum tage am ams the size and shape ofthe aro.
{true promet oumtempart) entered in he upper all
of he symbol; otherwise the upper half set Dank I
there snot suficent space within the compartment the
Stand shape ofthe aes may be pce oui and con
‘ected othe compartment by à leader line terminating
swith dot See Fin 36 and A
333.1 Datum Target Polns. A datum target point
is indicated by the target point symbol, dimensionally
located ina direct view ofthe surface: Where there 0
direct view, the point lation is dimensioned on two
cent views, See ig 37.
3332 Datum Target Lies. A datum target line is
indicated by the datum target point symbol on an edge
‘ew ofthe surface, a plamion line the diet view,
Symbology
32 GENERAL
‘This Section establishes the symbuls fr speciving
ssometriccharactriaicsand other dimensional quite:
‘ents onenginserng drawings Symbolsshllbe ofsuf-
cient clarity to meet the lo and nproducilty
requirements of ASME VIA 2M. Symbols shall be used
Only as described herein
3.2 USE OF NOTES TO SUPPLEMENT SYMBOLS
Situations may aise where the denied geometric
requirements cannot be completely conveyed by sym-
tology. In auch cass note may be used o describe the
requirement, either separately or lo supplement à geo
ret symbol See Fig 616, 617, and 758
33. SYMBOL CONSTRUCTION
Information related to the construction, form, and
proportion of individual symbols described herein is
Stine in Nonmandatory Appendix.
33.1 Geometrie Characteristic Symbols
"The symbolic means of indicating geometric charac
heit am shown in ig 1
33.2 Datum Feature Symbol
“The symbole means ofindietinga datum feature con
sists of capital ete enclosed Ina square r rectangular
frame and à leader in extending rom the fame to the
feature terminating with angle. The tangle moy be
filled or not filed, Soe Fig. 32. Letters ofthe alphabet,
(except, O, and Q) sal be use as datum idetying
letra Each datum feature ofa part rung identi
‘ation shall be assign a different lt, When datum
features requiring sentation on a drawing are so
numerous st exhaust the single alpha series, the dou
Ue alpha series (AA through AZ, BA through BZ, ec)
shalt used and endowed in avectangular frame. Where
the same datum feature symbol repeated to dent,
the sme feature nother location ol drwing it need
rot be identified a reference. The datum feature symbol
applied tothe feature surface outline, extension line,
dimension line, o feature control frame a follows:
(a) placed on the outline of feature surface, on an
extension line ofthe feature outine, lel separated
Irom the dimension ine, when the datum feture the
surface isl, ron a leder line directed tothe surface.
(On 20 orthographic drawing where the datum fos
tures ot on the visible surface, the leader ine may be
shown asa dashed ine Se Fig. 34.
(1) plced on the dimension ineoran extension of the
dimension line ofa featur of size when the datum isan
isis or center plane. there insulin space forte
{wo aros, ne f them may be eplacod y th datum
feature triangle. See Figs. 34, illustrations) through
(0.0,ond (438; and 435, ustrations() and (9,
fe) placed onthe cutie of acylindralfesturesuface
or an tension line othe feature ulin sept from
he ze dimension, chen the datum isan avs For diga
‘it les, the tangle maybe tangent to the tur Soe
Fig. 34 illustrations (0 and (8)
la) placed on the horizontal portion of à dimension
Tender in for he size dimension See Figs 3-4, asta
Sion (0438 and 435, lustros (9) and (PL
‘placed above or below and attached othe feature
contra frame, Se para. 36nd Figs 35 and 3.27.
{P places on à chain Tine that indicates a partit
atu feature, So Fig. 427
333 Datum Target Symbol
‘The symbulic mesns of indican a datum target shall
bea cire divided horizontal nto halves. The ler all
contains à ker iemifyng the suc datum, folk
lowed by the target number assigned sequentially stating
with foreach datum. See Figs and AR Arline
tach to the symbol dit to tre point, arg
line, target ara, as applicable. Seo para 1241. Where
‘he datum tage am ams the size and shape ofthe aro.
{true promet oumtempart) entered in he upper all
of he symbol; otherwise the upper half set Dank I
there snot suficent space within the compartment the
Stand shape ofthe aes may be pce oui and con
‘ected othe compartment by à leader line terminating
swith dot See Fin 36 and A
333.1 Datum Target Polns. A datum target point
is indicated by the target point symbol, dimensionally
located ina direct view ofthe surface: Where there 0
direct view, the point lation is dimensioned on two
cent views, See ig 37.
3332 Datum Target Lies. A datum target line is
indicated by the datum target point symbol on an edge
‘ew ofthe surface, a plamion line the diet view,
8.34. Geometrc Characteristic Symbols
| mess zZ sa
FRE re ET O EN
eanoncry a EN
mes - PROFR OF A UNE A mn
RARES m PROFLE OF A SURFACE a EEN)
mau Z en
CS | penrenweuanm L es
FR may Da edo "y be nr EX
Fig.32 Datum Feature Symbol Fig, 33 Datum Feature Symbols ona Feature Surface
“andan Extension ine
fil al
| mess zZ sa
FRE re ET O EN
eanoncry a EN
mes - PROFR OF A UNE A mn
RARES m PROFLE OF A SURFACE a EEN)
mau Z en
CS | penrenweuanm L es
FR may Da edo "y be nr EX
Fig.32 Datum Feature Symbol Fig, 33 Datum Feature Symbols ona Feature Surface
“andan Extension ine
fil al
Fig. 5-4 Placement of Datum Feature Symbols on Features of Size
= — el Lid
“
e
Seg te)
Fig. 345 Placement of Datum Feature Symbol in
Fig.3-7 Datum Target Pont
Conjuction With a Feature Control Frame
Ths on me ang
espa
126 un Tata pes
EX T
Tun
=
= — el Lid
“
e
Seg te)
Fig. 345 Placement of Datum Feature Symbol in
Fig.3-7 Datum Target Pont
Conjuction With a Feature Control Frame
Ths on me ang
espa
126 un Tata pes
EX T
Tun
=
Fig. 348. Datum Target Line
Le
TS on be Sora
Fig. 3-9 Datum Target Area
E
a 150
Fr TE
E € E
“os” at
or both So Fig. 38, Where it is necessary to control the
Tength of the datum target line its length and location
a dimensioned
33.33 Datum Target Areas. Where determined
that an ana or aa of contact is necessary lo assure
(Stabichment of the datum (that 6, where spherical
fr pointed pins would be inadequate) à targetas of
the desired shapes specified. The datum target aros ds
indicated by section lines inside à phantom outine of
the desire shape, with controlling dimensions added
‘The diameter of cular ares ls given in the upper all
ofthe datum target symbol. See Fig. 9, usteation a)
‘Where it becomes impractical to delineate a circuler
target are, the method of indication shown in i 33,
lation (9) may be used,
3.34 Basi Dimension Symbol
‘The symbolic means of indicating abasic dimension
«tale shown in Pi. 3-10
335 Material Condition/Boundary Symbols
The symbolic means ofindicting"at maximum mate
sia contin” or “at maximum material boundary” "at
lesst material condition” ora Ins material boundary
hal as shown in igs 3.1 and 45
Fig.3-10. Basic Dimension Symbol Application
te
336 Projected Tolerance one Symbol
The symbole means indicating projecte tolerance
zone shall bas shown in Figs 311,721 and 7:2.
337 Diameter and Radius Symbols
‘The symbole wed to indicate diameter, spherical
meter radi spherical radius, and controlled aus
all be as shown in Fig 31, These symbols shall pre
fade the value of à dimension or tolerance give
“amer or adi, as applicable. The symbol and the
‘ale shall not be separate bya space
338 Reference Symbol
“The symbolic means of indicating dimension or
‘ther dimensional data reference lle enclin
{he dimension (or dimensional dat) within parent
ses Sec Fig 23 and 3-1. writen note, parentheses
in their grammatil interpretation uns otherwise
a
Le
TS on be Sora
Fig. 3-9 Datum Target Area
E
a 150
Fr TE
E € E
“os” at
or both So Fig. 38, Where it is necessary to control the
Tength of the datum target line its length and location
a dimensioned
33.33 Datum Target Areas. Where determined
that an ana or aa of contact is necessary lo assure
(Stabichment of the datum (that 6, where spherical
fr pointed pins would be inadequate) à targetas of
the desired shapes specified. The datum target aros ds
indicated by section lines inside à phantom outine of
the desire shape, with controlling dimensions added
‘The diameter of cular ares ls given in the upper all
ofthe datum target symbol. See Fig. 9, usteation a)
‘Where it becomes impractical to delineate a circuler
target are, the method of indication shown in i 33,
lation (9) may be used,
3.34 Basi Dimension Symbol
‘The symbolic means of indicating abasic dimension
«tale shown in Pi. 3-10
335 Material Condition/Boundary Symbols
The symbolic means ofindicting"at maximum mate
sia contin” or “at maximum material boundary” "at
lesst material condition” ora Ins material boundary
hal as shown in igs 3.1 and 45
Fig.3-10. Basic Dimension Symbol Application
te
336 Projected Tolerance one Symbol
The symbole means indicating projecte tolerance
zone shall bas shown in Figs 311,721 and 7:2.
337 Diameter and Radius Symbols
‘The symbole wed to indicate diameter, spherical
meter radi spherical radius, and controlled aus
all be as shown in Fig 31, These symbols shall pre
fade the value of à dimension or tolerance give
“amer or adi, as applicable. The symbol and the
‘ale shall not be separate bya space
338 Reference Symbol
“The symbolic means of indicating dimension or
‘ther dimensional data reference lle enclin
{he dimension (or dimensional dat) within parent
ses Sec Fig 23 and 3-1. writen note, parentheses
in their grammatil interpretation uns otherwise
a
Fig.3-11 Modifying Symbols
ig. 3-12_ Indicating the Specified Tolerance isa
‘Statistical Geometric Tolerance
speed. When it fs necessary to define dimensions
dimensional data as reference in à note, the term
REFERENCE” or abbreviation "REF shall Be ud,
339 Arc Length Symbol
‘Thesymboliemenns findicating hata dimension san
arc eng measures on curved line shallbeas shown
in Fig 31. The symbol shall be placed above the diner.
Som and applies tothe surace nearest he dimension
| ee
ETC er
a emcee
ee. | à ja g.343 Stall Tolerance Symbol
ee, :
musas > [ae BEG)
monet ramverme | © [asa Po =
man © [a=
ar nme © en Fig. 314 Between Symbol
LUNEQUALLY DISPOSED PROFLE © |ssz Gann
nosrmonr © [sm ope
SATA TERE © [ne od
Cea ANE @ [sa
sens D Ter] 3240 staal oerancing Symbol
SRA OMEN 88 [sar] The symbole meas indican ot a trance
ined o sna rong sh es sown à
won r [sr | fy Sin teens st gone er
= Safar] amit yb sal fe place ini arson
ie ong he stad Dane mu any near
Comm mous oR paar] AS
tre the sy lb plc et te nr
E77 [sam] dimen Seg 313
— EY [tus 33.11 Between Symbol
pee une 2 [550 | ne stat mea ef nding that» tance
4 cr’ spon apply ssc li fetus
DMENSION ORIN D [ono] cosmo segment ofa feature between designated
seres ES
Kader rm e tr ir ame ined othe
mon [B= [sam] fortonol eat te whch ht lane apis
Fassia campo tetanic hen
pu ous PE ee
3342 Counterbore Symbol
The symbolic means of indicating countrbore shall
eas shown ig. 1-37 and 315 Thesymbalshallpre-
sede, with no space, the dimension of the counterbore.
33.13 Spotface Symbol
Thesymbutiemeansofindicatinga spetfaesallbe as
shown in Figs Il and 3-15. The symbol shall precede,
‘vith no space the dimension of espace
ig. 3-12_ Indicating the Specified Tolerance isa
‘Statistical Geometric Tolerance
speed. When it fs necessary to define dimensions
dimensional data as reference in à note, the term
REFERENCE” or abbreviation "REF shall Be ud,
339 Arc Length Symbol
‘Thesymboliemenns findicating hata dimension san
arc eng measures on curved line shallbeas shown
in Fig 31. The symbol shall be placed above the diner.
Som and applies tothe surace nearest he dimension
| ee
ETC er
a emcee
ee. | à ja g.343 Stall Tolerance Symbol
ee, :
musas > [ae BEG)
monet ramverme | © [asa Po =
man © [a=
ar nme © en Fig. 314 Between Symbol
LUNEQUALLY DISPOSED PROFLE © |ssz Gann
nosrmonr © [sm ope
SATA TERE © [ne od
Cea ANE @ [sa
sens D Ter] 3240 staal oerancing Symbol
SRA OMEN 88 [sar] The symbole meas indican ot a trance
ined o sna rong sh es sown à
won r [sr | fy Sin teens st gone er
= Safar] amit yb sal fe place ini arson
ie ong he stad Dane mu any near
Comm mous oR paar] AS
tre the sy lb plc et te nr
E77 [sam] dimen Seg 313
— EY [tus 33.11 Between Symbol
pee une 2 [550 | ne stat mea ef nding that» tance
4 cr’ spon apply ssc li fetus
DMENSION ORIN D [ono] cosmo segment ofa feature between designated
seres ES
Kader rm e tr ir ame ined othe
mon [B= [sam] fortonol eat te whch ht lane apis
Fassia campo tetanic hen
pu ous PE ee
3342 Counterbore Symbol
The symbolic means of indicating countrbore shall
eas shown ig. 1-37 and 315 Thesymbalshallpre-
sede, with no space, the dimension of the counterbore.
33.13 Spotface Symbol
Thesymbutiemeansofindicatinga spetfaesallbe as
shown in Figs Il and 3-15. The symbol shall precede,
‘vith no space the dimension of espace
Fig. 3-15 Counterbore or Spotface Symbol
Fig. 3-17- Depth Symbol
ze Po
OT 1. se
om Í 15.528. Square Symbol
=
ds Fig.3-19 Dimension Origin Symbol.
one,
CH =
l FR “PS
u
+4 4, pt
a sl #2
3.2.14 Countersink Symbol
‘The symbolic means of indicating à counerink shall
bbeae shown in Fig. 3.16. The symbol shall ree, with
mo space, the dimensions of the countersink.
3345 Depth Symbol
The symbolic means of indicating that à dimen:
sion applies to the depth of a feature isto precede
{hat dimension with the depth symbol, as shown in
Fig. 317. The symbol and the value are not separated
by espace.
33.16 Square Symbol
The symbol means of indicating that single dimen
sion applies to à square shape shall be 19 precede
that dimension with the square symbol, as shown in
Figs. 3 and 3-18, The symbol and the ale shall nat
besepaated by a space
2347 Dimension Origin Symbol
‘The symbolic means of inating tata toleranced
¿dimension between two atures originates from ene
‘ofthese features and not the other shal be as shown in
Fige2531,and 419
3348 Taperand Slope Symbols
‘The symbolic means of indicating taper and slope for
coma and Hat tapers shall be as shown in ige 220
And 221. These symboeshallbeshown wih the vertical
Teg tothe let
3.3.19 All Around Symbol
The symbolic means of indicating that a profile to
eran applies to surfaces ll round the true profile
the view shoen isa re located atthe junction ofthe
leader fom the feature control frame. See Figs. 3-1,
229 and 812
e
Fig. 3-17- Depth Symbol
ze Po
OT 1. se
om Í 15.528. Square Symbol
=
ds Fig.3-19 Dimension Origin Symbol.
one,
CH =
l FR “PS
u
+4 4, pt
a sl #2
3.2.14 Countersink Symbol
‘The symbolic means of indicating à counerink shall
bbeae shown in Fig. 3.16. The symbol shall ree, with
mo space, the dimensions of the countersink.
3345 Depth Symbol
The symbolic means of indicating that à dimen:
sion applies to the depth of a feature isto precede
{hat dimension with the depth symbol, as shown in
Fig. 317. The symbol and the value are not separated
by espace.
33.16 Square Symbol
The symbol means of indicating that single dimen
sion applies to à square shape shall be 19 precede
that dimension with the square symbol, as shown in
Figs. 3 and 3-18, The symbol and the ale shall nat
besepaated by a space
2347 Dimension Origin Symbol
‘The symbolic means of inating tata toleranced
¿dimension between two atures originates from ene
‘ofthese features and not the other shal be as shown in
Fige2531,and 419
3348 Taperand Slope Symbols
‘The symbolic means of indicating taper and slope for
coma and Hat tapers shall be as shown in ige 220
And 221. These symboeshallbeshown wih the vertical
Teg tothe let
3.3.19 All Around Symbol
The symbolic means of indicating that a profile to
eran applies to surfaces ll round the true profile
the view shoen isa re located atthe junction ofthe
leader fom the feature control frame. See Figs. 3-1,
229 and 812
e
Fig.3-20. All Over and ll Around Symbols
Applications
PISTES manne
nn on
F8.3-22 Movable Datum Target Symbol Application
Ds
o
‘Soe ma
(3
Fig.3-21 Feature Control Frame With Fre State
Symbol
pra
Fee au om À
2220 Free-Stae Symbol
For features or datum feture references subject o
fecetate variation as find in para, 33, the sym
bolic means of indicating thatthe geomeirk tolerance
for datum feature applies in ts “free state” is shown in
Figs. 3-1 and 321. When te symbol i applied oa fol
vance in the feature contr! fame, it shall fll the
Ste toleran and any modifier, When the symbol is
Applied toa datum feature reference, hal flow that
“tu feature frene and any modifier
33.21 Tangent Plane Symbol
“The symbolic means of indicating a tangent plane
shall be as shown in Fig. 3-11 The symbol shall be
Placed inthe entre contol frame flowing the stated
tolerance as shown in Fig 6-18, Also, See paras. LAS
peral
33.22. Uneqully Disposed Profe Symbol
‘This symbol indicates» unilateral or unequally dis-
posed profe tolerance. The symbol shall be placed
Aie feature control fame fllowing the tolerance
vale as shown in Figs 31 and $1 though 53 and
pore 83.12.
3323 Continuous Feature Symbol
‘This symbol indicate a group of two or more inter
ped features a a single feature See Figs 23 tough
20 and 311 and pars 275.
3324 Independency Symbol
‘Thissymbol indicates that pers form ofa feature of
sizeat MMC orat LMC Is notrequired The symbol shall
“
sa]
be placed next tothe appropriate dimension or notation,
Sie Fig 3M and pars 272.
3225 AlLover Symbol
This symbol indicates that a profile tolerance or
her specification shall apply all ver the three-dimen-
Sonal profil ofa par, Se Figs. 311,320, and 88 and
para S36,
3326 Datum Translation Symbol
This symbol indicas that a datum feature simulator
Gs ot ned a it basic location and sal be fre to tans:
lat. See Figs el, 419, and 432, station (and
pora. 41110
3327 Movable Datum Target Symbol
This symbol indicates that a datum targets nat Bred
at location and is ret translate. Se Figs 322,
A7, and 49 and pars 4.246
33.28 Surface Texture Symbols
For information on the symbolic means of specifying
surface texture, see ASMEYIA36M.
3329 Symbols or Limits and Fs
For information on the symbolic means of specifying
met limits and fl ae pra. 221
133.30 Datum Reference Frame Symbol
‘The datum reference frame symbol shal consist of the
Xx, Y and Z coordinate labels applied to the axes ofthe
¿tum reference frame. Se ige 4-1 and 42.
3.4 FEATURE CONTROL FRAME SYMBOLS
Geometric characteristic symbol, the tolerance value,
modifie, and datum festure reference letter, where
Spplicable, ae combined in feature contol fame to
pres geometric tolerance.
Applications
PISTES manne
nn on
F8.3-22 Movable Datum Target Symbol Application
Ds
o
‘Soe ma
(3
Fig.3-21 Feature Control Frame With Fre State
Symbol
pra
Fee au om À
2220 Free-Stae Symbol
For features or datum feture references subject o
fecetate variation as find in para, 33, the sym
bolic means of indicating thatthe geomeirk tolerance
for datum feature applies in ts “free state” is shown in
Figs. 3-1 and 321. When te symbol i applied oa fol
vance in the feature contr! fame, it shall fll the
Ste toleran and any modifier, When the symbol is
Applied toa datum feature reference, hal flow that
“tu feature frene and any modifier
33.21 Tangent Plane Symbol
“The symbolic means of indicating a tangent plane
shall be as shown in Fig. 3-11 The symbol shall be
Placed inthe entre contol frame flowing the stated
tolerance as shown in Fig 6-18, Also, See paras. LAS
peral
33.22. Uneqully Disposed Profe Symbol
‘This symbol indicates» unilateral or unequally dis-
posed profe tolerance. The symbol shall be placed
Aie feature control fame fllowing the tolerance
vale as shown in Figs 31 and $1 though 53 and
pore 83.12.
3323 Continuous Feature Symbol
‘This symbol indicate a group of two or more inter
ped features a a single feature See Figs 23 tough
20 and 311 and pars 275.
3324 Independency Symbol
‘Thissymbol indicates that pers form ofa feature of
sizeat MMC orat LMC Is notrequired The symbol shall
“
sa]
be placed next tothe appropriate dimension or notation,
Sie Fig 3M and pars 272.
3225 AlLover Symbol
This symbol indicates that a profile tolerance or
her specification shall apply all ver the three-dimen-
Sonal profil ofa par, Se Figs. 311,320, and 88 and
para S36,
3326 Datum Translation Symbol
This symbol indicas that a datum feature simulator
Gs ot ned a it basic location and sal be fre to tans:
lat. See Figs el, 419, and 432, station (and
pora. 41110
3327 Movable Datum Target Symbol
This symbol indicates that a datum targets nat Bred
at location and is ret translate. Se Figs 322,
A7, and 49 and pars 4.246
33.28 Surface Texture Symbols
For information on the symbolic means of specifying
surface texture, see ASMEYIA36M.
3329 Symbols or Limits and Fs
For information on the symbolic means of specifying
met limits and fl ae pra. 221
133.30 Datum Reference Frame Symbol
‘The datum reference frame symbol shal consist of the
Xx, Y and Z coordinate labels applied to the axes ofthe
¿tum reference frame. Se ige 4-1 and 42.
3.4 FEATURE CONTROL FRAME SYMBOLS
Geometric characteristic symbol, the tolerance value,
modifie, and datum festure reference letter, where
Spplicable, ae combined in feature contol fame to
pres geometric tolerance.
Fig. 3-23 Feature Control Frame
Fig. 3-25. Order af Precedence of Datum Reference
om ape an
EI NE
game No CESR)
CN a
om ce
Era] rece \ vo
A aude cotton Era
— Bl om > |
‘rene end
Fig. 3-24. Feature Control Frame incorporating a NS
Datum Feature Reference
sal
ol tty Fig. 3-26 Multiple Feature Control Frames
as OSE)
zus + [gosolole ger
tn © Compa ze
| En
241 Feature Conta Frame sde
_Afstce contol mesa tangle divided int com OT sg seers =]
portent consinng ego ehanierticspmbol as]
followed by the trance vale or desmption, modi-
fiers, and any applicable datum feature references: See
Figs. 325,42, and 7-4 Where applicable, he tolerances
price by the diameter or spherical diameter symbol
End allowed by a material conten modifie.
3.42 Feature Control Frame incorporating One Datum
Feature Reference
‘Where a geometric tolerance eats toa datum, this
relationship is indicated by entering he datum feature
reference leer in à compariment following the oler
Ance: Where applicable, the datum feature reference
Jete i flood by a material boundary modifier See
ig 24 Where» datum is establishes by two oF more
datum features (eg an axis established by two datum
features) ll datum feature reference letters, separated
by a dash are entered in a single compartment. Where
applicable, each datum feature reference letter is fl
lowed by à material Boundary medie Se Figs. 325,
lation (9), and 425 and para. 4.122
343 Feature Control Frame incorporating Two or
‘Three Datum Feature References
Where more than one datum is required, the datum
feature reference eters (each followed by à material
6
boundary modi, where applicable) are entered in
separate compartments in Ihe desired order of prec
‘ence, rom lett right Soe Fig 3-25, llstraions (0)
nd (0. Datum feature reference letters need nt be in
pti oder in the feature contro fame.
3.44 Composite Feature Control Frame
A composite feature control frame contains a single
entry oft geometric characteristic symbol (poston or
role) followed by each tolerance and datum require
ment, one above the other Se Fg. $26, Mustration 0),
and paras 751 and 86,
3.45 Two Single Segment Feature Control Frames
Thesymboliomeansofrpeentingtwosingleseyment
feature contol frames shal be a6 shoven in Ti, 326,
station Application ofthis conta i described in
pora.752
3.46 Combined Feature Control Frame and Datum
Feature Symbol
Wher feature or pattern ol features controlled by a
oometric tolerance alo serves asa datum featur, the
Fig. 3-25. Order af Precedence of Datum Reference
om ape an
EI NE
game No CESR)
CN a
om ce
Era] rece \ vo
A aude cotton Era
— Bl om > |
‘rene end
Fig. 3-24. Feature Control Frame incorporating a NS
Datum Feature Reference
sal
ol tty Fig. 3-26 Multiple Feature Control Frames
as OSE)
zus + [gosolole ger
tn © Compa ze
| En
241 Feature Conta Frame sde
_Afstce contol mesa tangle divided int com OT sg seers =]
portent consinng ego ehanierticspmbol as]
followed by the trance vale or desmption, modi-
fiers, and any applicable datum feature references: See
Figs. 325,42, and 7-4 Where applicable, he tolerances
price by the diameter or spherical diameter symbol
End allowed by a material conten modifie.
3.42 Feature Control Frame incorporating One Datum
Feature Reference
‘Where a geometric tolerance eats toa datum, this
relationship is indicated by entering he datum feature
reference leer in à compariment following the oler
Ance: Where applicable, the datum feature reference
Jete i flood by a material boundary modifier See
ig 24 Where» datum is establishes by two oF more
datum features (eg an axis established by two datum
features) ll datum feature reference letters, separated
by a dash are entered in a single compartment. Where
applicable, each datum feature reference letter is fl
lowed by à material Boundary medie Se Figs. 325,
lation (9), and 425 and para. 4.122
343 Feature Control Frame incorporating Two or
‘Three Datum Feature References
Where more than one datum is required, the datum
feature reference eters (each followed by à material
6
boundary modi, where applicable) are entered in
separate compartments in Ihe desired order of prec
‘ence, rom lett right Soe Fig 3-25, llstraions (0)
nd (0. Datum feature reference letters need nt be in
pti oder in the feature contro fame.
3.44 Composite Feature Control Frame
A composite feature control frame contains a single
entry oft geometric characteristic symbol (poston or
role) followed by each tolerance and datum require
ment, one above the other Se Fg. $26, Mustration 0),
and paras 751 and 86,
3.45 Two Single Segment Feature Control Frames
Thesymboliomeansofrpeentingtwosingleseyment
feature contol frames shal be a6 shoven in Ti, 326,
station Application ofthis conta i described in
pora.752
3.46 Combined Feature Control Frame and Datum
Feature Symbol
Wher feature or pattern ol features controlled by a
oometric tolerance alo serves asa datum featur, the
Fig.3-27 Combined Feature Control Frame and
‘Datum Feature Symbol
Fig.3-28 Feature Control Frame With a Projected
Tolerance Zone Symbol
festure contol frame and datum feature symbol may be
eobined: The datum feature symbol may be attached
to the feature contol frame. Soe Fi, 327 In the pos
tinal tolerance example in Fig. 3-27, a feature ls con
ed or position in elation to datums À and B, and
demi as datum fstue €.
347 Feature Control Frame With a Projected
Tolerance Zone
Where a positions! or an orientation tolerance is
specific as a projected tolerance zone, he projected
tolerance zone symbol shall be placed inthe este
control rame, along withthe dimension indicating the
‘minimum eight of the tolerance zone, This shall flow
the tated tolerance and any modifier Se Figs 328 and
721. Where necessary for clarifica, the projected to
minimum height ofthe tolerance zone is speci in a
“raving view. The height dimension may then beomit-
ted rom te ete control frame See Fig. 7-2
35 FEATURE CONTROL FRAME PLACEMENT
A feature contol frame seated to considered fe
tureby one ofthe following methods and as depicted in
DE
Ta) locating the frame below or attache to a hader-
ected ote or dimension pertaining to the feature
Éerooonco) u
(9) attaching leader from the frame pointing to the
feature
Te) ataching a sie, corer, or an end ofthe frame to.
an extension ie rom the featur, provided its plane
race
a) atahing a sie, comer, or an end ofthe frame to
an extension of the dimension line pertaining toa ea
Faro ofi
e) placng in a not, chart, or th general tolerance
ok
Line ge mon a
cd lence a ort |
36. DEFINITION OF THE TOLERANCE ZONE
Where the specifi tolerance value represents the
diameter ofa cidre orspherca one, the diameter
‘orspherial diameter symbol shall precede the tolerance
‘ale Where he tolerance one sother than a diameter
{he diameter symbol shall be omitted, and the speci
tolerance valu represents the distance between par
allel stright ines orplanes or the distance boton bso
“uniform boundaries as thespecfic ase maybe Insome
ses the flerance zone ls nonuniform and is speed
‘Ss descbed in para. 832,
3.7 TABULATED TOLERANCES,
‘Wher the tolerance ina fsture contro ame i tabu:
lated Teter presenting the lerne, preceded by the
breton TOL, shal be entered as shown in Fg. 330.
‘Datum Feature Symbol
Fig.3-28 Feature Control Frame With a Projected
Tolerance Zone Symbol
festure contol frame and datum feature symbol may be
eobined: The datum feature symbol may be attached
to the feature contol frame. Soe Fi, 327 In the pos
tinal tolerance example in Fig. 3-27, a feature ls con
ed or position in elation to datums À and B, and
demi as datum fstue €.
347 Feature Control Frame With a Projected
Tolerance Zone
Where a positions! or an orientation tolerance is
specific as a projected tolerance zone, he projected
tolerance zone symbol shall be placed inthe este
control rame, along withthe dimension indicating the
‘minimum eight of the tolerance zone, This shall flow
the tated tolerance and any modifier Se Figs 328 and
721. Where necessary for clarifica, the projected to
minimum height ofthe tolerance zone is speci in a
“raving view. The height dimension may then beomit-
ted rom te ete control frame See Fig. 7-2
35 FEATURE CONTROL FRAME PLACEMENT
A feature contol frame seated to considered fe
tureby one ofthe following methods and as depicted in
DE
Ta) locating the frame below or attache to a hader-
ected ote or dimension pertaining to the feature
Éerooonco) u
(9) attaching leader from the frame pointing to the
feature
Te) ataching a sie, corer, or an end ofthe frame to.
an extension ie rom the featur, provided its plane
race
a) atahing a sie, comer, or an end ofthe frame to
an extension of the dimension line pertaining toa ea
Faro ofi
e) placng in a not, chart, or th general tolerance
ok
Line ge mon a
cd lence a ort |
36. DEFINITION OF THE TOLERANCE ZONE
Where the specifi tolerance value represents the
diameter ofa cidre orspherca one, the diameter
‘orspherial diameter symbol shall precede the tolerance
‘ale Where he tolerance one sother than a diameter
{he diameter symbol shall be omitted, and the speci
tolerance valu represents the distance between par
allel stright ines orplanes or the distance boton bso
“uniform boundaries as thespecfic ase maybe Insome
ses the flerance zone ls nonuniform and is speed
‘Ss descbed in para. 832,
3.7 TABULATED TOLERANCES,
‘Wher the tolerance ina fsture contro ame i tabu:
lated Teter presenting the lerne, preceded by the
breton TOL, shal be entered as shown in Fg. 330.
Section 4
Datum Reference Frames
A1 GENERAL
‘Ths Section establishes the principles of identiying
festes as datum features or etablshing relationships
impose by geometric tolerances and for onstsning
logres of rom. This Seton alo esas the cr
teria for etalshing datums and the datum reference
frame using datum feature simulator derived rom
datum features, Datums ae theoretically exact points,
bs ins, an planes. A datum reference ame & thee
‘mutually perpendicular interacting datum planes. Soe
Fig
Si en tet oe yee
A2 DEGREES OF FREEDOM
Al pats have sx degrees of freedom, three tana
tional and three rational, which may be constrained
Voy datum feature references in a feature contol fame
The three translational degrees of freedom ae termed
X.Y, amd Z. The Ihre rotational degrees freedom are
teem, and w See Figs tl 42 stration (9 42,
ilustation (and 42, station (0)
NOTE tthe means this porn ame gres in hs Sanda
te aaa and mora der fed a nett
Se TE DR cp
A3 DEGREES OF FREEDOM CONSTRAINED BY
PRIMARY DATUM FEATURES REGARDLESS OF
MATERIAL BOUNDARY
“The relationship between the primary datum feature
ants datum (stur simulator constrains the degrees
‘freedom according othe material boundary conde.
tion applied tothe datum feature inthe estare control
Frame. The datum fstre simulator rest he move
ment of the datum feature and establishes the datum)
‘So Fig. 43 for some examples of degrees of dem
constrained by primary datum features regardless of
‘material boundary (RMB). Although collections o fe
{ures may be used to establish a single datum, for sim
Ply, the chart in Fig 43 strate oly single datum.
features The degrees of freedom constrained depend en
‘wether the datum Kare sreleenced a a primary,
A secondary ora etary datum feature. See Figs 42,
448 and 4-12 Thefolowing primary datums are derived
rom theasocated datum feature Simulator
(a) splanar datum feature (nominal Ma) establishes
à datum feature simulator that creates 3 datum plane
and contains thee degres of from (one translation.
nd two rotations) See Fig. 43, station).
(0) a width ana datum ture (ovo oppose parallel
surfaces) establishes a datum feature simulator that
«rentes datum enter plane and constrains thre degrees
fof freedom (one translation and wo rotons). See
Fig 43 lation 0).
fo) à spherical datum feature establishes à datum
feature simulator that reste à datum center point and
‘onsrsne thre translational degrees of freedom. Soe
ig. 43 lustro (o
(a) a cylindrical datum feature establishes» datum
feature simulator that ccates à datum axis (line) and
nains four degrees of feedorn (wo translations
nd two atom) See Fi, 4, stration (),
(e) 3 conical shaped datum feature establishes à
atu festre simulator that rentes datum axis and
3 datum point and constains five degrees of freedom
(ee translations and two rotations). Se Fig 3 ae
sto)
{ps datum feature of linear extruded shape estab
tides datum feature simulator that te à datan
plane and datum axis and constrain five degrees
SE dom (vo translations and ihre rotations) Soe
Fig 43, ilustran (D.
19 a complex datum feature establishes a datum
feature simulator tht creates à datum plane, datum
oi and a datum axis and constrains sx yes of
Freer (Chr translations and tre rotations) Soe
ig illustration (9.
‘44 CONSTRAINING DEGREES OF FREEDOM OF
APART
Where datum features are referenced in feature con
trol frame, par contained rotation and tan
on relato the applicable datum feature small in
the specified onder of precedence with applicable modi
ers it establish the datum reference frame, This dines
the geometric relationships tht exis Between the geo.
‘etc tolerance zones and the datum reference fame
See Figs 42.45, 45, and 49. Datum feature simulators
fe sed to asocia the datum features nd the dts
‘This constrans the motion (degrees of feedom) between
he part and the associated datum reference rare
Datum Reference Frames
A1 GENERAL
‘Ths Section establishes the principles of identiying
festes as datum features or etablshing relationships
impose by geometric tolerances and for onstsning
logres of rom. This Seton alo esas the cr
teria for etalshing datums and the datum reference
frame using datum feature simulator derived rom
datum features, Datums ae theoretically exact points,
bs ins, an planes. A datum reference ame & thee
‘mutually perpendicular interacting datum planes. Soe
Fig
Si en tet oe yee
A2 DEGREES OF FREEDOM
Al pats have sx degrees of freedom, three tana
tional and three rational, which may be constrained
Voy datum feature references in a feature contol fame
The three translational degrees of freedom ae termed
X.Y, amd Z. The Ihre rotational degrees freedom are
teem, and w See Figs tl 42 stration (9 42,
ilustation (and 42, station (0)
NOTE tthe means this porn ame gres in hs Sanda
te aaa and mora der fed a nett
Se TE DR cp
A3 DEGREES OF FREEDOM CONSTRAINED BY
PRIMARY DATUM FEATURES REGARDLESS OF
MATERIAL BOUNDARY
“The relationship between the primary datum feature
ants datum (stur simulator constrains the degrees
‘freedom according othe material boundary conde.
tion applied tothe datum feature inthe estare control
Frame. The datum fstre simulator rest he move
ment of the datum feature and establishes the datum)
‘So Fig. 43 for some examples of degrees of dem
constrained by primary datum features regardless of
‘material boundary (RMB). Although collections o fe
{ures may be used to establish a single datum, for sim
Ply, the chart in Fig 43 strate oly single datum.
features The degrees of freedom constrained depend en
‘wether the datum Kare sreleenced a a primary,
A secondary ora etary datum feature. See Figs 42,
448 and 4-12 Thefolowing primary datums are derived
rom theasocated datum feature Simulator
(a) splanar datum feature (nominal Ma) establishes
à datum feature simulator that creates 3 datum plane
and contains thee degres of from (one translation.
nd two rotations) See Fig. 43, station).
(0) a width ana datum ture (ovo oppose parallel
surfaces) establishes a datum feature simulator that
«rentes datum enter plane and constrains thre degrees
fof freedom (one translation and wo rotons). See
Fig 43 lation 0).
fo) à spherical datum feature establishes à datum
feature simulator that reste à datum center point and
‘onsrsne thre translational degrees of freedom. Soe
ig. 43 lustro (o
(a) a cylindrical datum feature establishes» datum
feature simulator that ccates à datum axis (line) and
nains four degrees of feedorn (wo translations
nd two atom) See Fi, 4, stration (),
(e) 3 conical shaped datum feature establishes à
atu festre simulator that rentes datum axis and
3 datum point and constains five degrees of freedom
(ee translations and two rotations). Se Fig 3 ae
sto)
{ps datum feature of linear extruded shape estab
tides datum feature simulator that te à datan
plane and datum axis and constrain five degrees
SE dom (vo translations and ihre rotations) Soe
Fig 43, ilustran (D.
19 a complex datum feature establishes a datum
feature simulator tht creates à datum plane, datum
oi and a datum axis and constrains sx yes of
Freer (Chr translations and tre rotations) Soe
ig illustration (9.
‘44 CONSTRAINING DEGREES OF FREEDOM OF
APART
Where datum features are referenced in feature con
trol frame, par contained rotation and tan
on relato the applicable datum feature small in
the specified onder of precedence with applicable modi
ers it establish the datum reference frame, This dines
the geometric relationships tht exis Between the geo.
‘etc tolerance zones and the datum reference fame
See Figs 42.45, 45, and 49. Datum feature simulators
fe sed to asocia the datum features nd the dts
‘This constrans the motion (degrees of feedom) between
he part and the associated datum reference rare
Fig. 4-1 Datum Reference Frame
Fg.4-2 Sequence of Datum Features Relates Part to Datum Reference Frame
Fg.4-2 Sequence of Datum Features Relates Part to Datum Reference Frame
ce,
SORES OF FREEDOM
A
A | ve
SA.
FEATURE
2
On THE DRAWING
mr
ci
| Qa O
E ©
+9
‘compu
SORES OF FREEDOM
A
A | ve
SA.
FEATURE
2
On THE DRAWING
mr
ci
| Qa O
E ©
+9
‘compu
Fig. 446 Development ofa Datum Reference Frame or Part in Fig. 4-5
Fig. 47 Inclined Datum Features
“Lay 4
Le. À
ECTS asias
Ter a
En
— X Dumm
Fig. 47 Inclined Datum Features
“Lay 4
Le. À
ECTS asias
Ter a
En
— X Dumm
Fig. 4 Part With Cylindrcl Datum Feature
rr
ba OS
co _[einssfetas isn
‘hum ton an dt tur nalts ed ne
‘rein ag ningun arty pas
‘45 DATUM FEATURE SIMULATOR
A datum feature simulator, as defined in para 1317,
sl Ree inverse shape of he data etre unless oth
nie spied Soe Pg 410,611,412 413 and ei
45.4 Examples
Adatam tures
®
®
ss
lo
9
E
or may be one of the following
maximum material boundary (MMB)
‘east material boundary (LM)
An actual mating envelope
S minimum material envelope
tangent plane
datum targets)
S mthematkally defined contour
45.2 Requirements
Datum stur simulatrs shall have the following
requirements:
la) perfect form.
(0) Basic eienation relative to one another fr al he
dat references ina feature contr fame
e) base location relative o other datum entre sim-
lators for al the datum references in feature contro
ame, unless a translation modifier or movable datum
target symbol is specie. See Figs 49, 419 and 432,
trat (o)
(0 movable location when the translation mor
‘or the movable datum target symbol is specified. See
Figs 4-19, 432 illustration (), and 4-2.
lo) fed at the designated sz, hen MMB ce LB
specie.
"adjustable nai, when the datum fata applies
at RMB,
4.6 THEORETICAL AND PHYSICAL APPLICATION
(OF DATUM FEATURE SIMULATORS
‘Ths Standard defines engineering specifications re
tive to theoretical datums established from theoreti
datum feature simulators Inthe practical aplication,
‘measurements cannot be made from datas or datum
feature simulators which are theoretical, therefore sin
‘lated datums are established using physical datum
{cature simulators. For example, machine tables and
surface plates, though not true planes, are of such
{quality thatthe planes derived from them ate used 10
‘Sabla the simulated datums from which measure
‘ents are taken and dimensions veied. Se Fig +10.
‘Ako for example ring and plug pages, and mandrel,
though not true cylinders are of such quality that
their ayes ae used as simulated datums from which
‘measurements are taken and dimensions verified, See
Figs. 4-1 and 4-12, When magnfid surfaces of mani
factured parts are seen o have iregularits, contact
is made with a datum feature simulator at a number
of Surface extremities or high points. The principles in
thie Standard are based on theoretical datum feature
Simulatrs and do not ake into account any tolerances
‘or error inthe physical datum feature simulators, See
ASME VILE.
7 DATUM REFERENCE FRAME
‘Sufficient datum features or designated portions of
these features are chosen 10 position the pat in ear
ton o à st of threw mutually perpendicular planes,
joint called 9 datum reference frame. This reference
frame exists in theory only and not on the par. See
Fig 41. Therefore, it is necessary 10 establish a method
of simulating the theoretical reference frame fom the
cha features ofthe part In pact, the features a
Ssocited with physical or mathematical elements
s
rr
ba OS
co _[einssfetas isn
‘hum ton an dt tur nalts ed ne
‘rein ag ningun arty pas
‘45 DATUM FEATURE SIMULATOR
A datum feature simulator, as defined in para 1317,
sl Ree inverse shape of he data etre unless oth
nie spied Soe Pg 410,611,412 413 and ei
45.4 Examples
Adatam tures
®
®
ss
lo
9
E
or may be one of the following
maximum material boundary (MMB)
‘east material boundary (LM)
An actual mating envelope
S minimum material envelope
tangent plane
datum targets)
S mthematkally defined contour
45.2 Requirements
Datum stur simulatrs shall have the following
requirements:
la) perfect form.
(0) Basic eienation relative to one another fr al he
dat references ina feature contr fame
e) base location relative o other datum entre sim-
lators for al the datum references in feature contro
ame, unless a translation modifier or movable datum
target symbol is specie. See Figs 49, 419 and 432,
trat (o)
(0 movable location when the translation mor
‘or the movable datum target symbol is specified. See
Figs 4-19, 432 illustration (), and 4-2.
lo) fed at the designated sz, hen MMB ce LB
specie.
"adjustable nai, when the datum fata applies
at RMB,
4.6 THEORETICAL AND PHYSICAL APPLICATION
(OF DATUM FEATURE SIMULATORS
‘Ths Standard defines engineering specifications re
tive to theoretical datums established from theoreti
datum feature simulators Inthe practical aplication,
‘measurements cannot be made from datas or datum
feature simulators which are theoretical, therefore sin
‘lated datums are established using physical datum
{cature simulators. For example, machine tables and
surface plates, though not true planes, are of such
{quality thatthe planes derived from them ate used 10
‘Sabla the simulated datums from which measure
‘ents are taken and dimensions veied. Se Fig +10.
‘Ako for example ring and plug pages, and mandrel,
though not true cylinders are of such quality that
their ayes ae used as simulated datums from which
‘measurements are taken and dimensions verified, See
Figs. 4-1 and 4-12, When magnfid surfaces of mani
factured parts are seen o have iregularits, contact
is made with a datum feature simulator at a number
of Surface extremities or high points. The principles in
thie Standard are based on theoretical datum feature
Simulatrs and do not ake into account any tolerances
‘or error inthe physical datum feature simulators, See
ASME VILE.
7 DATUM REFERENCE FRAME
‘Sufficient datum features or designated portions of
these features are chosen 10 position the pat in ear
ton o à st of threw mutually perpendicular planes,
joint called 9 datum reference frame. This reference
frame exists in theory only and not on the par. See
Fig 41. Therefore, it is necessary 10 establish a method
of simulating the theoretical reference frame fom the
cha features ofthe part In pact, the features a
Ssocited with physical or mathematical elements
s
Fig.49 Development ofa Datum Reference Frame
is oe Sire
ses
Cala)
®
Pen)
CSN
agent
CESSE)
ses?
GES IS)
©
is oe Sire
ses
Cala)
®
Pen)
CSN
agent
CESSE)
ses?
GES IS)
©
Fig. 4-10. Datum Plane Establishment
Ths on he am
EEE
Eur Datum pane A (Macadam otro sire of don ese A)
| Datum eno A
N Fra am tt sm |
en
of monet er
‘Pane sacred mn be +
Pr coum feature St)
Wongien & datum fat tr ont
Fig. 4-11 Establishment of Datums — For EstenalCJindial Feature — RMB
Tis ob dm
Ths on he am
EEE
Eur Datum pane A (Macadam otro sire of don ese A)
| Datum eno A
N Fra am tt sm |
en
of monet er
‘Pane sacred mn be +
Pr coum feature St)
Wongien & datum fat tr ont
Fig. 4-11 Establishment of Datums — For EstenalCJindial Feature — RMB
Tis ob dm
Fig. 416 Establishment of Datums — For Internal Datum Width — RMB
Or
de
NN
A
that simulate the datum feature simulators in à ste
‘onder of precedence and according to applicable mod
"ers Tht constrains the applic degrees of freedom
between the port and the soc datum reference
frame, See Fig.42,45,46.47,and 4
7.4 Mutually Perpendicular Planes
"The planes fte datum reference famearesimulatadin
‘mutually perpendicular reatonshipto provide dicton
Sswelastheonginfor related dimensions Thus when the
Parti ponte rate tothe datum reference rame (by
onc tein cach data etre and scounteportin
the associated prcesing equipment, dimensions relate
tothe datum erence frame y a feature control frame or
‘ote are asc late, This theoreti ofrece Fame.
ttes the res plane dimensioning ste med or
imensoringand racing
4.72. Number of Datum Reference Frames
In some cases. single datum reference frame wi su
fice In the, atonal datum reference frames may
bbenectsary where physlcal separation o the funcional
‘elton of fates requires hat diferent datum rf
‘rence lame be applied. In uch case, cach are cn
tel fame must contin the dtum estare ferences hat
are applicable Any difference inthe onde of precedence
‘rin the materia boundary of any datum features refer
Sneninmultpk feature control frames requires diferent
tum simulation methods and, consequent establishes
‘diferent datum reference frame. See ig, 4.
A8 DATUM FEATURES.
A datum feature is selected on the basis of its
functional relationship tothe toleranced feature and
the requirements of the design. See Figs. 43, db,
36,437, and 4-8, To ensure proper assembly, core.
sponding interfacing features of mating parts should
be selected as datum features. However, a datum
feature should be accessible on the part and of sut
ficient size to permit its use. Datum features must be
readily discernible onthe part. Therefore, in the case
Of symmetrial parts or pars with identical features,
Physical identification ofthe datum feature on the
pat may be necessary
48.1 Temporary and Permanent Datum Features
Feature fin procs ports such as castings forgings,
machining, or fabrications may be used as temporary
datum features to create permanent datum features.
Such temporary datum features may or may not be sub-
sequently removed by machining, Permanent datum
features shouldbe surfaces r iameten not appreciably
hanged by subsequent processing operations
4.82 Datum Feature Identification
Datum features are identified on the drawing by
means of a datum feature symbol See Fig 32, 33,
And 34. The datum feature symbol identifies physical
features and shal mot be applied to centr lines, center
planes oraxes
Or
de
NN
A
that simulate the datum feature simulators in à ste
‘onder of precedence and according to applicable mod
"ers Tht constrains the applic degrees of freedom
between the port and the soc datum reference
frame, See Fig.42,45,46.47,and 4
7.4 Mutually Perpendicular Planes
"The planes fte datum reference famearesimulatadin
‘mutually perpendicular reatonshipto provide dicton
Sswelastheonginfor related dimensions Thus when the
Parti ponte rate tothe datum reference rame (by
onc tein cach data etre and scounteportin
the associated prcesing equipment, dimensions relate
tothe datum erence frame y a feature control frame or
‘ote are asc late, This theoreti ofrece Fame.
ttes the res plane dimensioning ste med or
imensoringand racing
4.72. Number of Datum Reference Frames
In some cases. single datum reference frame wi su
fice In the, atonal datum reference frames may
bbenectsary where physlcal separation o the funcional
‘elton of fates requires hat diferent datum rf
‘rence lame be applied. In uch case, cach are cn
tel fame must contin the dtum estare ferences hat
are applicable Any difference inthe onde of precedence
‘rin the materia boundary of any datum features refer
Sneninmultpk feature control frames requires diferent
tum simulation methods and, consequent establishes
‘diferent datum reference frame. See ig, 4.
A8 DATUM FEATURES.
A datum feature is selected on the basis of its
functional relationship tothe toleranced feature and
the requirements of the design. See Figs. 43, db,
36,437, and 4-8, To ensure proper assembly, core.
sponding interfacing features of mating parts should
be selected as datum features. However, a datum
feature should be accessible on the part and of sut
ficient size to permit its use. Datum features must be
readily discernible onthe part. Therefore, in the case
Of symmetrial parts or pars with identical features,
Physical identification ofthe datum feature on the
pat may be necessary
48.1 Temporary and Permanent Datum Features
Feature fin procs ports such as castings forgings,
machining, or fabrications may be used as temporary
datum features to create permanent datum features.
Such temporary datum features may or may not be sub-
sequently removed by machining, Permanent datum
features shouldbe surfaces r iameten not appreciably
hanged by subsequent processing operations
4.82 Datum Feature Identification
Datum features are identified on the drawing by
means of a datum feature symbol See Fig 32, 33,
And 34. The datum feature symbol identifies physical
features and shal mot be applied to centr lines, center
planes oraxes
A9 DATUM FEATURE CONTROLS
Geometric tolerances reat to a datum reference
frame do nt take into account any variations in fom,
frentaton, or location ofthe datum features. Datum
features shall be controlled diri by applying appro.
priate geometric tolerances o indirectly by dimensions
cha thesize of primary datum feature of size This
in um makes i possible tocaelate the dam ture
simulator boundaries of each datum feature in a datum
reference frame. The relationships between datum fos
tures tobe considers are the
(a) formol te primary datum feature(s) (se Figs. 42
and 45) and/or the locaton between features ina pat
tern used 10 Sub the primary datum. See Figs 224
and 425.
(by secondary datum features‘ orientation and/or
location a apple to higher precadence datums. Soe
ge 42, 45,425 and 430,
(0) tetany datum features orientation and/or oc
tion to higher precedence datums as appliabl. See
Figs. 2and ds
‘430 SPECIFYING DATUM FEATURES IN AN ORDER
‘OF PRECEDENCE
Datum fsturs must be spf in an order of pro
‘dence to positon a part properly lave to the datum
Feference frame, Figure #2 iustates apart where the
‘datum features are planar surfaces, The desired order
‘of precedence indicated by entering the appropiate
datum feature reference eter, rom Lf to pt, the
feature contol frame,
10.1 Development ofa Datum Reference Frame for
Parts With Planar Surface Datum Features
“The feature control fame in Fig, 42 illustrates the
datum reference fame for the pat shown in its fun
tonal assembly in Fg. 42, istration (I. Figure 42
its the development of the datum reference
Frame along with ders of freedom. The datum fe
tures reference in the feature conta frame immobilize
the part and cnstain the six degrees of feedom (thre
translations and three rations) o establish à datum
reference frame. Relating à part Lo a datum fate
Simulator and à datum referee frame in this man
er ensures consistent understanding ol enginceing
‘requirements Se Fig 4
(a) ln Fig, 42 illustration (a), datum feature D is
spied asthe primary datum feature, Where surface
‘specified a a datum feature, the high pint) on the
surface «tabla datum plane. This primary datum
feature contacts the datum fate simulator on a min
mum of the point ( par, 4.112 or discussion on
rockin or unable datum featur) In this cumple,
‘wher the primary datum feature contacts the datum
feature simulator thre degrees freedom (one trans
tion nd to rotation) ae constrained: rotation about
the Xai (a, rotation about the Yani (0), and tare
Fiona the Z rection
0) Datum feature Eis species thesecondary datum
feature This ture contacts he dat feature simulator
at à minimum of two pois. See ig. 42, tration (D.
In is example, where the secondary dam feature com
ac is datum future smut two dees dom
{one translation and oe ration) ae contain ans:
ton nthe X irc and rotation about the Zi ()
16) Datum feature Fis specified as the tertiary datum
feature. See Fg. 42, lustaton (0). ln this cumple
‘sere the tertiary datum fate conte i dam e
ture simulator sta minimum of one pin, the remain.
ing degree of rom is constrained ranlaio in the
Yoiretion.
402 Parts With Inclined Datum Features
For parts with inclined datum features as shown in
Fig. 7,2 datum feature simulator plane is oriented
at the basic angle of the datum feature. The corre-
ponding plane ofthe datum reference frame passes
through the vertex ofthe basic angle and ls mutually
perpendicular to the oer two planes.
103 Parts With Gindrcal Datum Features
‘The datum of» cylindrical datum feature is the axis
ofthe datum feature simulator This ans serves a the
‘gin or relationship defined by goometr tolerance.
See Figs 48 411,and412.A primary cylindrical datum
Festa is always ala with two theoretical planes
interwetingstrightanglesonthedatumauk Depending
on the number of planes established by higher prove:
‘dence datums, secondary and tertiary datum axes may
(Stall zero, one or two theoretical planes
41031 Cplnérical Datum Feature, Figure ills:
sa pat having aylindrica datum feature. Primary
at feature Kelte the prt othe fist datum plane.
Since secondary datum future M is cyindrcl, iis
associated with two theoreti panes, Ah second and
und in a theceplane relationship
410.32 Datum xs and Two Planes. The wo theo-
retical planes are represented on drawing by center
lines crossing at ight angles, as in Fig. 48, titration
(a) The intersection of these planes coinckes with the
atar axis See Fig 48, tation (). Once estab-
lished, the datum 3x6 comes the origin for elated
inersions
41033 Orientation of Two Planes. The orient.
tion ofthe second and tir planes ofthe datum rte
fence Frame in Fig. 48 6 not speiid, as tation of the
Geometric tolerances reat to a datum reference
frame do nt take into account any variations in fom,
frentaton, or location ofthe datum features. Datum
features shall be controlled diri by applying appro.
priate geometric tolerances o indirectly by dimensions
cha thesize of primary datum feature of size This
in um makes i possible tocaelate the dam ture
simulator boundaries of each datum feature in a datum
reference frame. The relationships between datum fos
tures tobe considers are the
(a) formol te primary datum feature(s) (se Figs. 42
and 45) and/or the locaton between features ina pat
tern used 10 Sub the primary datum. See Figs 224
and 425.
(by secondary datum features‘ orientation and/or
location a apple to higher precadence datums. Soe
ge 42, 45,425 and 430,
(0) tetany datum features orientation and/or oc
tion to higher precedence datums as appliabl. See
Figs. 2and ds
‘430 SPECIFYING DATUM FEATURES IN AN ORDER
‘OF PRECEDENCE
Datum fsturs must be spf in an order of pro
‘dence to positon a part properly lave to the datum
Feference frame, Figure #2 iustates apart where the
‘datum features are planar surfaces, The desired order
‘of precedence indicated by entering the appropiate
datum feature reference eter, rom Lf to pt, the
feature contol frame,
10.1 Development ofa Datum Reference Frame for
Parts With Planar Surface Datum Features
“The feature control fame in Fig, 42 illustrates the
datum reference fame for the pat shown in its fun
tonal assembly in Fg. 42, istration (I. Figure 42
its the development of the datum reference
Frame along with ders of freedom. The datum fe
tures reference in the feature conta frame immobilize
the part and cnstain the six degrees of feedom (thre
translations and three rations) o establish à datum
reference frame. Relating à part Lo a datum fate
Simulator and à datum referee frame in this man
er ensures consistent understanding ol enginceing
‘requirements Se Fig 4
(a) ln Fig, 42 illustration (a), datum feature D is
spied asthe primary datum feature, Where surface
‘specified a a datum feature, the high pint) on the
surface «tabla datum plane. This primary datum
feature contacts the datum fate simulator on a min
mum of the point ( par, 4.112 or discussion on
rockin or unable datum featur) In this cumple,
‘wher the primary datum feature contacts the datum
feature simulator thre degrees freedom (one trans
tion nd to rotation) ae constrained: rotation about
the Xai (a, rotation about the Yani (0), and tare
Fiona the Z rection
0) Datum feature Eis species thesecondary datum
feature This ture contacts he dat feature simulator
at à minimum of two pois. See ig. 42, tration (D.
In is example, where the secondary dam feature com
ac is datum future smut two dees dom
{one translation and oe ration) ae contain ans:
ton nthe X irc and rotation about the Zi ()
16) Datum feature Fis specified as the tertiary datum
feature. See Fg. 42, lustaton (0). ln this cumple
‘sere the tertiary datum fate conte i dam e
ture simulator sta minimum of one pin, the remain.
ing degree of rom is constrained ranlaio in the
Yoiretion.
402 Parts With Inclined Datum Features
For parts with inclined datum features as shown in
Fig. 7,2 datum feature simulator plane is oriented
at the basic angle of the datum feature. The corre-
ponding plane ofthe datum reference frame passes
through the vertex ofthe basic angle and ls mutually
perpendicular to the oer two planes.
103 Parts With Gindrcal Datum Features
‘The datum of» cylindrical datum feature is the axis
ofthe datum feature simulator This ans serves a the
‘gin or relationship defined by goometr tolerance.
See Figs 48 411,and412.A primary cylindrical datum
Festa is always ala with two theoretical planes
interwetingstrightanglesonthedatumauk Depending
on the number of planes established by higher prove:
‘dence datums, secondary and tertiary datum axes may
(Stall zero, one or two theoretical planes
41031 Cplnérical Datum Feature, Figure ills:
sa pat having aylindrica datum feature. Primary
at feature Kelte the prt othe fist datum plane.
Since secondary datum future M is cyindrcl, iis
associated with two theoreti panes, Ah second and
und in a theceplane relationship
410.32 Datum xs and Two Planes. The wo theo-
retical planes are represented on drawing by center
lines crossing at ight angles, as in Fig. 48, titration
(a) The intersection of these planes coinckes with the
atar axis See Fig 48, tation (). Once estab-
lished, the datum 3x6 comes the origin for elated
inersions
41033 Orientation of Two Planes. The orient.
tion ofthe second and tir planes ofthe datum rte
fence Frame in Fig. 48 6 not speiid, as tation of the
pattern of holes about the datum ais has no fect on
{he function of the part In such cases, only two datum
features ar reference inthe feature con fam:
la) primary datum feature K, ich establishes à
dam plano
10) secondary datum feature M, which establishes à
datum ais perpendicular fo datum plane K
4104 Constraning Rotational Degrees of Freedom.
To constrain the rotational degree of freedom of two.
planes about a datum ais a lower precedente datum
Feature referenced in he Kate control frame. Soe
para 46.
la) Figure 45 illustrates the constraint of the roto
tional degree of fedom of the fro planes intersting
hough the secondary datum feature B, established
by the center plane of the tertiary datum feature C-
Figure 4: ülstates the development ofthe datum
reference fame forthe positional tolerance ofthe three
holes in Fig 45
0) Figure 49 illustrates the constraint of the rota
sional doe offre of the eo planes intersecting
through the secondary datum feature B. Constraint i
Stable bythe tertory datum feature C.
(© Figures 429 through 431 illustrate the con
straint of the rotational degree of freedom of the
two planes intersecting through datum feature A.
Constraints established by datum feature
4.11 ESTABLISHING DATUMS
‘Te following paragraphs define thecriteri for tb
ishing atu foe datum Feats
411.1 Plane Surfaces as Datum Features
‘Where a nominally lat surface especias datum
feature, the corespending datum feature simulator is
à plone canting points ofthat surface See Fig +10
‘The number of pints contacted by the datum feature
simulator depends on whether thesurtace sa primar.
Secondary, oF fertiary datum feature See pat. 4101
4.11.2 Irregulartieson Datum Features
1 imegulaiies on datum feature ape such tha he
partisunstable thats rocks) when brought into con
fact with the corresponding datum feature simulator
the default stbilzaion procedure per the candidate
datum set as outlined in ASME V4 3M. à diferent
procedure desired (Chebyehes, east squares, tala
tional least squares, ic), it must be specie.
4.113 Effect of Material Boundary Modifiers Applied
Lo Datum Feature References
MMB, LAB, and RMB conditions may be spplic4/
Ampli o any datum feature reference in à feature
contol frame. Modifiers applicable to datum features
Internen ina este conta frame wl affect the ea
onship ofthe par o Ihe datum reference fame See
Figs + and 42,
1.11. Speciÿing Datum Features RMB.
Where a datum feature is referenced at RMB in
feature control frame, the datum feature simul
{or geometry originaes at the MMB and progresses
proportionally vough the tolerance zone to make
‘maximum possible contact with he extremities ofthe
‘datum feature or collection of features If another
{ing routines required, isha estate on the raw
ing Asa proctial example, machine element that is
Variable (such as a chuck, mandre, vse, or centering
‘vce suse to simulate a datum feature simulator
‘ofthe feature and to establish the simulated datum.
(a) Primary Datu Feature Dieter RMB The datum
{isthe anf the datum feature simulator ofthe datum
feature. The datum feature Simulator (or unreal
actual mating envelope) i the smallest cecumecrbe
(lor an extemal Festi) or largest inserod (or an
internal fate) perfect cylinder that makes maximum
possible contact with the datum feature surface. See
Figs 43 station (8); 411 and 4:12.
9) Primary Datum Fara: WU RMB, The datum is
he center plane of Ihe datum feature simulator ol he
datum feature. The datum feature simulator (or une
late actual mating envelope) is two parallel planes at
minimum separation (or an external future) or ma
mum separation (for an intemal fate) that makes
maximum possible contas with the comsponding sur.
Faces fe datum feature Se Figs 43, Nustration (0)
#iand Eh.
1) Primary Datum Feature Sphere RMB. The datums
he center point ofthe datum feature simulator ofthe
datum feature. The datum feature simulator (or un
late actual mating envelope) & the smallest circum
scribed for an external feature) or largest inscribed (or
An internal feature) perfect sphere that make maximum
possible contact with the datum feature surface. Soe
Fig. 43 lastra (0)
Ta) Secondary Datum Future RMB: Diameter or With,
For both extemal and internal features, the secondary
datum (xi or center plane s established in the same
‘manner as indicated in subparas () and () above with
an additional repirement The theoretical finder or
parallel planes ofthe datum feature simulator must be
‘rented and/or locate tothe primary datum features
‘Satur feature simultor: Datum feature in Fi,
luttes this principle for diameters, and Fig, 42,
ilustaton (a) stats the same principe for widths.
In Fig, 432, ilastration a). secondary datum feature
smubtor at RMB expands and makes maximum pos
She contact constraining al possible remaining degrees
fof freedom, tor the tertiary datum future simulator
{allowed to expand
{he function of the part In such cases, only two datum
features ar reference inthe feature con fam:
la) primary datum feature K, ich establishes à
dam plano
10) secondary datum feature M, which establishes à
datum ais perpendicular fo datum plane K
4104 Constraning Rotational Degrees of Freedom.
To constrain the rotational degree of freedom of two.
planes about a datum ais a lower precedente datum
Feature referenced in he Kate control frame. Soe
para 46.
la) Figure 45 illustrates the constraint of the roto
tional degree of fedom of the fro planes intersting
hough the secondary datum feature B, established
by the center plane of the tertiary datum feature C-
Figure 4: ülstates the development ofthe datum
reference fame forthe positional tolerance ofthe three
holes in Fig 45
0) Figure 49 illustrates the constraint of the rota
sional doe offre of the eo planes intersecting
through the secondary datum feature B. Constraint i
Stable bythe tertory datum feature C.
(© Figures 429 through 431 illustrate the con
straint of the rotational degree of freedom of the
two planes intersecting through datum feature A.
Constraints established by datum feature
4.11 ESTABLISHING DATUMS
‘Te following paragraphs define thecriteri for tb
ishing atu foe datum Feats
411.1 Plane Surfaces as Datum Features
‘Where a nominally lat surface especias datum
feature, the corespending datum feature simulator is
à plone canting points ofthat surface See Fig +10
‘The number of pints contacted by the datum feature
simulator depends on whether thesurtace sa primar.
Secondary, oF fertiary datum feature See pat. 4101
4.11.2 Irregulartieson Datum Features
1 imegulaiies on datum feature ape such tha he
partisunstable thats rocks) when brought into con
fact with the corresponding datum feature simulator
the default stbilzaion procedure per the candidate
datum set as outlined in ASME V4 3M. à diferent
procedure desired (Chebyehes, east squares, tala
tional least squares, ic), it must be specie.
4.113 Effect of Material Boundary Modifiers Applied
Lo Datum Feature References
MMB, LAB, and RMB conditions may be spplic4/
Ampli o any datum feature reference in à feature
contol frame. Modifiers applicable to datum features
Internen ina este conta frame wl affect the ea
onship ofthe par o Ihe datum reference fame See
Figs + and 42,
1.11. Speciÿing Datum Features RMB.
Where a datum feature is referenced at RMB in
feature control frame, the datum feature simul
{or geometry originaes at the MMB and progresses
proportionally vough the tolerance zone to make
‘maximum possible contact with he extremities ofthe
‘datum feature or collection of features If another
{ing routines required, isha estate on the raw
ing Asa proctial example, machine element that is
Variable (such as a chuck, mandre, vse, or centering
‘vce suse to simulate a datum feature simulator
‘ofthe feature and to establish the simulated datum.
(a) Primary Datu Feature Dieter RMB The datum
{isthe anf the datum feature simulator ofthe datum
feature. The datum feature Simulator (or unreal
actual mating envelope) i the smallest cecumecrbe
(lor an extemal Festi) or largest inserod (or an
internal fate) perfect cylinder that makes maximum
possible contact with the datum feature surface. See
Figs 43 station (8); 411 and 4:12.
9) Primary Datum Fara: WU RMB, The datum is
he center plane of Ihe datum feature simulator ol he
datum feature. The datum feature simulator (or une
late actual mating envelope) is two parallel planes at
minimum separation (or an external future) or ma
mum separation (for an intemal fate) that makes
maximum possible contas with the comsponding sur.
Faces fe datum feature Se Figs 43, Nustration (0)
#iand Eh.
1) Primary Datum Feature Sphere RMB. The datums
he center point ofthe datum feature simulator ofthe
datum feature. The datum feature simulator (or un
late actual mating envelope) & the smallest circum
scribed for an external feature) or largest inscribed (or
An internal feature) perfect sphere that make maximum
possible contact with the datum feature surface. Soe
Fig. 43 lastra (0)
Ta) Secondary Datum Future RMB: Diameter or With,
For both extemal and internal features, the secondary
datum (xi or center plane s established in the same
‘manner as indicated in subparas () and () above with
an additional repirement The theoretical finder or
parallel planes ofthe datum feature simulator must be
‘rented and/or locate tothe primary datum features
‘Satur feature simultor: Datum feature in Fi,
luttes this principle for diameters, and Fig, 42,
ilustaton (a) stats the same principe for widths.
In Fig, 432, ilastration a). secondary datum feature
smubtor at RMB expands and makes maximum pos
She contact constraining al possible remaining degrees
fof freedom, tor the tertiary datum future simulator
{allowed to expand
Fig 45 Secondary and Ter
lary Datum Features — RMB.
mann Lx
e205
[2000]
guess
axgr7-8s
ge
= aa a
Daten x 8
(Capel raced einer panda o
à San pars A
BRETON) :
ce m | EA
Lose
[7%
tee sean
ae À
2:
(o) Tray Datu stare: Dieter or With RMB For
both extemal and intemal features, the teta datum
(Gis or center plane) & bled in Ihe same manner
18 indicated in subpora. (a) above with an atonal
‘avirement the Boril lider or parallel planes
fof the datum tar simulator must be erento and/or
Treated both the primary and secondary datum features
tum fstresmulatrs, The erry damn feature muy
ot tothe dam and as in ig +-15oroffet fon
plane ofthe datum reference frame Figure #9 strates
thesame principle fora diameter
{fSeondary and Terr Datum Feature: Sphere RMB.
The secondary or teary datum (enter pin) is es
lished in the same manner as fated in subpar
(0) above, except thatthe center point is oat relative
10 higher precedence datums.
(8) Seondeyand Terry SufceRMB.Wbereihedatum
feature (secondary o terry) s surface, RMB applied
tothe datum etre require datum feature simulator
A0 expand, contract, or progres normal othe tae pro
(be fate from ts IMB fo ts LM unt the datum
feature simulator makes maximum posse contact with
the extremities ofthe datum feature while spacing the
higher presence dotumts) So ia 429, tation a
430 lation (and 431, sation).
11.5 Speciing Datum Features at MMB
Where MMB applied oa datum feature referenced
ina feature control rameitesbllhesthedatum fate
simulator of the appropiate boundary. The appropriate
boundary i determined by is collective effects of sie,
and any appliable geomet tolerances relative to any
higher precedence datums. As a pracical eample,
where 3 datum Kature is applied Om an MMB basi,
‘machine and gaging element inthe processing equip
‘ent that remain constant may be used 10 simulate à
‘datum feature simulator of the feature and to estat
lsh the simulated datum. To determine the applicable
boundary, separa 4.116.
11.6 Determining Size of Datum Feature Simulators
Exit
An analysis of geometrie tolerances applied to à
‚datum feature i necessary in determining the size of
its datum feature simulator A feature of size o pattem
of features of size serving a datum feature may have
Several MMB, These include the MMC of dat eae
ture of size o te collective ect of MMC and peo.
mati tolerances Datum kature prestence shall be
respected, except in the ase of a customized datum
rence frame See para. 422. Therefore, the appropr
e MMD fr determining the sizeof the datum feature
Simulator oran
(a) interna datum fstur of sizes the largest MMB
hat the datum feta) of size will contain while
respect the datum feature precedence.
70) external feature of size is the smallest MMB that
illeotain the datum feature ofsize while respecting
the datum feature precedence See Fig +16 for examples
of eakeulting the sizeof MMB.
lary Datum Features — RMB.
mann Lx
e205
[2000]
guess
axgr7-8s
ge
= aa a
Daten x 8
(Capel raced einer panda o
à San pars A
BRETON) :
ce m | EA
Lose
[7%
tee sean
ae À
2:
(o) Tray Datu stare: Dieter or With RMB For
both extemal and intemal features, the teta datum
(Gis or center plane) & bled in Ihe same manner
18 indicated in subpora. (a) above with an atonal
‘avirement the Boril lider or parallel planes
fof the datum tar simulator must be erento and/or
Treated both the primary and secondary datum features
tum fstresmulatrs, The erry damn feature muy
ot tothe dam and as in ig +-15oroffet fon
plane ofthe datum reference frame Figure #9 strates
thesame principle fora diameter
{fSeondary and Terr Datum Feature: Sphere RMB.
The secondary or teary datum (enter pin) is es
lished in the same manner as fated in subpar
(0) above, except thatthe center point is oat relative
10 higher precedence datums.
(8) Seondeyand Terry SufceRMB.Wbereihedatum
feature (secondary o terry) s surface, RMB applied
tothe datum etre require datum feature simulator
A0 expand, contract, or progres normal othe tae pro
(be fate from ts IMB fo ts LM unt the datum
feature simulator makes maximum posse contact with
the extremities ofthe datum feature while spacing the
higher presence dotumts) So ia 429, tation a
430 lation (and 431, sation).
11.5 Speciing Datum Features at MMB
Where MMB applied oa datum feature referenced
ina feature control rameitesbllhesthedatum fate
simulator of the appropiate boundary. The appropriate
boundary i determined by is collective effects of sie,
and any appliable geomet tolerances relative to any
higher precedence datums. As a pracical eample,
where 3 datum Kature is applied Om an MMB basi,
‘machine and gaging element inthe processing equip
‘ent that remain constant may be used 10 simulate à
‘datum feature simulator of the feature and to estat
lsh the simulated datum. To determine the applicable
boundary, separa 4.116.
11.6 Determining Size of Datum Feature Simulators
Exit
An analysis of geometrie tolerances applied to à
‚datum feature i necessary in determining the size of
its datum feature simulator A feature of size o pattem
of features of size serving a datum feature may have
Several MMB, These include the MMC of dat eae
ture of size o te collective ect of MMC and peo.
mati tolerances Datum kature prestence shall be
respected, except in the ase of a customized datum
rence frame See para. 422. Therefore, the appropr
e MMD fr determining the sizeof the datum feature
Simulator oran
(a) interna datum fstur of sizes the largest MMB
hat the datum feta) of size will contain while
respect the datum feature precedence.
70) external feature of size is the smallest MMB that
illeotain the datum feature ofsize while respecting
the datum feature precedence See Fig +16 for examples
of eakeulting the sizeof MMB.
Fig.4-16. Example Calculation
ns of Maximum Material Boundary
GE
Es
[Gua]
weten Larios
2 [sua] [SOIED)
MAGO
ont] some coro | Minn Mata Bunda |
@ 7
O DEC
© ETE
4.11641 Determining the Correct Maximum Material
Boundary (MMB). "Datum feature Din Fig 4-16 has
{hee MMB. For an external feature of size the appr
priate MMB is the small vale tht will contain the
‘Satur feature of size while respecting datum feature
precedence
(a) In option (where datum feature Dis reference
as primary, the appropriate MM isthe MMC ofthe ea
ture o# 71 mm (Rule)
10) In option (0), where datum feature Dis refer
‘ce a secondary to ensure hat datum precedence is
‘ot violate the clive tfc ofthe MMC (ZA mm
Siamete and the perpendicuaity tolerance (02 mm
diameter) establishes an MMB of 73 mm diameter
(9 In option (), where datum feature is refer
enced as tertiary lo ensure that datum precedence is
‘ot violated, thecllctive effects ofthe MMC (71 mm
lame) and the position tolerance (04 men diameter)
In MMB of 75 mm diameter. ice the per
y tolerance is à refinement of ho potion
lance nat aise.
11162 Calelation for the MMB. For the postion
lance applied to datum feature D, the approprite
MOB or datum features Band Care 109 mm diameter
(109 minus 0 perpendicuanty tolerance) and 19 mm
(19 MMC mints 0 position tolerance) respectively.
4.11.63 Clarifying Aplicable MMB. In cases where
ie boundary sn hero another boundary isdesied,
{he value of he boundary shall be sated, enclosed in
racket, following the applicable datum feature refer
ence and any maui in the feature conto frame, The
term "BSC" or BASIC" maybe wae to indicate that the
‘datum fxtre simulator i oct at Ihe asi location
ofthe datum feature. See Fig. #31, iustration (0)
EXAMPLE:
(Biss ATs [ow wr)
[EDO]
Where an MMB equal to MMC isthe design require
ment for a given datum feature, a zero rome ler.
ance at MMC & specified tothe datum fsture shown
fon datum features Band Cin Fig. 416. See para. 734
and Fig.
ns of Maximum Material Boundary
GE
Es
[Gua]
weten Larios
2 [sua] [SOIED)
MAGO
ont] some coro | Minn Mata Bunda |
@ 7
O DEC
© ETE
4.11641 Determining the Correct Maximum Material
Boundary (MMB). "Datum feature Din Fig 4-16 has
{hee MMB. For an external feature of size the appr
priate MMB is the small vale tht will contain the
‘Satur feature of size while respecting datum feature
precedence
(a) In option (where datum feature Dis reference
as primary, the appropriate MM isthe MMC ofthe ea
ture o# 71 mm (Rule)
10) In option (0), where datum feature Dis refer
‘ce a secondary to ensure hat datum precedence is
‘ot violate the clive tfc ofthe MMC (ZA mm
Siamete and the perpendicuaity tolerance (02 mm
diameter) establishes an MMB of 73 mm diameter
(9 In option (), where datum feature is refer
enced as tertiary lo ensure that datum precedence is
‘ot violated, thecllctive effects ofthe MMC (71 mm
lame) and the position tolerance (04 men diameter)
In MMB of 75 mm diameter. ice the per
y tolerance is à refinement of ho potion
lance nat aise.
11162 Calelation for the MMB. For the postion
lance applied to datum feature D, the approprite
MOB or datum features Band Care 109 mm diameter
(109 minus 0 perpendicuanty tolerance) and 19 mm
(19 MMC mints 0 position tolerance) respectively.
4.11.63 Clarifying Aplicable MMB. In cases where
ie boundary sn hero another boundary isdesied,
{he value of he boundary shall be sated, enclosed in
racket, following the applicable datum feature refer
ence and any maui in the feature conto frame, The
term "BSC" or BASIC" maybe wae to indicate that the
‘datum fxtre simulator i oct at Ihe asi location
ofthe datum feature. See Fig. #31, iustration (0)
EXAMPLE:
(Biss ATs [ow wr)
[EDO]
Where an MMB equal to MMC isthe design require
ment for a given datum feature, a zero rome ler.
ance at MMC & specified tothe datum fsture shown
fon datum features Band Cin Fig. 416. See para. 734
and Fig.
Fig. 4-17 Secondary and Tertiary Datum Features at MB
Door]
11.7 Specitying Datum Features at LB
Where LMB is applied 10 a datum feature referenced
ina feature cont frame ele the dat feature
Simulator atthe appropriate boundary. The appropriate
Toundary is determined by is collective wet of
size, and any applicable geometric tolerances relative
lo any higher precedence datums. See por. 211 and
Fig, 417. The example strates both Secondary
aná etary datum fates specified a MB and stn
Ai at LME.
A118 Multiple LB
À feature or patiem of featuns serving a a datum
feature may have several LMB. These include the
MC ofa feature o the collective effects of LMC and
geometric tolerances Datum precedence may not be
‘olted except in he case of acustomized datum refer
tence frame In caves where the boundary at dear or
‘other boundary is desired the vale of the boundary
shal be sated following the applicable datum feature
‘reference any modi nthe feture control ram.
EXAMPLE:
ERROR Oro
‘The appropriate LMB for
(a) interna features isthe smallest LMB that wil
contain the features) while not violating datum
prsedence
Door]
11.7 Specitying Datum Features at LB
Where LMB is applied 10 a datum feature referenced
ina feature cont frame ele the dat feature
Simulator atthe appropriate boundary. The appropriate
Toundary is determined by is collective wet of
size, and any applicable geometric tolerances relative
lo any higher precedence datums. See por. 211 and
Fig, 417. The example strates both Secondary
aná etary datum fates specified a MB and stn
Ai at LME.
A118 Multiple LB
À feature or patiem of featuns serving a a datum
feature may have several LMB. These include the
MC ofa feature o the collective effects of LMC and
geometric tolerances Datum precedence may not be
‘olted except in he case of acustomized datum refer
tence frame In caves where the boundary at dear or
‘other boundary is desired the vale of the boundary
shal be sated following the applicable datum feature
‘reference any modi nthe feture control ram.
EXAMPLE:
ERROR Oro
‘The appropriate LMB for
(a) interna features isthe smallest LMB that wil
contain the features) while not violating datum
prsedence
Fig. 4-18. Secondary and Tertiary Datum Features at MMB.
-
Grues ©
pl
co a ocn sane à
E] A
812. F-Dmn tar sino laten ot 0
int ter aay ote”
|) mona esti A
(0) external features à the largest LM that the
features) sil contain while not violating, datum
precedence
4119 Datum Feature hit/Dsplacement
MM oe LMB modifiers apple to the datum feature
reference will allow dhe datum feature tosh place
{fom te boundary established by the datum feature sin
‘torinan amount datisequal oh diferncebeimeen
‘he applicable (anelste or relates) actual mating eme
lope for MMB, actual minimum material envelope for
MB, or surface of the feature and the datum feature
simulator The datum reference frame established fom
{he datum feature simulator and mot the datum ft.
See Fig 17 for LMB Figs 18 and 424 datum feature
Bin Fi, 426 for MMB, and Fig 430 llstration() for
the surface. The datum feature shit displacement shall
ays be limited or constrained by the datum feature
Simulator. I'he datum feature simulator geometry Is
Such that 1 does at fly mi or constan the feature
‘uch a rotting sway from the datum feature simul
for beyond the established toundary limits asshown in
Fig #31 illustration (then the feature must remain
in Contact with the datum feature simulator and datum
sh or displacements not allowed. Se pars 4167 and
‘datum feature Ain Fig 128,
111.0 Translation Modifier
Wher ts necessary o indicate tha the basi loco
tion ofthe datum feature simulator is unlocked and the
dam feature simulator sable o translate within the
Specified gromer tolerance to al engage the fst,
the translation modifier is added o the Kature contol
frame following the datum feature reference and any
‘othe applicable modifiers Se Figs 419 and 4-32, ius
ation) and para 3.328 When the ranlaion mod
er is applicable and Ih direction of movement is not
‘lear movement requirements shall be spied,
24.11.11 Effects of Datum Precedence and Datum
Feature Material Boundary Conditions
Where datums are specified in an order of prec
‘lence, the material boundary condition a which the
‘Satur feature apple must be determine. Te effect of
‘is material boundary condition md order of precedence
should be considered relative to fit and function ofthe
port Figures 4-20 and 421 trate a part th à te
{erm of holes located in relation to diameter A and sur
face B. As indicated by asterisks, datum requirements
may be specified in different ways
4.11.12 Cylindrical Feature at RMB Primary
In Fig. 421, ilustran (), diameter is the primary
tum feature and RMB appli surlce Bis the ss
‘ondary datum feature The datum axes the ai of the
‘tum star simulator, The datum feature simulator
{he small circumscribed cylinder hat contacts din
er A that i, the unrelated actual mating envelope of
amor A. This cylinder encompasses variations in he
eco A within specified mits: However any variation
-
Grues ©
pl
co a ocn sane à
E] A
812. F-Dmn tar sino laten ot 0
int ter aay ote”
|) mona esti A
(0) external features à the largest LM that the
features) sil contain while not violating, datum
precedence
4119 Datum Feature hit/Dsplacement
MM oe LMB modifiers apple to the datum feature
reference will allow dhe datum feature tosh place
{fom te boundary established by the datum feature sin
‘torinan amount datisequal oh diferncebeimeen
‘he applicable (anelste or relates) actual mating eme
lope for MMB, actual minimum material envelope for
MB, or surface of the feature and the datum feature
simulator The datum reference frame established fom
{he datum feature simulator and mot the datum ft.
See Fig 17 for LMB Figs 18 and 424 datum feature
Bin Fi, 426 for MMB, and Fig 430 llstration() for
the surface. The datum feature shit displacement shall
ays be limited or constrained by the datum feature
Simulator. I'he datum feature simulator geometry Is
Such that 1 does at fly mi or constan the feature
‘uch a rotting sway from the datum feature simul
for beyond the established toundary limits asshown in
Fig #31 illustration (then the feature must remain
in Contact with the datum feature simulator and datum
sh or displacements not allowed. Se pars 4167 and
‘datum feature Ain Fig 128,
111.0 Translation Modifier
Wher ts necessary o indicate tha the basi loco
tion ofthe datum feature simulator is unlocked and the
dam feature simulator sable o translate within the
Specified gromer tolerance to al engage the fst,
the translation modifier is added o the Kature contol
frame following the datum feature reference and any
‘othe applicable modifiers Se Figs 419 and 4-32, ius
ation) and para 3.328 When the ranlaion mod
er is applicable and Ih direction of movement is not
‘lear movement requirements shall be spied,
24.11.11 Effects of Datum Precedence and Datum
Feature Material Boundary Conditions
Where datums are specified in an order of prec
‘lence, the material boundary condition a which the
‘Satur feature apple must be determine. Te effect of
‘is material boundary condition md order of precedence
should be considered relative to fit and function ofthe
port Figures 4-20 and 421 trate a part th à te
{erm of holes located in relation to diameter A and sur
face B. As indicated by asterisks, datum requirements
may be specified in different ways
4.11.12 Cylindrical Feature at RMB Primary
In Fig. 421, ilustran (), diameter is the primary
tum feature and RMB appli surlce Bis the ss
‘ondary datum feature The datum axes the ai of the
‘tum star simulator, The datum feature simulator
{he small circumscribed cylinder hat contacts din
er A that i, the unrelated actual mating envelope of
amor A. This cylinder encompasses variations in he
eco A within specified mits: However any variation
Fig.4-19 Development ofa Datum Reference Frame With Translation Modifier
ve ore
[EDO]
al
der
a alasleo)
ET
CESSE)
ses"
GES]
CHU)
sr
FEES
on an
‘Sse fom dom os 8)
(2) Dan tours CE
ve ore
[EDO]
al
der
a alasleo)
ET
CESSE)
ses"
GES]
CHU)
sr
FEES
on an
‘Sse fom dom os 8)
(2) Dan tours CE
Fig.4-20 Effect of Datum Modifier
o a
Do pane © Daum (Secondary) Datum plane 8
ES : [arm
am ae 8 ar) Dan fe 8 o
oe irate en Dn tr ts te
ong Menace ae is amet
Sess aS
re abd
in perpendicularity between surface Band diameter A,
the primary datum fate, will fect he degre of con
thet of surface B with datum future simulator
411.3 Surface Primary
In Fig. 4.2, ustrticn (0) surface Bis the primary
datum feature diameter À isthe secondary datum eo
e and RMB is applied. The datum abs à the as ol
the smallest circumscribed cylinder that contacts diam
cr Aan! perpendicular to the datum plane that a,
the rated actual mating enelope ofthe diameter hat
is perpendicular to datum plane B In alton o size
varas, tis cylinder encompasses any variation in
perpendicular between diameter A and surface e
Primary datum feature
4.11.18 Gylindrcal Feature at MMB Secondary
In Fig. 42, illustration (), surface Bis he primary
dam stur diameter As he secondary datum eo
ture and MMB is applied. The datum avi the ais of
the datum festure simulator eylinder of fined size hat
is perpendicular fo the datum plane 1. À displacement
ofthe toleranced feature is allowed when theres lee
nce between the datum feature and he datum feature
Simulator Se para 7362.
4.12 MULTIPLE DATUM FEATURES.
Where more than one datum features ue toe
datum feature simulator fra single datum, he appro-
rito datum feature reference fetes and aoc
‘modifier, separated y à dash, ae entered in ne com
partment ofthe feature contol frame. See para, 34.2and
Fig 122 Since the datum features have qual importance,
dam feature reference ters may be enter in any
‘onder within this compartment. Wher the intents leat,
3 datum festorerference ete may be sed todefine the
‘multiple surfaces as a single datum feature
4121 Simulation ofa Single Datum Plane
Figure 423 is an example ofa single datum plane
simubted, as explained in para, 4111, by coiciding
‘with the datum etre simulator that simultaneous
Contacts the high points of two surface. Identification
‘of two features tablish angle datum plane maybe
required where separation ofthe features is caused by
An obstruction, such a in Fig 423, orby a comparable
‘pening (eo. For controling coplanarity ofthese
Surface, see Fig 423 and para. BALL À single datum
stur symbol may also be wed o indicate that ost
surfaces establish singe datum.
o a
Do pane © Daum (Secondary) Datum plane 8
ES : [arm
am ae 8 ar) Dan fe 8 o
oe irate en Dn tr ts te
ong Menace ae is amet
Sess aS
re abd
in perpendicularity between surface Band diameter A,
the primary datum fate, will fect he degre of con
thet of surface B with datum future simulator
411.3 Surface Primary
In Fig. 4.2, ustrticn (0) surface Bis the primary
datum feature diameter À isthe secondary datum eo
e and RMB is applied. The datum abs à the as ol
the smallest circumscribed cylinder that contacts diam
cr Aan! perpendicular to the datum plane that a,
the rated actual mating enelope ofthe diameter hat
is perpendicular to datum plane B In alton o size
varas, tis cylinder encompasses any variation in
perpendicular between diameter A and surface e
Primary datum feature
4.11.18 Gylindrcal Feature at MMB Secondary
In Fig. 42, illustration (), surface Bis he primary
dam stur diameter As he secondary datum eo
ture and MMB is applied. The datum avi the ais of
the datum festure simulator eylinder of fined size hat
is perpendicular fo the datum plane 1. À displacement
ofthe toleranced feature is allowed when theres lee
nce between the datum feature and he datum feature
Simulator Se para 7362.
4.12 MULTIPLE DATUM FEATURES.
Where more than one datum features ue toe
datum feature simulator fra single datum, he appro-
rito datum feature reference fetes and aoc
‘modifier, separated y à dash, ae entered in ne com
partment ofthe feature contol frame. See para, 34.2and
Fig 122 Since the datum features have qual importance,
dam feature reference ters may be enter in any
‘onder within this compartment. Wher the intents leat,
3 datum festorerference ete may be sed todefine the
‘multiple surfaces as a single datum feature
4121 Simulation ofa Single Datum Plane
Figure 423 is an example ofa single datum plane
simubted, as explained in para, 4111, by coiciding
‘with the datum etre simulator that simultaneous
Contacts the high points of two surface. Identification
‘of two features tablish angle datum plane maybe
required where separation ofthe features is caused by
An obstruction, such a in Fig 423, orby a comparable
‘pening (eo. For controling coplanarity ofthese
Surface, see Fig 423 and para. BALL À single datum
stur symbol may also be wed o indicate that ost
surfaces establish singe datum.
Fig. 4-21. Elec of Material Condition
w
o
(Grate cameos oir)
(Pra sawn MC)
Er
de poner ©
a
a)
©
0
Pr show a MC)
Emme
ater an À
‘Dou ft 8 (Scan)
LE gem ma vas
htm tare À ama of
‘rama al nr
mi mara comes 1)
w
o
(Grate cameos oir)
(Pra sawn MC)
Er
de poner ©
a
a)
©
0
Pr show a MC)
Emme
ater an À
‘Dou ft 8 (Scan)
LE gem ma vas
htm tare À ama of
‘rama al nr
mi mara comes 1)
Fig. 4-22 Planar Multiple Datum
Fig. 4.23 Two Datum Features Establishing a
‘Single Datum Plane
Thao bo are
rr
al
GER ma
er
passe en
ca] fear À fee À
12.2 Singe As of Two Coaxial Features of Size
Figures 428 and 425 are examples ofa single datum
sis etliche from the axes the datum feature sin
‘lator that constrain the to Coil diametre sim
‘asl. The datum features ln Fg. 42 may best RMB
‘specified to apply at MMB or [MB as applicable. In
Tig 1425 the datum features forthe runout tolerances
‘amon apply at RMB.
4123 Pattem of Features o Size at MMB,
Multiple features of size, such as a patter of holes
at MMB, may be used asa group in the establishment
‘of datum feature simulator 1 derive datum refer
tence frame. See Fig. 426 In tis cs when the pais
mounied on the datum festure silat of primary
{tum feature A, the pattem of holes establishes the
‘tum fate simulator that suse to derive the se
fond and third planes o he datum reference fame. The
‘Saturn feature simulator of datum feature Bis Ue cl
Action of the MMB ofall ofthe holes located attrac
ponton. The origin of the datum reference frame may
Pc established atthe conter ofthe pattern ofthe datum
feature simulator where it intersects plane A, as shown
in Fig. 426 oF at anyother location defined with basic
«lmensions relative to the datum feature simulator as
Fig. 428. Where datum feature B is referenced at MB,
displacements permite been he actual hol ot
rm and the datum reference frame, Such displacertent
{stele tony clearance between he surface of datant
feature B and the MMB ofeach hole. This clearance is
“termine by the size, orientation, and location ofeach
ofthe holes collet
4.124 Pattem of Features of Size at RMB
Where RMB is applied in a feture conta frame to
multiple datum features sie used to establish single
“tam, the datum feature simulator of ch fate shall
tena ina locaton relative to one another. The datum
feature simulators shall expand or contact simulan
‘ously rom their MMB other LAB unl the data es
ture simultors make maximum possible contact with
the extremities af the datum featur). Seo Fig 425
Fig. 4.23 Two Datum Features Establishing a
‘Single Datum Plane
Thao bo are
rr
al
GER ma
er
passe en
ca] fear À fee À
12.2 Singe As of Two Coaxial Features of Size
Figures 428 and 425 are examples ofa single datum
sis etliche from the axes the datum feature sin
‘lator that constrain the to Coil diametre sim
‘asl. The datum features ln Fg. 42 may best RMB
‘specified to apply at MMB or [MB as applicable. In
Tig 1425 the datum features forthe runout tolerances
‘amon apply at RMB.
4123 Pattem of Features o Size at MMB,
Multiple features of size, such as a patter of holes
at MMB, may be used asa group in the establishment
‘of datum feature simulator 1 derive datum refer
tence frame. See Fig. 426 In tis cs when the pais
mounied on the datum festure silat of primary
{tum feature A, the pattem of holes establishes the
‘tum fate simulator that suse to derive the se
fond and third planes o he datum reference fame. The
‘Saturn feature simulator of datum feature Bis Ue cl
Action of the MMB ofall ofthe holes located attrac
ponton. The origin of the datum reference frame may
Pc established atthe conter ofthe pattern ofthe datum
feature simulator where it intersects plane A, as shown
in Fig. 426 oF at anyother location defined with basic
«lmensions relative to the datum feature simulator as
Fig. 428. Where datum feature B is referenced at MB,
displacements permite been he actual hol ot
rm and the datum reference frame, Such displacertent
{stele tony clearance between he surface of datant
feature B and the MMB ofeach hole. This clearance is
“termine by the size, orientation, and location ofeach
ofthe holes collet
4.124 Pattem of Features of Size at RMB
Where RMB is applied in a feture conta frame to
multiple datum features sie used to establish single
“tam, the datum feature simulator of ch fate shall
tena ina locaton relative to one another. The datum
feature simulators shall expand or contact simulan
‘ously rom their MMB other LAB unl the data es
ture simultors make maximum possible contact with
the extremities af the datum featur). Seo Fig 425
Fig 4-24, Two Coaxial Datum Features, Single Datum Axis
2x 26:01
+
Coa ans
Meur tie au fae ar Dam ai fat
‘hem eae StS
EUR
Fig. 4:25 Two Datum Features at RMB, Single Datum Axis
Thi on ag
ENS]
CT
ois 200 a]
" mez) a3
Re à CA
L
y in
L Le eme | ©"
parrot ci of
2x 26:01
+
Coa ans
Meur tie au fae ar Dam ai fat
‘hem eae StS
EUR
Fig. 4:25 Two Datum Features at RMB, Single Datum Axis
Thi on ag
ENS]
CT
ois 200 a]
" mez) a3
Re à CA
L
y in
L Le eme | ©"
parrot ci of
Ti be doo
Fig.427
Surface asa Datum Feature
Tis on te ame,
ent
24125 Partial Surfaces as Datum Features
Its often desirable to specify only part ofa surfce,
instend of the entire surface to serve as à datum fae
ture: This maybe indicated by means of chain ine @D
orthographe drawing ony) drawn parallel othe sur
ace prole (dimensiones fr length and location) as in
ig 4127, speed in note orm, or by a datum target.
4.13 MATHEMATICALLY DEFINED SURFACE
It is sometimes necessary to identify à compound
curve or a contounsd surface a= a datum future. A
‘mathematically defined feature shall be defined within
1 three dimensional coordinate system, Where such a
feature is specified as a datum featur its datum os
ture simulator (derived fom the math data) & used in
‘stablishing the datum reference frame. Algring the
nigh point oft datum este with ts datum fsture
simulator tits movement of the part to he datum
reference frame, Were the datum feture alone will at
Adequtely reste the required degrees o freedom of
‘he part additonal datum features willbe required. See
Fig 428,
Fie D mal ds cay eae ete
14 MULTIPLE DATUM REFERENCE FRAMES
More than onedatumrefrencerame may benesessary
forcertsnparts dependinguponfunctonalrequirement
Where more than one dati reference ame used and
isa o determine the welatonships andalelate
Bourdais beten th reference ames the ratonship
betwen the datum reference frames sal be specifi. In
Fg datum features A and Bestabih one tam rt
rence frame, while datum fetos Cand D establish a
ere datum reference frame.
4.15 FUNCTIONAL DATUM FEATURES
Only therequired datum feturesshauldbe referenced
in Kalure control frames when specying geometric
tolerances An undentanding ofthe geometric contol
provided by hos tolerance ( explained in Sections 5
{hough 9) is necessary to determine effectively the
‘umber of datum feature references require or given
"pplication. The funciona quirements ofthe design
Fig.427
Surface asa Datum Feature
Tis on te ame,
ent
24125 Partial Surfaces as Datum Features
Its often desirable to specify only part ofa surfce,
instend of the entire surface to serve as à datum fae
ture: This maybe indicated by means of chain ine @D
orthographe drawing ony) drawn parallel othe sur
ace prole (dimensiones fr length and location) as in
ig 4127, speed in note orm, or by a datum target.
4.13 MATHEMATICALLY DEFINED SURFACE
It is sometimes necessary to identify à compound
curve or a contounsd surface a= a datum future. A
‘mathematically defined feature shall be defined within
1 three dimensional coordinate system, Where such a
feature is specified as a datum featur its datum os
ture simulator (derived fom the math data) & used in
‘stablishing the datum reference frame. Algring the
nigh point oft datum este with ts datum fsture
simulator tits movement of the part to he datum
reference frame, Were the datum feture alone will at
Adequtely reste the required degrees o freedom of
‘he part additonal datum features willbe required. See
Fig 428,
Fie D mal ds cay eae ete
14 MULTIPLE DATUM REFERENCE FRAMES
More than onedatumrefrencerame may benesessary
forcertsnparts dependinguponfunctonalrequirement
Where more than one dati reference ame used and
isa o determine the welatonships andalelate
Bourdais beten th reference ames the ratonship
betwen the datum reference frames sal be specifi. In
Fg datum features A and Bestabih one tam rt
rence frame, while datum fetos Cand D establish a
ere datum reference frame.
4.15 FUNCTIONAL DATUM FEATURES
Only therequired datum feturesshauldbe referenced
in Kalure control frames when specying geometric
tolerances An undentanding ofthe geometric contol
provided by hos tolerance ( explained in Sections 5
{hough 9) is necessary to determine effectively the
‘umber of datum feature references require or given
"pplication. The funciona quirements ofthe design
Fig. 4-28. Contoured Surface asa Datum Feature
sac TRUE gr0-73
should be the basis for selecting the related datum
features to be referenced inthe feature conto fame
Figures 436 rough 48ilustrate parts in an assembly
whore geometric tolerances are specified, euch having
‘he rire numberof datum feature ferences
416 ROTATIONAL CONSTRAINT ABOUT A DATUM
AXIS OR POINT
Where a datum reference frame is established from a
primary or secondary datum as or point, lower pros
‘ence datum feature urls or future of size may be
‘he to constrain rotation. See pars 4104. Depending
m
on functional requirements, there are many ways to
constrain the rotational degrees of freedom about the
her precedence dam. Figures 48 and 429 through
1632 distro the development of à datum reference
frame based on the principles otined in the datum
feature simulator requirements In these igure, datum
feature A establishes an axis, The Towser precedence
datum feature B is located (positioned or prole) o
‘tur etre A and is then use 1 orient te rota
¿logres of freedom to establish the datum reference
Frame hat dolce the teo mm diameter holes
Depending on functional requirements this lower pre
«sence datum feature may apply at RMB or be modified
sac TRUE gr0-73
should be the basis for selecting the related datum
features to be referenced inthe feature conto fame
Figures 436 rough 48ilustrate parts in an assembly
whore geometric tolerances are specified, euch having
‘he rire numberof datum feature ferences
416 ROTATIONAL CONSTRAINT ABOUT A DATUM
AXIS OR POINT
Where a datum reference frame is established from a
primary or secondary datum as or point, lower pros
‘ence datum feature urls or future of size may be
‘he to constrain rotation. See pars 4104. Depending
m
on functional requirements, there are many ways to
constrain the rotational degrees of freedom about the
her precedence dam. Figures 48 and 429 through
1632 distro the development of à datum reference
frame based on the principles otined in the datum
feature simulator requirements In these igure, datum
feature A establishes an axis, The Towser precedence
datum feature B is located (positioned or prole) o
‘tur etre A and is then use 1 orient te rota
¿logres of freedom to establish the datum reference
Frame hat dolce the teo mm diameter holes
Depending on functional requirements this lower pre
«sence datum feature may apply at RMB or be modified
Fig. 4-29 Contoured Datum Feature Ce
onstaning a Rotational Degree of Freedom
Ta nes cone
Prien
TAls®) cy
DV Cana zo. aan am wa] nes see
Pre Ha]
apply at MMB or LB. The datum reference frame
Stich fom the datum feature simulators and not
hedatum features,
4161 Contoured Datum Feature at RMB Constraining
‘Rotational Degree of Freedom
In Fig 429, ilustration a), datum feature Bapplis at
RMB, This requires the datum feature simulator geo
«toy to originate atthe MMB of R149 mm and progress
{through the profile tolerance zone toward the LB of
RIS mm unt it makes maximum contact with datum
festure Band consrans the rotational degree of fee
(dom of the part around the axis of Ihe datum feature
Simulator from datum este À
4162 Contoured Datum Feature at MMB.
Gonstaining a Rotational Degree of Freedom
In Fig. 429 lation (), datum feature Bi mo
fied to apply at MMB. This requires he datum festa
simulator o be xed at Ihe MMB of RIAS mm and thus
‘orients the two planes that originate a he ais ofthe
datum feature simulator of datum fosture A. Datum
feature B may rotate within Ihe confines crested by is
departure rom MMB and might not remain in contact
il the datum feature simulator.
4162 Planar Datum Feature at RMB Consraning 2
Rotational Degree of Freedom
In Fig. 430, illustration 9), datum feature B applies
aU RMB This requires the datum feature simulator
igometry to originate at MMB of 15.1 mun and progres
{hough the profile tolerance zone toward the EIB of
149 em un makes maximum contact with dakar
feature B and constrains the rotational degree of rc
¿om of the part around he ais of the datum fate
Simulator! datum feature,
4164 Planar Datum Feature at MMB Constraning à
Rotational Degree of Freedom
in Fig. 30, illustration (), datum feature B is modi
fied t apply at MMB. This requires the datum feature
simulator tobe Axed at Ihe MMI of 15.1 mm and this
onstaning a Rotational Degree of Freedom
Ta nes cone
Prien
TAls®) cy
DV Cana zo. aan am wa] nes see
Pre Ha]
apply at MMB or LB. The datum reference frame
Stich fom the datum feature simulators and not
hedatum features,
4161 Contoured Datum Feature at RMB Constraining
‘Rotational Degree of Freedom
In Fig 429, ilustration a), datum feature Bapplis at
RMB, This requires the datum feature simulator geo
«toy to originate atthe MMB of R149 mm and progress
{through the profile tolerance zone toward the LB of
RIS mm unt it makes maximum contact with datum
festure Band consrans the rotational degree of fee
(dom of the part around the axis of Ihe datum feature
Simulator from datum este À
4162 Contoured Datum Feature at MMB.
Gonstaining a Rotational Degree of Freedom
In Fig. 429 lation (), datum feature Bi mo
fied to apply at MMB. This requires he datum festa
simulator o be xed at Ihe MMB of RIAS mm and thus
‘orients the two planes that originate a he ais ofthe
datum feature simulator of datum fosture A. Datum
feature B may rotate within Ihe confines crested by is
departure rom MMB and might not remain in contact
il the datum feature simulator.
4162 Planar Datum Feature at RMB Consraning 2
Rotational Degree of Freedom
In Fig. 430, illustration 9), datum feature B applies
aU RMB This requires the datum feature simulator
igometry to originate at MMB of 15.1 mun and progres
{hough the profile tolerance zone toward the EIB of
149 em un makes maximum contact with dakar
feature B and constrains the rotational degree of rc
¿om of the part around he ais of the datum fate
Simulator! datum feature,
4164 Planar Datum Feature at MMB Constraning à
Rotational Degree of Freedom
in Fig. 30, illustration (), datum feature B is modi
fied t apply at MMB. This requires the datum feature
simulator tobe Axed at Ihe MMI of 15.1 mm and this
Fig. 430. Planar Datum Feature Constraning a Rotational Degree of Freedom
Ths one wing
2x pes02
conan OLD
TO posed plans sn SNS am
fete oped at FB
Ths on te ring
TO DE pane aan Sd) am
fee oped at MS
orients the tw planes that oiginate a the axis ofthe
datum feature simulator of datum feature A. Datum
feature B may rate within the confines crated by te
departure from MMB and might not remain in contact
‘withthe datum feature simulator
16.5 Offset Planar Datum Feature # RMB.
Constraining a Rotational Degree of Freedom
ln Fig 31 estro o), datum feature Bist eo
tive to datum axis A and applies RMS This rogues the
datum feature simulator geometry o origine at MMB of
51 mm and progress though the prole trance one
toward the LIB 49 men unt makes nau con
tact with datum feature B posable wo pint contact) and
constrains he rot degre of dom of the o
nes ofthe datum reference fame around Ihe asso te
true geometric counterpart of datum feature À
116.6 Offset Planar Datum Feature Seta Basie
Constraining a Rotational Degree of Freedom
In Fig. 43, illustration (0) datum feta Bis ct
Sm relative odatum aie À RMB dos not apply asii
‘overiddenin he feature contol frame forthe wo als
by the abbreviation BSC in brackets following the rer.
‘ce to datum feature E. Soe para. 411.63. This requires
{he datar feature simulator to be fined 5 mmbasic and
contains the rotational gree of from of the peo
Blanes ofthe datum reference frame around the ais of
{he datum feature simulator rom datum feature A
116.7 Offset Planar Datum Feature at MMB.
Constraining a Rotational Degree of Freedom
In Fig, 43, llstraon (©, datum fetur Bis oct
lative to datum ans A and modified to apply at MMB.
This requires the datum feoture simulator lo be fined
Ths one wing
2x pes02
conan OLD
TO posed plans sn SNS am
fete oped at FB
Ths on te ring
TO DE pane aan Sd) am
fee oped at MS
orients the tw planes that oiginate a the axis ofthe
datum feature simulator of datum feature A. Datum
feature B may rate within the confines crated by te
departure from MMB and might not remain in contact
‘withthe datum feature simulator
16.5 Offset Planar Datum Feature # RMB.
Constraining a Rotational Degree of Freedom
ln Fig 31 estro o), datum feature Bist eo
tive to datum axis A and applies RMS This rogues the
datum feature simulator geometry o origine at MMB of
51 mm and progress though the prole trance one
toward the LIB 49 men unt makes nau con
tact with datum feature B posable wo pint contact) and
constrains he rot degre of dom of the o
nes ofthe datum reference fame around Ihe asso te
true geometric counterpart of datum feature À
116.6 Offset Planar Datum Feature Seta Basie
Constraining a Rotational Degree of Freedom
In Fig. 43, illustration (0) datum feta Bis ct
Sm relative odatum aie À RMB dos not apply asii
‘overiddenin he feature contol frame forthe wo als
by the abbreviation BSC in brackets following the rer.
‘ce to datum feature E. Soe para. 411.63. This requires
{he datar feature simulator to be fined 5 mmbasic and
contains the rotational gree of from of the peo
Blanes ofthe datum reference frame around the ais of
{he datum feature simulator rom datum feature A
116.7 Offset Planar Datum Feature at MMB.
Constraining a Rotational Degree of Freedom
In Fig, 43, llstraon (©, datum fetur Bis oct
lative to datum ans A and modified to apply at MMB.
This requires the datum feoture simulator lo be fined
Fig. 4-31 Datum Modifier Effects — Plane Surface
Ti an be aang ns ie
tum ss A ome
[E163] progrsses rom 81.48 normal om tho MB lo
Fete] fate maxonen conn wr dam eats &
a No tarslton raten of dau fats iy alowed
ASPAS ER
na ie
Datum sus a
Dat fete B-Daım ae
Tosa ie
al
Datum teste 8 Datum fe intr
fe
D a 81e Daum eto 8
TO Oat VS pare sana, ay
sum Vie spoked tN
‘rst roma cor a a mamen fon pt
[+10]
Ti an be aang ns ie
tum ss A ome
[E163] progrsses rom 81.48 normal om tho MB lo
Fete] fate maxonen conn wr dam eats &
a No tarslton raten of dau fats iy alowed
ASPAS ER
na ie
Datum sus a
Dat fete B-Daım ae
Tosa ie
al
Datum teste 8 Datum fe intr
fe
D a 81e Daum eto 8
TO Oat VS pare sana, ay
sum Vie spoked tN
‘rst roma cor a a mamen fon pt
[+10]
Fig.4:32. Datum Modifier Effects — Size Feature
FRS oi, worin damn fat
atm an A Gone pane of
Dat tare 8 Cntr ge
fom toute sor or
a A
Ton vo or
DIESE
Pr
at the MMB of 51 mm and constrains the rotation
of freedom ofthe wo planes ofthe datum refer
ence frame tot originate at the datum fate simulator
‘of datum feature A. Where the datum feature simula
tor and the higher precedence datum axis do not mit
rotation in both directions about the datum aus, the
datum future must always contact the datum feature
4168 Datum Feature of Size at RMB Constaiin
Rotational Degree of Freedom
In Fig, 432 illustration (9) datum fsture B applies
at RMB and i lot relative to datum axis A This
requires the centr plane ofthe datum feature simulator
isometry o de fixed a the asi 5 mm dimension and
the datum feature simulator geometry Lo expand un
makes maximum contact with datum feature B. This
coistrains the rotational degree of frcdom of the two
Plans ofthe datum erence frame around the ax of
{he datum feature simulator of datum feature A
m
1169 Datum Feature of Size at RMB With Translation
Modifier Constraning Rotational Degrees of
Freedom
In Fig 432, illustration (b), datum feature B applies
at RMB with a tranlation modifier. This allows the
enter plane of the datum feature simulator to tans
Inte while maintaining its orientation to higher prece-
(dene datums, The parallel planes ofthe datum feature
Simulator expand 16 make maximum contact with the
tum feat
417 APPLICATION OF MMB, LMB, AND RMB TO
IRREGULAR FEATURES OF SIZE
MMB, LMB, and RMB may be applied to regalar en
unes izo when they are selected as datum features
(a) Insome applications, eroglafeaturesofsize that
contain or may Ue contained by an actual eating enter
lope or actual minimum material envelope fom which
Sener point, an axis or a center plane can be derived
FRS oi, worin damn fat
atm an A Gone pane of
Dat tare 8 Cntr ge
fom toute sor or
a A
Ton vo or
DIESE
Pr
at the MMB of 51 mm and constrains the rotation
of freedom ofthe wo planes ofthe datum refer
ence frame tot originate at the datum fate simulator
‘of datum feature A. Where the datum feature simula
tor and the higher precedence datum axis do not mit
rotation in both directions about the datum aus, the
datum future must always contact the datum feature
4168 Datum Feature of Size at RMB Constaiin
Rotational Degree of Freedom
In Fig, 432 illustration (9) datum fsture B applies
at RMB and i lot relative to datum axis A This
requires the centr plane ofthe datum feature simulator
isometry o de fixed a the asi 5 mm dimension and
the datum feature simulator geometry Lo expand un
makes maximum contact with datum feature B. This
coistrains the rotational degree of frcdom of the two
Plans ofthe datum erence frame around the ax of
{he datum feature simulator of datum feature A
m
1169 Datum Feature of Size at RMB With Translation
Modifier Constraning Rotational Degrees of
Freedom
In Fig 432, illustration (b), datum feature B applies
at RMB with a tranlation modifier. This allows the
enter plane of the datum feature simulator to tans
Inte while maintaining its orientation to higher prece-
(dene datums, The parallel planes ofthe datum feature
Simulator expand 16 make maximum contact with the
tum feat
417 APPLICATION OF MMB, LMB, AND RMB TO
IRREGULAR FEATURES OF SIZE
MMB, LMB, and RMB may be applied to regalar en
unes izo when they are selected as datum features
(a) Insome applications, eroglafeaturesofsize that
contain or may Ue contained by an actual eating enter
lope or actual minimum material envelope fom which
Sener point, an axis or a center plane can be derived
1.433. regular and Regu
lar Features of Size Datum Features
¿e
{rt on of sm
à E
(Coser pone ten
sue since Gr
may be usedas datum features See para. 133226) and
Fig 43, 434, and 438. RMB, MMB, and LMB pin
ples may be applied to these types of emul features
poa
(9) in other applications (such as an regular shaped
featur) where a Boundary has een defined using pro
fie tolrancng centerpoint an ai, ra center pane
‘may not be ray definable See para 1.3220) and
Fig $24, MMB and LMB principles may be applied
to lis type of regular feature ol size When RMB is
applied, the fiting routine may be the same as for a
regular feature of size, a spe fig routine may be
ned, or datum targets maybe used
4.18 DATUM FEATURE SELECTION PRACTICAL
APPLICATION
Figure 436 ilustrates an assembly of mating parts,
Datu features were selected based on funciona sien
by and mating conditions. Figure #37 illustrates the
lar Features of Size Datum Features
¿e
{rt on of sm
à E
(Coser pone ten
sue since Gr
may be usedas datum features See para. 133226) and
Fig 43, 434, and 438. RMB, MMB, and LMB pin
ples may be applied to these types of emul features
poa
(9) in other applications (such as an regular shaped
featur) where a Boundary has een defined using pro
fie tolrancng centerpoint an ai, ra center pane
‘may not be ray definable See para 1.3220) and
Fig $24, MMB and LMB principles may be applied
to lis type of regular feature ol size When RMB is
applied, the fiting routine may be the same as for a
regular feature of size, a spe fig routine may be
ned, or datum targets maybe used
4.18 DATUM FEATURE SELECTION PRACTICAL
APPLICATION
Figure 436 ilustrates an assembly of mating parts,
Datu features were selected based on funciona sien
by and mating conditions. Figure #37 illustrates the
Fig.4:34. Coaxial Iegular Feature of Size Datum Feature
Th on be ome
«(Al
par]
pally aná datum features select ase onthe fans:
tonal interatonehp with he adapter in the assembly.
‘The internal bore on the pully selected the primary
datum feature identified as A) based on the amount of
tac th with the plo diameter ofthe adapter The
Shoulder hast secondary contact with the adapter and
Ati selected ae secondary datum feature (identified as
2 The assembly of the pulley o the adapter depends
fon the camping ofthe bo and washer and a tot
‘datum feature 1 not nes: Figure 4-3 luttes
the adapter with is datum features and appropriate
prometo tolerances based en funcion. An analyis of
the relationship between the adapter and he crankshaft
indicates thatthe shoulder han he most contact with the
“ranks and because the bolt force on the assembly
vilo theshoulder surface plane into contact withthe
nd ofthe crankshaft, establishing an inital orientation,
itis selected asthe primary datum feature (denied as
A) Secondary comi between the pilot onthe adapter
and bre on the rankahat, and therefore, he pots
selected as the secondary datum feature (identificas)
forthe adapter In this example à tertiary datum feature
À unnecessary as the ration constrained by the five
arance has, and other Features on the par do not
‘eed tobe controled or mito Selection of datum es
res in this manner minimizes tolerance accumulation
‘within an assembly and is also representative of actual
function,
419 SIMULTANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
A simultaneous requirement i where two or more
geometric tolerances apply as a single alien of part
quemen À simultancous requirement applies o
poston and profile tolerances that ae located by Basie
Simensions, related to common datum Features ref
rence inthe same order of precedence atthe same
boundary conditions. In à simullancous nsqulrement
there iso Wanlaion ar rotation betwen the datum
reference frames ofthe include geometric tolerances
Th on be ome
«(Al
par]
pally aná datum features select ase onthe fans:
tonal interatonehp with he adapter in the assembly.
‘The internal bore on the pully selected the primary
datum feature identified as A) based on the amount of
tac th with the plo diameter ofthe adapter The
Shoulder hast secondary contact with the adapter and
Ati selected ae secondary datum feature (identified as
2 The assembly of the pulley o the adapter depends
fon the camping ofthe bo and washer and a tot
‘datum feature 1 not nes: Figure 4-3 luttes
the adapter with is datum features and appropriate
prometo tolerances based en funcion. An analyis of
the relationship between the adapter and he crankshaft
indicates thatthe shoulder han he most contact with the
“ranks and because the bolt force on the assembly
vilo theshoulder surface plane into contact withthe
nd ofthe crankshaft, establishing an inital orientation,
itis selected asthe primary datum feature (denied as
A) Secondary comi between the pilot onthe adapter
and bre on the rankahat, and therefore, he pots
selected as the secondary datum feature (identificas)
forthe adapter In this example à tertiary datum feature
À unnecessary as the ration constrained by the five
arance has, and other Features on the par do not
‘eed tobe controled or mito Selection of datum es
res in this manner minimizes tolerance accumulation
‘within an assembly and is also representative of actual
function,
419 SIMULTANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
A simultaneous requirement i where two or more
geometric tolerances apply as a single alien of part
quemen À simultancous requirement applies o
poston and profile tolerances that ae located by Basie
Simensions, related to common datum Features ref
rence inthe same order of precedence atthe same
boundary conditions. In à simullancous nsqulrement
there iso Wanlaion ar rotation betwen the datum
reference frames ofthe include geometric tolerances
Fig. 435. Datum Possibilities From Three Pins for an regular Feature of Size
Fig. 437, Functional Datum Application — Pulley
CL TozTa
I
oop E
fig.4-38- Funcional Datum Aplaton — Adapter
es aplicas
I [see
ans Hr
I HM esa
Z3_|
LE
(4 Mara Mala
@ tha
GERS 59 al
ES
CL TozTa
I
oop E
fig.4-38- Funcional Datum Aplaton — Adapter
es aplicas
I [see
ans Hr
I HM esa
Z3_|
LE
(4 Mara Mala
@ tha
GERS 59 al
ES
1.439. Simultaneous Position and Profile Tolerances
{hus cratinga single poten. Figures 439 and 4-40show
samples of simultaneous requirements. Y Such inter.
Tatonship à ot required, notation suchas SEPREQT is
placed adjacent to each applicable ture control fame
Eee Pig. tr and 7-54 and por. 75.42. This principle
does not apply to the lower togmenta of comport es
ture control frames See para; 7.542. a simulancous
requirement is desired for the lower segments of two OF
‘more compost feature control frames à natation such
SIM REQT shal be placed adjacon o each applicable
lower segment ofthe future contol frame.
4.20 RESTRAINED CONDITION
Unless otherwise specified, al tolerances apply ina
freestate condition In some cases, may be desirable
10 restrain a parton it datum features o simulate their
function or interaction with other features oF parts To
Invoke a restrained condition, a not is speed or ref
(rend on the drawing defining the specific require
ments Se Fig. 442. This igure strates a por hat
‘should be resained until suit reinforcement ls
‘ded to rca is design shape, In this ¿lustro
the restraint must be per a document referenced on the
<rawing In restrained application ti permisible to
se as many datum targets as necessary to establish the
‘Satur features,
421 DATUM REFERENCE FRAME IDENTIFICATION
Whore a datum reference fame has been propery
tablished and ii considered necessary o trate
the axes ofa datum reference frame on the drawing,
the axes or center planes may be labeled to determine
{hus cratinga single poten. Figures 439 and 4-40show
samples of simultaneous requirements. Y Such inter.
Tatonship à ot required, notation suchas SEPREQT is
placed adjacent to each applicable ture control fame
Eee Pig. tr and 7-54 and por. 75.42. This principle
does not apply to the lower togmenta of comport es
ture control frames See para; 7.542. a simulancous
requirement is desired for the lower segments of two OF
‘more compost feature control frames à natation such
SIM REQT shal be placed adjacon o each applicable
lower segment ofthe future contol frame.
4.20 RESTRAINED CONDITION
Unless otherwise specified, al tolerances apply ina
freestate condition In some cases, may be desirable
10 restrain a parton it datum features o simulate their
function or interaction with other features oF parts To
Invoke a restrained condition, a not is speed or ref
(rend on the drawing defining the specific require
ments Se Fig. 442. This igure strates a por hat
‘should be resained until suit reinforcement ls
‘ded to rca is design shape, In this ¿lustro
the restraint must be per a document referenced on the
<rawing In restrained application ti permisible to
se as many datum targets as necessary to establish the
‘Satur features,
421 DATUM REFERENCE FRAME IDENTIFICATION
Whore a datum reference fame has been propery
tablished and ii considered necessary o trate
the axes ofa datum reference frame on the drawing,
the axes or center planes may be labeled to determine
Fig. 4-40 Aligned Features — Simultancous Requirement
Fig. 4-42 Restrained Condition Application
& =
ix .
{he transition degrees of freedom X,Y, and Z. See
Figs 42,47, 48, and 45, Where multiple datum ref.
erence frames exist and tis desirable to bel the aes
(06 Wand 2), any labeled axes shal inclu a reference
to the associated datum reference frame. In ig 443 the
Y, Y, and Z anes forthe thee datum reference frames
ae identi by the notation (A,B, LÍA, 8, OL and
18.08] These labels represent the datum fates (ib
‘ut modifier) foreach datum reference frame and fl
Tow the X,Y and Z entiicaion eters
4.22 CUSTOMIZED DATUM REFERENCE FRAME
‘CONSTRUCTION
To override the degree of freedom constrained by
‚datum features referenced in an order of precedence,
‘customized datum reference frame may be invoed.
‘When appiying the customize datum reference fame,
the following requirements govem the constant on
‘ich datum eure reference:
la) th rectangular coordinate axes shall be Tabet
inat least two views on the drawing. See Figs. db
nd,
10) the degrees) of fredom to be contrin by
(ch datum feature references the feature Control
Frame shall be explicitly sated by placing the des
nated degree of dom tobe constrained in lowercase
Tete) I, ¥, Zu, or win brackets following ech
‚datum feature reference and any applicable modifiers).
See Fides and ie
4.23 APPLICATION OF A CUSTOMIZED DATUM
REFERENCE FRAME
In Fig 4-4 the conical primary datum feature A con
strains five degrees of dom, including translation
s
& =
ix .
{he transition degrees of freedom X,Y, and Z. See
Figs 42,47, 48, and 45, Where multiple datum ref.
erence frames exist and tis desirable to bel the aes
(06 Wand 2), any labeled axes shal inclu a reference
to the associated datum reference frame. In ig 443 the
Y, Y, and Z anes forthe thee datum reference frames
ae identi by the notation (A,B, LÍA, 8, OL and
18.08] These labels represent the datum fates (ib
‘ut modifier) foreach datum reference frame and fl
Tow the X,Y and Z entiicaion eters
4.22 CUSTOMIZED DATUM REFERENCE FRAME
‘CONSTRUCTION
To override the degree of freedom constrained by
‚datum features referenced in an order of precedence,
‘customized datum reference frame may be invoed.
‘When appiying the customize datum reference fame,
the following requirements govem the constant on
‘ich datum eure reference:
la) th rectangular coordinate axes shall be Tabet
inat least two views on the drawing. See Figs. db
nd,
10) the degrees) of fredom to be contrin by
(ch datum feature references the feature Control
Frame shall be explicitly sated by placing the des
nated degree of dom tobe constrained in lowercase
Tete) I, ¥, Zu, or win brackets following ech
‚datum feature reference and any applicable modifiers).
See Fides and ie
4.23 APPLICATION OF A CUSTOMIZED DATUM
REFERENCE FRAME
In Fig 4-4 the conical primary datum feature A con
strains five degrees of dom, including translation
s
Fig 4-43, Datum Reference Frame Identification
game 7 GHEE way
vos au sueraces CETBSIAISIE
saone a ©
gares
Gzehlele) wea DIE
L. EE]
51.4 % Et
mi Ven a we
SRE | a F
al
cal
Fig. 4th Conical Datum Feature
org
game 7 GHEE way
vos au sueraces CETBSIAISIE
saone a ©
gares
Gzehlele) wea DIE
L. EE]
51.4 % Et
mi Ven a we
SRE | a F
al
cal
Fig. 4th Conical Datum Feature
org
Fig. 445 Con
cal Datum Feature
Ths oe Sara
in Z. The origin ofthe datum reference fame to locate
the Galameter hol is from the apex of he conkal
¿tar feature simulator I some applications maybe
‘cesar to customize the datum reference frame. The
following ae examples of applications of customized
‘datum reference frames
(a) In Fg. 445, the design intent i thatthe primary
datum feature A constrains four degrees of freedom,
fexcuding translation in Z. Secondary datum feature
Bis a thst face and when customized constan
the translational degree of freedom (2. The Glam
(er hole located tothe conical ture sith tan
tion Z omitted, Secondary datum feature B contains
translation in Z In ths example, he declared degrees
‘of constraint for datum feature Aare X, Yu, nd y The
are degree of constraint for datum fatur Bin.
1} In Pg, 446 datum osture B would normally
restrain two tanslatonal degrees of freedom, X and Y,
And one tational degre af freedom, w Ses Fig 43,
¿lustro (D. Th purpose of he square holes to tans:
fertorguebatot to ork the part Therefore, Ihe design
inte 1 ot datum feature rain two rason
¿degrees of freedom, but not the rotational degree of
com. In the postion tolerance fr the ve hole,
«datum feature A contains thre degre of feeder, Z,
‘and: Eventhough datum feature Boul normally
onsrin the thre remaining degrees o freedom, using
{hecustomized datum reference ame contraint require
‘ments datum feature Beonstrins only two raslatonal
res of redom, and Y Datum feature C then, co
‘erin the remaining dogs of tational vedo w.
24 DATUM TARGETS
Datu targets are th designated points incsoaress
‘hat are used in etablshing a datum Datum tages are
‘eed in establishing» datum reference frame. Beene
Slinherent iris, the entire surface of some se
tures cannot be effectively used to establish a datum.
Examples are nonplanar or uneven surfaces produced
by casting forging or molding surfaces of élément:
and thinsection surfaces sujet to bowing warping,
or other inherent or induce distortions Datum tr
gets and datum features (as described earlier) may be
a
cal Datum Feature
Ths oe Sara
in Z. The origin ofthe datum reference fame to locate
the Galameter hol is from the apex of he conkal
¿tar feature simulator I some applications maybe
‘cesar to customize the datum reference frame. The
following ae examples of applications of customized
‘datum reference frames
(a) In Fg. 445, the design intent i thatthe primary
datum feature A constrains four degrees of freedom,
fexcuding translation in Z. Secondary datum feature
Bis a thst face and when customized constan
the translational degree of freedom (2. The Glam
(er hole located tothe conical ture sith tan
tion Z omitted, Secondary datum feature B contains
translation in Z In ths example, he declared degrees
‘of constraint for datum feature Aare X, Yu, nd y The
are degree of constraint for datum fatur Bin.
1} In Pg, 446 datum osture B would normally
restrain two tanslatonal degrees of freedom, X and Y,
And one tational degre af freedom, w Ses Fig 43,
¿lustro (D. Th purpose of he square holes to tans:
fertorguebatot to ork the part Therefore, Ihe design
inte 1 ot datum feature rain two rason
¿degrees of freedom, but not the rotational degree of
com. In the postion tolerance fr the ve hole,
«datum feature A contains thre degre of feeder, Z,
‘and: Eventhough datum feature Boul normally
onsrin the thre remaining degrees o freedom, using
{hecustomized datum reference ame contraint require
‘ments datum feature Beonstrins only two raslatonal
res of redom, and Y Datum feature C then, co
‘erin the remaining dogs of tational vedo w.
24 DATUM TARGETS
Datu targets are th designated points incsoaress
‘hat are used in etablshing a datum Datum tages are
‘eed in establishing» datum reference frame. Beene
Slinherent iris, the entire surface of some se
tures cannot be effectively used to establish a datum.
Examples are nonplanar or uneven surfaces produced
by casting forging or molding surfaces of élément:
and thinsection surfaces sujet to bowing warping,
or other inherent or induce distortions Datum tr
gets and datum features (as described earlier) may be
a
Fig. 4-46 Customized Datum Reference Frame
Tis one Ga
SR
combined to establish a datum reference frame. Where
targets are apple toa feature of iz, the appropiate
‘material boundary madiier is specified or implied
24.1 Datum Target Symbols
Datum targets are designated on the drang by
means ofa datum target symbol See Fi. 36. The sym
tos placed outside the part outine with radial line
ected to the target. The use of a solid radial line ind
fates that the datum target symbol son the ner (us
Abe) view of the surface. The use of à dashed
© in Fig 447, indicates thatthe datum tar
© far (iden) surface. The datum feature ise may
te identified with a datum feature symbol a shown in
Fig. 453 0 by using the datum reference fame symbol
se shoven in Fg. 454
Tis one Ga
SR
combined to establish a datum reference frame. Where
targets are apple toa feature of iz, the appropiate
‘material boundary madiier is specified or implied
24.1 Datum Target Symbols
Datum targets are designated on the drang by
means ofa datum target symbol See Fi. 36. The sym
tos placed outside the part outine with radial line
ected to the target. The use of a solid radial line ind
fates that the datum target symbol son the ner (us
Abe) view of the surface. The use of à dashed
© in Fig 447, indicates thatthe datum tar
© far (iden) surface. The datum feature ise may
te identified with a datum feature symbol a shown in
Fig. 453 0 by using the datum reference fame symbol
se shoven in Fg. 454
Fig. 4-47 Applications of Movable Datums
zus]
za]
haze
3327]
4.24.2 Datum Target Points
Adsturtargt pointisindicatoby tarot city
bl dimensional located om a det view te sure
‘Where there sno dic vio; the point atin dime
sioned on wo adjpent views See Figs 4-18 and 37.
4.243 Datum Target Lines
‘A datum target line is indicted by the target point
symbol on an edge view ofthe surface, a phantor ine
On the diet view or both Seo Figs dei and 38. Where
the length ofthe datum target lie must be controlled,
length and cation are dimensioned
4.248 Datum Target Areas
Where is determined that an are is necessary to
assure establishment of the simulated datum hati
‘where spherkal or pointed pins would be inadequate),
‘target ara died shape isspeciid. The datum
target are indicted by section lines inside a phantom
‘outline ofthe desired shape, with controling dimen-
Sons added. The basic size of the area I given in the
‘upper hl ofthe dam target symbol. Sec Figs 39 and
SER Where it Becomes impractable to delineate a ar
et area in the upper al ofthe datum target symbol,
{he method of indication shown in Fig 30. 442, and
447 orbasicdimensions may bo use to define the shape
and size ofthe datum target area.
245. Establshinga Center Plan From Datum Targets,
Figure 447 is an example of a Vahaped datum fet
ture simulator esablihed fom two datum tng Inn
Inthe front view, datum targets BI and B2 ae loc
relative todatum targets Al and AZ witha basic dimen
Sion and shown as datum target ios Ia tangent plane
‘shaped datum feature simulator i required, BI and
12 would oly be shove in the top view
‘4.246 Movable Datum Target Symbol
The movable datum target symbol may be used to
indicate movement of he datum target datum feature
simulator Where datum targets establish centerpoint
ns or enter plane on an RMB basis the datum feature
Simulator moves normal tothe true profile, and mos
ble datum target symbol though no required maybe
‘sed or clarity In other cases where the datum feature
Simulator i required o move and where the movement
isnot normal o th tre profit the movable datum a
get symbol shall be used and the direction of movement
ale early defined: Se Figs 4-17 and 4-9.
424.7 Datum Target Dimensions
The location and size, where applicable of datum tr
set redefined with either basic or toleranced dimen-
Sons. If defined with bask dimensions, established
tooling or gaging tolerances apply Figures AS llustrates
zus]
za]
haze
3327]
4.24.2 Datum Target Points
Adsturtargt pointisindicatoby tarot city
bl dimensional located om a det view te sure
‘Where there sno dic vio; the point atin dime
sioned on wo adjpent views See Figs 4-18 and 37.
4.243 Datum Target Lines
‘A datum target line is indicted by the target point
symbol on an edge view ofthe surface, a phantor ine
On the diet view or both Seo Figs dei and 38. Where
the length ofthe datum target lie must be controlled,
length and cation are dimensioned
4.248 Datum Target Areas
Where is determined that an are is necessary to
assure establishment of the simulated datum hati
‘where spherkal or pointed pins would be inadequate),
‘target ara died shape isspeciid. The datum
target are indicted by section lines inside a phantom
‘outline ofthe desired shape, with controling dimen-
Sons added. The basic size of the area I given in the
‘upper hl ofthe dam target symbol. Sec Figs 39 and
SER Where it Becomes impractable to delineate a ar
et area in the upper al ofthe datum target symbol,
{he method of indication shown in Fig 30. 442, and
447 orbasicdimensions may bo use to define the shape
and size ofthe datum target area.
245. Establshinga Center Plan From Datum Targets,
Figure 447 is an example of a Vahaped datum fet
ture simulator esablihed fom two datum tng Inn
Inthe front view, datum targets BI and B2 ae loc
relative todatum targets Al and AZ witha basic dimen
Sion and shown as datum target ios Ia tangent plane
‘shaped datum feature simulator i required, BI and
12 would oly be shove in the top view
‘4.246 Movable Datum Target Symbol
The movable datum target symbol may be used to
indicate movement of he datum target datum feature
simulator Where datum targets establish centerpoint
ns or enter plane on an RMB basis the datum feature
Simulator moves normal tothe true profile, and mos
ble datum target symbol though no required maybe
‘sed or clarity In other cases where the datum feature
Simulator i required o move and where the movement
isnot normal o th tre profit the movable datum a
get symbol shall be used and the direction of movement
ale early defined: Se Figs 4-17 and 4-9.
424.7 Datum Target Dimensions
The location and size, where applicable of datum tr
set redefined with either basic or toleranced dimen-
Sons. If defined with bask dimensions, established
tooling or gaging tolerances apply Figures AS llustrates
Fig. 4-49. Datum Target Spheres
Ti an me ame,
=]
[Luo SEEN he
on su
apart where datum tages are located by means of basic
cnn.
248 Datum Planes Established by Datum Targets
primary datum planes established by a last thee
target pints not on a straight ine, Se Fig. 448. A sec
‘ondary datum plane is usually established by two tr
ele À tertiary’ datum planes usualy established by
Ene target. À combination of target points lines and
ras may be used Soo Fig 4:48 Forirregularorsteppest
reste datum plane should contain atleast one of
‘the datum targets. Some features, suchas curved oe ree
form surfaces, may require datum planes completly
fs rom the datum targets See Fig. 4-54,
4249 Stepped Surfaces
datum plane mayalsobeestablshedlbytargetsecated
on steppe surface, a in Figs 447 and 448 The base
“mean defines the oft betwen the age points
42410 Primary Datum Axis
Two sets of tre equally spaced datum targets may
tbe used to etablih a datum axis fora primary datum
feature. See igs. 450 and 451. The two datum target
setsarespaced.s ar apart sproccaland dimensioned
Ti an me ame,
=]
[Luo SEEN he
on su
apart where datum tages are located by means of basic
cnn.
248 Datum Planes Established by Datum Targets
primary datum planes established by a last thee
target pints not on a straight ine, Se Fig. 448. A sec
‘ondary datum plane is usually established by two tr
ele À tertiary’ datum planes usualy established by
Ene target. À combination of target points lines and
ras may be used Soo Fig 4:48 Forirregularorsteppest
reste datum plane should contain atleast one of
‘the datum targets. Some features, suchas curved oe ree
form surfaces, may require datum planes completly
fs rom the datum targets See Fig. 4-54,
4249 Stepped Surfaces
datum plane mayalsobeestablshedlbytargetsecated
on steppe surface, a in Figs 447 and 448 The base
“mean defines the oft betwen the age points
42410 Primary Datum Axis
Two sets of tre equally spaced datum targets may
tbe used to etablih a datum axis fora primary datum
feature. See igs. 450 and 451. The two datum target
setsarespaced.s ar apart sproccaland dimensioned
Fig. 4-50 Primary Datum Axis Established by Datum Target Points on a Single Cylindrical Feature
Fig. 451 Primary and Secondary Datum Established by Datum Target Lines
an Two Cylindeal Features and a Surface
from the secondary datum feature. At RMB, a center>
ing procedure used to establish the datum axis has two
sets of hr equally spaced contacting datum target
Simulators capable of moving radially at an qual rate
from a common axis. To ensure repetabiliy of the
location of the thee datum target points, à triary
datum feature may be necessary For MMB, the center.
ing procedure weet to establish the datum axis has to
sets of three equally space datum target simulators
Stata fixed radial distance based on the maximum.
material boundary. Where two cylindrical datum fea
tures are used to establish a datum ans a in Fig dl,
‘sch datum features identified with diferent eter,
1426.12 Crclar and Gindreat Targets
Circular target lines and ylingrical target ars may
tbe une to establish à datum axl on round features
Seo Fig. 452 When a datum target are
lines shown on à on:
tm target ine simutor ste same a he shape of
the surface. In Fig. 42, the datum target are simula
tors for Although AS re the same as he contour ofthe
prt sara
24.12 Secondary Datum Axis
Fora secondary datum future, a sc of thre egy
spaced tants may be used to establish à datum axis
Ste Fig #53 In this example the datum targets and the
‘contacting datum featuresimltorsareorented lative
tothe datum reference frame. At RMB, atypia center.
ing med used to establish the datum ans sa set of
re equally space contacting datum feature snl
tors capable of moving radial a an equal ae from à
commanansthat is perpendicular to teprimary datum
Fig. 451 Primary and Secondary Datum Established by Datum Target Lines
an Two Cylindeal Features and a Surface
from the secondary datum feature. At RMB, a center>
ing procedure used to establish the datum axis has two
sets of hr equally spaced contacting datum target
Simulators capable of moving radially at an qual rate
from a common axis. To ensure repetabiliy of the
location of the thee datum target points, à triary
datum feature may be necessary For MMB, the center.
ing procedure weet to establish the datum axis has to
sets of three equally space datum target simulators
Stata fixed radial distance based on the maximum.
material boundary. Where two cylindrical datum fea
tures are used to establish a datum ans a in Fig dl,
‘sch datum features identified with diferent eter,
1426.12 Crclar and Gindreat Targets
Circular target lines and ylingrical target ars may
tbe une to establish à datum axl on round features
Seo Fig. 452 When a datum target are
lines shown on à on:
tm target ine simutor ste same a he shape of
the surface. In Fig. 42, the datum target are simula
tors for Although AS re the same as he contour ofthe
prt sara
24.12 Secondary Datum Axis
Fora secondary datum future, a sc of thre egy
spaced tants may be used to establish à datum axis
Ste Fig #53 In this example the datum targets and the
‘contacting datum featuresimltorsareorented lative
tothe datum reference frame. At RMB, atypia center.
ing med used to establish the datum ans sa set of
re equally space contacting datum feature snl
tors capable of moving radial a an equal ae from à
commanansthat is perpendicular to teprimary datum
Fig.4-52. Datum Target Une and Areas
CITE}
|
Lu
453. Secondary Datum
Axis
ova Ye
plane. For MMB, the centering method used to establish
{hedatum axis hasa set of three equally paced features
seta fined radial distance Based onthe MM.
24.43 Datums Established From Complex or
Irregular Surfaces
Data targets may be usedto establish a datum rom
complex or regular surface Wherea datum reference
frame has been properly established but is planes are
unclear, the dtu reference Fame coordinate axes may
be labeled to appropriate extension or center nes an
ow. See Fig, 4-54 The datum feature symbol shoul
be attached only to identifiable datum features. Where
‘datums are stablished by arts on complex or neg
Inesurtaces the datum may be enti bya mote such
Ss DATUMAXIS Ace DATUM PLANE A.
24.14 Datum Features Established From Datum
Targets With Fewer Than Three Mutual
Perpendicular Planes
When using datum features hata defined by datum
targets in a feature control fame established By fewer
than the mutasly perpendicular planes, the datums
that are the basis forthe kate control fame shal be
CITE}
|
Lu
453. Secondary Datum
Axis
ova Ye
plane. For MMB, the centering method used to establish
{hedatum axis hasa set of three equally paced features
seta fined radial distance Based onthe MM.
24.43 Datums Established From Complex or
Irregular Surfaces
Data targets may be usedto establish a datum rom
complex or regular surface Wherea datum reference
frame has been properly established but is planes are
unclear, the dtu reference Fame coordinate axes may
be labeled to appropriate extension or center nes an
ow. See Fig, 4-54 The datum feature symbol shoul
be attached only to identifiable datum features. Where
‘datums are stablished by arts on complex or neg
Inesurtaces the datum may be enti bya mote such
Ss DATUMAXIS Ace DATUM PLANE A.
24.14 Datum Features Established From Datum
Targets With Fewer Than Three Mutual
Perpendicular Planes
When using datum features hata defined by datum
targets in a feature control fame established By fewer
than the mutasly perpendicular planes, the datums
that are the basis forthe kate control fame shal be
Fig. 454, Datum Targets Used to Establish Datum Reference Frame for Complex Part
€ FEE
ar
referenced. The tages hat provide definition for the DATUM FEATURES B AND € ARE INVOKED WHERE ONLY
Sata referenced In he feature col fame shall De. DATUM FEATURE AIS REFERENCED TO RELATE THE TARGETS.
Specified ina not, suchas, THAT ESTABLISH DATUM
€ FEE
ar
referenced. The tages hat provide definition for the DATUM FEATURES B AND € ARE INVOKED WHERE ONLY
Sata referenced In he feature col fame shall De. DATUM FEATURE AIS REFERENCED TO RELATE THE TARGETS.
Specified ina not, suchas, THAT ESTABLISH DATUM
Section 5
Tolerances of Form
51 GENERAL
‘This Section establishes the principles and methods
of dimensioning and tleranang to contol the form
fleurs.
5.2 FORM CONTROL
Form tolerances control srightns, tres, cr
Lai and cplindriciy When specifying a form toler
ance consideration mus be given 1 the contolof form
Ay established tough other tolerances such as
Size (Rule 1) erentaton rant, and profle contol:
See para. 27 and Fig 26
53. SPECIFYING FORM TOLERANCES
Form tolerances cria o function and interchange
ability are specified where the tolerances of size do nat
provide sulicent contol. A tolerance of form may be
Specified where no tolerance of size i given (in the
onto of flatnese after assembly ofthe pars). À form
tolerance specifies a zone within which the considered
feature, its ine elements, its derived median line, rs
‘derived median plane mus be contained
5.4 FORM TOLERANCES.
Form tolerances are applicable to single individual
features elements of singe features, or features of size;
therefore, form tolerances are not elated to datums The
following subparagraphs cover the particulars of the
form tolerances staighiness, Mates, heu, and
indi
543 Stralghtness
Staighines is condition where an clement ol ur
face or derived median line a staight line. À gt
nes tolerance specifies a tolerance zone within which
‘considered clement ofa surface or derived median
mus le A straightness tolerance à applied in Ihe
ew where the elements to be controlled are repre
ented bya straight ine.
5.414 Cjindrical Features. Figure 51 shows an
sample of cylindrical Kate where al rear ck
{ments ofthe surface are tobe within the specified ize
{olernce Esch lonitudinal element of haute must
Hiebetscen wo paral ines separated by the amount of
the prescribed siames tolerance and inaplanecom-
‘mon with the as ofthe unload acta mating env.
Tope ofthe feature. The feature control frame is attache
ton leader directed tothe surface or extensontine of the
Surface but ott the sie dimension. The strtightness
foleance must be less than the size tolerance and any
‘ther geometric olrances that affect he straightness of
Tine elements Since the limits of size must be respected,
{he fll straightness tolerance may not be available for
‘opposite elements in the case of wasting or bareing of
the surface. See Fig. 5 When the independency sy
ol applied othe size dimension, the requirement for
pero format MMC is removed and the frm tolerance
may be larger than the size tolerance
5.4.12 Violation of MMC Boundary. Figures 52
and 33 show examples of ylindrica features where all
‘cular elements af the surface are tobe within the spec
We size tolerance: however the boundary of perfect
form a MMC may be volte. This violation is permis
sible een the feature conta frame sauce ith
the sie dimension or attached to an extension of the
<imension line In his instance, a diameter symbol pre-
faces the tolerance value, and the tolerance ls appli
‘neither an RFS or MMC basis, Where necessary and
‘when netusedinconjunction wihanorienaionor pos
ton tolerance, the straightness tolerance may be greater
than the size tolerance. Where the straightness tolerance
ds sed in conjunction wilh an orientation tolerance or
position tolerance value the specified straghtnes toler
Once value shall nt be greater than the specified orien-
{ation of positon tolerance vale, The cllctive ect
‘of size a form variation can produce a vital cond
ton or outer or inner boundary equal to the MMC size
plas the straightness tolerance When applied on an RES
bass asin Fig 52, the maximum strains tolerance
is the specified tolerance When appli on an MMC
bass asin Fig. 5, the maximum tightness tolerance
Je ie spec tolerance plas the amount the actual
Toca sie asthe feature departs fom ts MMC size, The
derived medion Inc of am etal featur at MMC must
Tie within a cylindrical tolerance zone 3 specified. As
‚ich actual local size depots from MMC, an incrense in
{he local diameter of he tolerance zone that equal o
{the amount of uch departure I allowed. Each calar
clement ofthe surfe (hat, stu local sie) must be
‘within he specified mis of size
Tolerances of Form
51 GENERAL
‘This Section establishes the principles and methods
of dimensioning and tleranang to contol the form
fleurs.
5.2 FORM CONTROL
Form tolerances control srightns, tres, cr
Lai and cplindriciy When specifying a form toler
ance consideration mus be given 1 the contolof form
Ay established tough other tolerances such as
Size (Rule 1) erentaton rant, and profle contol:
See para. 27 and Fig 26
53. SPECIFYING FORM TOLERANCES
Form tolerances cria o function and interchange
ability are specified where the tolerances of size do nat
provide sulicent contol. A tolerance of form may be
Specified where no tolerance of size i given (in the
onto of flatnese after assembly ofthe pars). À form
tolerance specifies a zone within which the considered
feature, its ine elements, its derived median line, rs
‘derived median plane mus be contained
5.4 FORM TOLERANCES.
Form tolerances are applicable to single individual
features elements of singe features, or features of size;
therefore, form tolerances are not elated to datums The
following subparagraphs cover the particulars of the
form tolerances staighiness, Mates, heu, and
indi
543 Stralghtness
Staighines is condition where an clement ol ur
face or derived median line a staight line. À gt
nes tolerance specifies a tolerance zone within which
‘considered clement ofa surface or derived median
mus le A straightness tolerance à applied in Ihe
ew where the elements to be controlled are repre
ented bya straight ine.
5.414 Cjindrical Features. Figure 51 shows an
sample of cylindrical Kate where al rear ck
{ments ofthe surface are tobe within the specified ize
{olernce Esch lonitudinal element of haute must
Hiebetscen wo paral ines separated by the amount of
the prescribed siames tolerance and inaplanecom-
‘mon with the as ofthe unload acta mating env.
Tope ofthe feature. The feature control frame is attache
ton leader directed tothe surface or extensontine of the
Surface but ott the sie dimension. The strtightness
foleance must be less than the size tolerance and any
‘ther geometric olrances that affect he straightness of
Tine elements Since the limits of size must be respected,
{he fll straightness tolerance may not be available for
‘opposite elements in the case of wasting or bareing of
the surface. See Fig. 5 When the independency sy
ol applied othe size dimension, the requirement for
pero format MMC is removed and the frm tolerance
may be larger than the size tolerance
5.4.12 Violation of MMC Boundary. Figures 52
and 33 show examples of ylindrica features where all
‘cular elements af the surface are tobe within the spec
We size tolerance: however the boundary of perfect
form a MMC may be volte. This violation is permis
sible een the feature conta frame sauce ith
the sie dimension or attached to an extension of the
<imension line In his instance, a diameter symbol pre-
faces the tolerance value, and the tolerance ls appli
‘neither an RFS or MMC basis, Where necessary and
‘when netusedinconjunction wihanorienaionor pos
ton tolerance, the straightness tolerance may be greater
than the size tolerance. Where the straightness tolerance
ds sed in conjunction wilh an orientation tolerance or
position tolerance value the specified straghtnes toler
Once value shall nt be greater than the specified orien-
{ation of positon tolerance vale, The cllctive ect
‘of size a form variation can produce a vital cond
ton or outer or inner boundary equal to the MMC size
plas the straightness tolerance When applied on an RES
bass asin Fig 52, the maximum strains tolerance
is the specified tolerance When appli on an MMC
bass asin Fig. 5, the maximum tightness tolerance
Je ie spec tolerance plas the amount the actual
Toca sie asthe feature departs fom ts MMC size, The
derived medion Inc of am etal featur at MMC must
Tie within a cylindrical tolerance zone 3 specified. As
‚ich actual local size depots from MMC, an incrense in
{he local diameter of he tolerance zone that equal o
{the amount of uch departure I allowed. Each calar
clement ofthe surfe (hat, stu local sie) must be
‘within he specified mis of size
Fig. 5-1. Specifying Staightness of Surface Elements
Fig.5-2. Specifying Straightness RES.
Th me ame,
Tis an me aon
polen
5413 Appliedon a Uni Basis. Saighinss maybe
apple on a uni bass as a mean of limi an abrupt
trace Vario sein a viel short length of the
Kate. See Fig. Sl. When using un conto on a fr
ture of ie, a maximum limit is pic speed to
Tithe relatively lage theoretical varistions thot may
result Bft unmet, I the unt vario appears
553 "bow" in Ih toleranced fate, and the “bow” is
Allowed a continue athe same rate or sever unis, the
‘veal okerance variation may sul inan usa
port Figure 5 dusts the posable condition where
Straighins per unt length given in Fig 5-4 used alone
Ge. srighies or the on snot speci),
5.414 Stalghtness of Une Elements. Figure 56
strates th use of sraighiess tolerance on a Nat sur
face. Straighines may be applied to contol ne elements
[9053
81604 oer teu
he dred mean ing of he os sr
‘atin att noi à enc ees
{hin te Speco mis sm
inasingledircionona Natsurfac may alsobespplied
in two diecione ae shown. Where funcion requires
hein elements to be related 1 a datum featur) pre
file ofa ne should be specifi related to datum Sot
Re.
542 Flatness
Flames is the condition of a surfe or derived
‘median plane having all elements in one plane À at
fess tolerance specifies a tolerance zone defined by
two parallel planes within which the surface or derived
medien plane must ie When fatness tolerance pec:
ied on à sure, the feature contol Frame i attache
6 à leader directed tothe surface or to an extension
line ofthe surface Its placed in a view where thes
face elements tobe controled ar represente by à line.
See Fig, 57. With ltnes of a surface, where the con.
Side surfaces asociatd with asin dimension, the
fatness tolerance must be ls than the size tolerance
‘When the independency symbol is applied 10 Ihe si
¿lesion the requirement for perfect form at MMC is
removed ad he form olerance maybe larger han the
Stern
5.4.2.4 Applicaton of Flatness RFS, MMC, or LMC to
Nonelingrical Features, As an extencion othe prince
ples of para.54.12, fatness may be applied on an RFS,
NIMC, oF LMC basis to noncplindrc! features of size
In this instance, the derived medion plane must ie in
à tolerance zone between o parallel planes separted
ty the amount ofthe tolerance. Fsture contol rame
Fig.5-2. Specifying Straightness RES.
Th me ame,
Tis an me aon
polen
5413 Appliedon a Uni Basis. Saighinss maybe
apple on a uni bass as a mean of limi an abrupt
trace Vario sein a viel short length of the
Kate. See Fig. Sl. When using un conto on a fr
ture of ie, a maximum limit is pic speed to
Tithe relatively lage theoretical varistions thot may
result Bft unmet, I the unt vario appears
553 "bow" in Ih toleranced fate, and the “bow” is
Allowed a continue athe same rate or sever unis, the
‘veal okerance variation may sul inan usa
port Figure 5 dusts the posable condition where
Straighins per unt length given in Fig 5-4 used alone
Ge. srighies or the on snot speci),
5.414 Stalghtness of Une Elements. Figure 56
strates th use of sraighiess tolerance on a Nat sur
face. Straighines may be applied to contol ne elements
[9053
81604 oer teu
he dred mean ing of he os sr
‘atin att noi à enc ees
{hin te Speco mis sm
inasingledircionona Natsurfac may alsobespplied
in two diecione ae shown. Where funcion requires
hein elements to be related 1 a datum featur) pre
file ofa ne should be specifi related to datum Sot
Re.
542 Flatness
Flames is the condition of a surfe or derived
‘median plane having all elements in one plane À at
fess tolerance specifies a tolerance zone defined by
two parallel planes within which the surface or derived
medien plane must ie When fatness tolerance pec:
ied on à sure, the feature contol Frame i attache
6 à leader directed tothe surface or to an extension
line ofthe surface Its placed in a view where thes
face elements tobe controled ar represente by à line.
See Fig, 57. With ltnes of a surface, where the con.
Side surfaces asociatd with asin dimension, the
fatness tolerance must be ls than the size tolerance
‘When the independency symbol is applied 10 Ihe si
¿lesion the requirement for perfect form at MMC is
removed ad he form olerance maybe larger han the
Stern
5.4.2.4 Applicaton of Flatness RFS, MMC, or LMC to
Nonelingrical Features, As an extencion othe prince
ples of para.54.12, fatness may be applied on an RFS,
NIMC, oF LMC basis to noncplindrc! features of size
In this instance, the derived medion plane must ie in
à tolerance zone between o parallel planes separted
ty the amount ofthe tolerance. Fsture contol rame
Fig. 5-3. Specifying Straighiness at MMC
Tobe ame
Be
Fi any
EYES wes tad ms
Fig. 5-4 Specifying Straightness Per Unit Length With Specified Total Straighiness, Both RFS,
Ta ono Soe
Boon
Sn
Tobe ame
Be
Fi any
EYES wes tad ms
Fig. 5-4 Specifying Straightness Per Unit Length With Specified Total Straighiness, Both RFS,
Ta ono Soe
Boon
Sn
Fig.5:5. Possible Results of Speciing traightness
Per Unit Length RFS, With No Specified Total
010408
16
Fig. 5:7 Specifying Flatness ofa Surface
jo
gan]
5-6. Speciying Straightness ofa Fat Surface
Median
Plane — RES.
placement and arrangement as described in pra. 541.2
Spply exept the diameter symbol isnot used, since the
tolerance zones noncylindrkal See Fig. 88 and 59.
5422 Applied on Unit Basis. Flaines may be
apple on aunt bass as means of Imitingan abrupt
Surface variation vhin a relative small re of the
feature. The unit variation is used either in combina
tion with a specified total variation, or alone. Caution
Should be exercised chen using uni control alone for
the reasons given in para, 54.1. Since ftnessnvaves
surface are, the sizeof he unit are ea square an
25 25 ora Secular aren 254 diameter) i spi o
9
the right ofthe fatness tolerance separated y a slash,
For example,
[e [0087335]
543 Cirulaiy Raundness)
‘Creat isa condition o surface where
(a) or à featur other than a sphere, ll points ofthe
surface interected by any plane perpendicular to an
suis spine (curved line ar equidistant from hat axis
espino
Per Unit Length RFS, With No Specified Total
010408
16
Fig. 5:7 Specifying Flatness ofa Surface
jo
gan]
5-6. Speciying Straightness ofa Fat Surface
Median
Plane — RES.
placement and arrangement as described in pra. 541.2
Spply exept the diameter symbol isnot used, since the
tolerance zones noncylindrkal See Fig. 88 and 59.
5422 Applied on Unit Basis. Flaines may be
apple on aunt bass as means of Imitingan abrupt
Surface variation vhin a relative small re of the
feature. The unit variation is used either in combina
tion with a specified total variation, or alone. Caution
Should be exercised chen using uni control alone for
the reasons given in para, 54.1. Since ftnessnvaves
surface are, the sizeof he unit are ea square an
25 25 ora Secular aren 254 diameter) i spi o
9
the right ofthe fatness tolerance separated y a slash,
For example,
[e [0087335]
543 Cirulaiy Raundness)
‘Creat isa condition o surface where
(a) or à featur other than a sphere, ll points ofthe
surface interected by any plane perpendicular to an
suis spine (curved line ar equidistant from hat axis
espino
Fig. 5.9. SpeciingFltress
ofa Derived Median Plane at MMC
To he ame
1820 on
‘The dove mean Bane of he ato aa cn
{agate o purl pues al
Mon
(0) Tha mamen ice of he pat wn ptt
eats Sa erly wn
co
(© in pe ar mac mes 8
Settee pot oe
(6 win mo pa at minimum Miss (1529. o
TRS ar as o ©
(0) or a sphere, al points of the surface intersected
by any plane pasing trough a common center are
quid fom hat center
A circularity tolerance species a tolerance zone
bounded by two concentric cles within which each
eur clement of the surface mat li, and applies
Independently at any plane described in subpar (3)
and (b) above. See Figs 510 and 511. The cular
tolerance must be less than the size tolerance and other
‘gometric tolerances that affect the ica of he es
fre excep fr those art subject to resta variation
forthe independency principle Se pars. 33.
Seon ait
544 Cindy
Cplindricity sa condition of a surface of revolution
in which all points o he surface are equidistant rom à
common ax. À cylindric tolerance species a toler:
ce zone bounded by two concent elinders within
‘which the surface must I. In the case of elindriy,
‘unlike that of declan the tolerance applies simula:
‘neously to both circular and longitudinal clement of
the surface (he entire sure) See Fig, 5:12. The leader
ftom the featur contol frame may be directed o ther
view. The eyindricity tolerance must be les than the
tne tolerance except parts subject 1 rete variation
forthe independency principle
‘hind Slam nes an pero» int
5:5 APPLICATION OF FREE-STATE SYMBOL,
Freestate variation is the distortion af à part after
removal of frees applied during manufacture This dis
{orton is principally dueto weight and iblity ofthe
ofa Derived Median Plane at MMC
To he ame
1820 on
‘The dove mean Bane of he ato aa cn
{agate o purl pues al
Mon
(0) Tha mamen ice of he pat wn ptt
eats Sa erly wn
co
(© in pe ar mac mes 8
Settee pot oe
(6 win mo pa at minimum Miss (1529. o
TRS ar as o ©
(0) or a sphere, al points of the surface intersected
by any plane pasing trough a common center are
quid fom hat center
A circularity tolerance species a tolerance zone
bounded by two concentric cles within which each
eur clement of the surface mat li, and applies
Independently at any plane described in subpar (3)
and (b) above. See Figs 510 and 511. The cular
tolerance must be less than the size tolerance and other
‘gometric tolerances that affect the ica of he es
fre excep fr those art subject to resta variation
forthe independency principle Se pars. 33.
Seon ait
544 Cindy
Cplindricity sa condition of a surface of revolution
in which all points o he surface are equidistant rom à
common ax. À cylindric tolerance species a toler:
ce zone bounded by two concent elinders within
‘which the surface must I. In the case of elindriy,
‘unlike that of declan the tolerance applies simula:
‘neously to both circular and longitudinal clement of
the surface (he entire sure) See Fig, 5:12. The leader
ftom the featur contol frame may be directed o ther
view. The eyindricity tolerance must be les than the
tne tolerance except parts subject 1 rete variation
forthe independency principle
‘hind Slam nes an pero» int
5:5 APPLICATION OF FREE-STATE SYMBOL,
Freestate variation is the distortion af à part after
removal of frees applied during manufacture This dis
{orton is principally dueto weight and iblity ofthe
Fig. 5-10. Speciying Circula fora Cynder or Cone
Tem
aa]
Fig.5-11. Specifying Cirulaiy ofa Sphere
Fig. 5:12 Spectying Clinic,
err
spa
ein)
|
Tis or be dy
part and the release of intemal stress resulting om
Friction. part of this Rind (eg a par seth a very
thin wall in proportion tots
à nonrigid par In some cases,
the port meet its tolerance requirements Wh
fre state Se Fig 513 In hrs, may be necessary o
simulate the mating par interne to verify individual
Sr related feature tolerance. This done by retaining
the appropriate feature, sch asthe datum features in
Fi, S14 The retaining forces are hose that would
x oerid inthe assembly or functioning ofthe par
However, if the dimensions and tolerances ae met in
the fre tale, is usualy not necessary To restrain he
Port unless the effect of subsequent retaining forces
fn the concerned fetures could cause othe features of
the parto exce specified limits, Freestate variation
Tem
aa]
Fig.5-11. Specifying Cirulaiy ofa Sphere
Fig. 5:12 Spectying Clinic,
err
spa
ein)
|
Tis or be dy
part and the release of intemal stress resulting om
Friction. part of this Rind (eg a par seth a very
thin wall in proportion tots
à nonrigid par In some cases,
the port meet its tolerance requirements Wh
fre state Se Fig 513 In hrs, may be necessary o
simulate the mating par interne to verify individual
Sr related feature tolerance. This done by retaining
the appropriate feature, sch asthe datum features in
Fi, S14 The retaining forces are hose that would
x oerid inthe assembly or functioning ofthe par
However, if the dimensions and tolerances ae met in
the fre tale, is usualy not necessary To restrain he
Port unless the effect of subsequent retaining forces
fn the concerned fetures could cause othe features of
the parto exce specified limits, Freestate variation
Fig. 5-13 Speciing Ceuta
ina Fee State With Average Diameter
Tim te am
Ano
son pe pas Go er =
of nonrigid. parts may be controlled as described in
paras 551 through 533.
5.5.1 Specifying Geometric Tolerances on Features
‘Subjetto Free State Variation
Where an individual form or location tolerance is
pple! o a feature nthe fee stat, specify the max
‘um allowable free-sate variation with an appropriate
featurecontol fame See Fig 513 There sutesymbol
‘nay be placed within the feature control fame, low
ing the tolerance and any modifs clarity ave ta
‘equiement o a drawing containing restrain feature
ote, orto separate restat requirement from asso-
ated features having retrained requirements. Soc
Figs 321 and +.
5.52 Specifying Geometik Tolerances on Features to
Restrained
Where geometric tolerances ae tobe verified with the
partina stained condition select and int the fea
{ures (pilot diameter, bosses, Manges et) tobe used as
dam features, as applicable. There may be some cases
‘where fro profile tolerances may brain Sin
these surfaces may be sujet lo frite variation,
ina Fee State With Average Diameter
Tim te am
Ano
son pe pas Go er =
of nonrigid. parts may be controlled as described in
paras 551 through 533.
5.5.1 Specifying Geometric Tolerances on Features
‘Subjetto Free State Variation
Where an individual form or location tolerance is
pple! o a feature nthe fee stat, specify the max
‘um allowable free-sate variation with an appropriate
featurecontol fame See Fig 513 There sutesymbol
‘nay be placed within the feature control fame, low
ing the tolerance and any modifs clarity ave ta
‘equiement o a drawing containing restrain feature
ote, orto separate restat requirement from asso-
ated features having retrained requirements. Soc
Figs 321 and +.
5.52 Specifying Geometik Tolerances on Features to
Restrained
Where geometric tolerances ae tobe verified with the
partina stained condition select and int the fea
{ures (pilot diameter, bosses, Manges et) tobe used as
dam features, as applicable. There may be some cases
‘where fro profile tolerances may brain Sin
these surfaces may be sujet lo frite variation,
ls necessary to speciy the maximum force necessary
to restrain ach of hem. Determine Ihe amount o tht
traning or holding forces and other requirements
ces to simulate expected assembly conditions.
Speciy nthe drawing tht if westrsned fo this cond
ton, the remainder athe pat or certain festes there
shall be within tte tolerances Soe Fig. 5-14
553 Average Diamet
An average diameters the average fsevealiamet-
sic measurements across a circular or cylindrical fete
ture Normal, enough atleast fur) measureen’s are
taken o ensure the etablshment ofan average dime
ter If protic an average diameter may be determined
a peripheral tape measurement. When form control,
such as circularity, specified in fee sate for a dreu-
[br oreylinrical feature, the pertinent diameter is qual-
fic with the abbreviation AVG See Fig 513 Specying
(rl onthe Busi ofan average ameter ona non.
rigid par is necesary to ensure that the actual diam-
‘er ofthe feature canbe restrained to the desired shape
st assembly Note that the festa cular tle
nce i greater than the size toleance on the diameter.
Figure 513, isrations a) and (simplified by
showing only two measurements, give the permissible
‘ameter in the fre sate fortwo extreme conditions
‘of maximum average diameter and minimum average
diameter respectively. The sme method applis when
the average diameter is anywhere between maximum
and minimum iis
to restrain ach of hem. Determine Ihe amount o tht
traning or holding forces and other requirements
ces to simulate expected assembly conditions.
Speciy nthe drawing tht if westrsned fo this cond
ton, the remainder athe pat or certain festes there
shall be within tte tolerances Soe Fig. 5-14
553 Average Diamet
An average diameters the average fsevealiamet-
sic measurements across a circular or cylindrical fete
ture Normal, enough atleast fur) measureen’s are
taken o ensure the etablshment ofan average dime
ter If protic an average diameter may be determined
a peripheral tape measurement. When form control,
such as circularity, specified in fee sate for a dreu-
[br oreylinrical feature, the pertinent diameter is qual-
fic with the abbreviation AVG See Fig 513 Specying
(rl onthe Busi ofan average ameter ona non.
rigid par is necesary to ensure that the actual diam-
‘er ofthe feature canbe restrained to the desired shape
st assembly Note that the festa cular tle
nce i greater than the size toleance on the diameter.
Figure 513, isrations a) and (simplified by
showing only two measurements, give the permissible
‘ameter in the fre sate fortwo extreme conditions
‘of maximum average diameter and minimum average
diameter respectively. The sme method applis when
the average diameter is anywhere between maximum
and minimum iis
Section 6
Tolerances
61 GENERAL
‘This Section establishes the principles and methods
of dimensioning and tolerancing to control orientation
of features.
62. ORIENTATION CONTROL,
An orientation tolerance controls parallel, perpen:
«licua, and all other angular relationships. Nowe that
an rietation tolerance, when applied 0 plane sur
foe, conte flatness to the extent of the orientation
tolerance: When the Notes contol in the orientation
tolerance isnot suchen! a parte tes tolerance
shouldbe considered. An orientation tolerance doesnot
<ontol the location of fetus. When spclyingan or
nation tolerance consideration must be given o the
Control of erentation already established trough other
tolerances such a location runout, nd profile controla
Sen 78
63 ORIENTATION SYMBOLS,
‘Thereaethrecorietationtelatinshipsandthreesym-
bot define these relationships. The thee orientation
relationship ae noted in paras 63.1 Bough 63.3,
634 Angularty
Angulrity is the condition of à sure, featur’
(enter plane, orfetur à xi at any specified ange fom
$3 datum plane or datum ais Sor Fig
632 Parallels
Palen isthe condition of à surface or features
center plane equidistant ata poinistroma datum plane:
fa feature’ ais, equidistant along its eng rom ene
‘more datum plone or datum ans See i.
633 Perpendiclaiy
Perpendicularity is the condition ofa surface, fe
tures center plane, or features axis ata Fight angle à
tm plane or datum xi. Se Fig.
64 SPECIFYING ORIENTATION TOLERANCES
‘When specifying an orientation tleance, th consid
red entre shal be elated to one or more datums, See
Figs 4- and 64, Orientation tolerances are constrained
of Orientation
only in rotational degrees of freedom relative to the
feferenced datums: they are not constrained in the
ltansatona degrees of freedom, Thus, with orient
tion tolerances, even in those instances where datum
features may constrain ll degrees of freedom the toler
ance zone only ovens to that datum reference frame
Sufiient datar features should be referenced to con
rain the required rotational degrees of freedom Ut the
primary datum feature alone does not constain uf-
int degrees of freedom, additonal datum features
may be spi.
6.4.1 Orientation Tolerance Zone
An orientation tolerance specifies zone within which
he considered feature, its ine elements, sais ori
center plane must be conbined
642 Orientation Tolerance
An orentaion tolerance specifies one of the following:
la) a tolerance zone defined by two poral planes
at the speed basic ange rom, parallel to, oF perpen
cular o one or more datum planes or à dakum ais,
thin which the surface or enter plane of the consid.
red feature must. See Figs 6-1 through 63.
(9) a tolerance zone defined by two parallel planes
at the specified basic angle rom, parle to, oF perp
licuar o one or more datum planes or à datum asis,
‘within eich the axis ofthe considered Fate must ie
See Figs 66 and 67.
Te) 3 cmd tolerance zone at the speci basic
ange rom, parallel to, or perpendicular to one or more
tum planesora datum ans, within which he axis the
considered feature must he. See Figs 68 tough 61,
a) a tolerance zone defined by two parallel
‘he specified bay angle from, parallel 1, or perpen
‘cular o datum plane or ani within which the Hine
“lement ofthe surface mus ie, Se Figs: 616 and 6-17
643 Tolerance Zones
‘Tolerance zones apply 40 the fll extent of the es
tore, unless cherie indicate Where tx à require.
ment to control only individual line elements of à
Surface, a qualifying notation, such as EACH ELEMENT
Or EACH RADIAL ELEMENT, is added othe drawing. See
Figs 616 and 6-17. Ths permits control of Individual
clemente of the surface Independent in ration 10
‘he datum and does not lint the ttl surface o an
Tolerances
61 GENERAL
‘This Section establishes the principles and methods
of dimensioning and tolerancing to control orientation
of features.
62. ORIENTATION CONTROL,
An orientation tolerance controls parallel, perpen:
«licua, and all other angular relationships. Nowe that
an rietation tolerance, when applied 0 plane sur
foe, conte flatness to the extent of the orientation
tolerance: When the Notes contol in the orientation
tolerance isnot suchen! a parte tes tolerance
shouldbe considered. An orientation tolerance doesnot
<ontol the location of fetus. When spclyingan or
nation tolerance consideration must be given o the
Control of erentation already established trough other
tolerances such a location runout, nd profile controla
Sen 78
63 ORIENTATION SYMBOLS,
‘Thereaethrecorietationtelatinshipsandthreesym-
bot define these relationships. The thee orientation
relationship ae noted in paras 63.1 Bough 63.3,
634 Angularty
Angulrity is the condition of à sure, featur’
(enter plane, orfetur à xi at any specified ange fom
$3 datum plane or datum ais Sor Fig
632 Parallels
Palen isthe condition of à surface or features
center plane equidistant ata poinistroma datum plane:
fa feature’ ais, equidistant along its eng rom ene
‘more datum plone or datum ans See i.
633 Perpendiclaiy
Perpendicularity is the condition ofa surface, fe
tures center plane, or features axis ata Fight angle à
tm plane or datum xi. Se Fig.
64 SPECIFYING ORIENTATION TOLERANCES
‘When specifying an orientation tleance, th consid
red entre shal be elated to one or more datums, See
Figs 4- and 64, Orientation tolerances are constrained
of Orientation
only in rotational degrees of freedom relative to the
feferenced datums: they are not constrained in the
ltansatona degrees of freedom, Thus, with orient
tion tolerances, even in those instances where datum
features may constrain ll degrees of freedom the toler
ance zone only ovens to that datum reference frame
Sufiient datar features should be referenced to con
rain the required rotational degrees of freedom Ut the
primary datum feature alone does not constain uf-
int degrees of freedom, additonal datum features
may be spi.
6.4.1 Orientation Tolerance Zone
An orientation tolerance specifies zone within which
he considered feature, its ine elements, sais ori
center plane must be conbined
642 Orientation Tolerance
An orentaion tolerance specifies one of the following:
la) a tolerance zone defined by two poral planes
at the speed basic ange rom, parallel to, oF perpen
cular o one or more datum planes or à dakum ais,
thin which the surface or enter plane of the consid.
red feature must. See Figs 6-1 through 63.
(9) a tolerance zone defined by two parallel planes
at the specified basic angle rom, parle to, oF perp
licuar o one or more datum planes or à datum asis,
‘within eich the axis ofthe considered Fate must ie
See Figs 66 and 67.
Te) 3 cmd tolerance zone at the speci basic
ange rom, parallel to, or perpendicular to one or more
tum planesora datum ans, within which he axis the
considered feature must he. See Figs 68 tough 61,
a) a tolerance zone defined by two parallel
‘he specified bay angle from, parallel 1, or perpen
‘cular o datum plane or ani within which the Hine
“lement ofthe surface mus ie, Se Figs: 616 and 6-17
643 Tolerance Zones
‘Tolerance zones apply 40 the fll extent of the es
tore, unless cherie indicate Where tx à require.
ment to control only individual line elements of à
Surface, a qualifying notation, such as EACH ELEMENT
Or EACH RADIAL ELEMENT, is added othe drawing. See
Figs 616 and 6-17. Ths permits control of Individual
clemente of the surface Independent in ration 10
‘he datum and does not lint the ttl surface o an
Fig 6-1 Speciying Angulari fora Plane Surface 8.62 Specifying Parallelism fora Plane Surface
Th me an Tis ote aoe
EE
Datum pan A
Ss
1]
L
5
F
‘atch e Sam pam h ng sure st ste to pat pco
po saco mu be win Be Speco bts
Fig. 63 Specifying Perpedicularityfora Pane Surface
Tas on Sang
een at tn oa ie ara
w
Th me an Tis ote aoe
EE
Datum pan A
Ss
1]
L
5
F
‘atch e Sam pam h ng sure st ste to pat pco
po saco mu be win Be Speco bts
Fig. 63 Specifying Perpedicularityfora Pane Surface
Tas on Sang
een at tn oa ie ara
w
Fig. 6-4. Speciying Orientation fora Plane Surface Relative to Two Datums
== x _ E
Mac y ~
Fi8.6:5_Specitying Perpendicular fora Fig. 66 Specifying Angularty for an Axis
Center Plane (Feature RFS) ‘Feature RFS).
ay
== x _ E
Mac y ~
Fi8.6:5_Specitying Perpendicular fora Fig. 66 Specifying Angularty for an Axis
Center Plane (Feature RFS) ‘Feature RFS).
ay
Fig. 67 Speciing Paallism for an Axis
Feature RES)
Fig. 68 Specifying Angularty for an Axis
(Feature RFS)
Th oo be Sane
‘encompassing zone. Although orientation tolerances
Se only constrained in otalional degrees of freedom
relative tothe referenced datums, the notation of EACH
RADIAL ELEMENT ads à requirement forthe tolerance
and o be constrained in location relative to he axis
from which the radial elements emanate, Tolerances for
individual elements may also be specified using a ine.
profile tolerance.
64.4 Application of Zero Tolerance at MMC
Where no variations of orientation are permitted at
the MMC size limit of feste of iz, the tur com
tel frame contains a zero for the tolerance, modified by
the symbol for MMC. Ifthe feature of sizes atts MMC
limit size, must be perfect in entation with respect,
to he datum. A tolerance can exist only asthe feature
of size departs om MMC. The allowable orientation
tolerance equal 1 he amount of such departure See
Figs 6 Mandó15 These pinciplsarealso apple to
‘estes ol size toleranced fr orentaton at LMC. There
‘may be applications where the fll additional tolerance
‘Mlowable may not meet the funcional requirements,
In such css, the amount of ational tolerance may be
limited by stating a MAX following the MMC mode
Seg. 68
164.5 Explanation of Orientation Tolerance at MMC
An orientation tolerance applied at MMC may be
explain in terms ofthe surface or the feature a. In
rai cases of extremo form deviation (thin ns of
Size afthe ole, the tolerance in terms of the stur aus
‘ay not be ex equivale! to de flerance in terms
ff the surface. In such cases, the surco interpretation
‘hall ake precedence asin Pg 76.
(a) Terms fe Sure fa Hoe, While maintaining
the specified size limits ofthe hole, no clement of the
hole surface shall be inside a theoretical boundary (v
{ual condition) oriented o the datum reference rame,
Seog 76,
To) Terms of the Axis of à Hale. Where a hoe is at
MMC (minimum diameter) the feature axis must
fall within a eylindrkal tolerance zone whose axis
oriented to the datum reference frame. The dame
Ser of this zone l equal tothe orientation tolerance
Feature RES)
Fig. 68 Specifying Angularty for an Axis
(Feature RFS)
Th oo be Sane
‘encompassing zone. Although orientation tolerances
Se only constrained in otalional degrees of freedom
relative tothe referenced datums, the notation of EACH
RADIAL ELEMENT ads à requirement forthe tolerance
and o be constrained in location relative to he axis
from which the radial elements emanate, Tolerances for
individual elements may also be specified using a ine.
profile tolerance.
64.4 Application of Zero Tolerance at MMC
Where no variations of orientation are permitted at
the MMC size limit of feste of iz, the tur com
tel frame contains a zero for the tolerance, modified by
the symbol for MMC. Ifthe feature of sizes atts MMC
limit size, must be perfect in entation with respect,
to he datum. A tolerance can exist only asthe feature
of size departs om MMC. The allowable orientation
tolerance equal 1 he amount of such departure See
Figs 6 Mandó15 These pinciplsarealso apple to
‘estes ol size toleranced fr orentaton at LMC. There
‘may be applications where the fll additional tolerance
‘Mlowable may not meet the funcional requirements,
In such css, the amount of ational tolerance may be
limited by stating a MAX following the MMC mode
Seg. 68
164.5 Explanation of Orientation Tolerance at MMC
An orientation tolerance applied at MMC may be
explain in terms ofthe surface or the feature a. In
rai cases of extremo form deviation (thin ns of
Size afthe ole, the tolerance in terms of the stur aus
‘ay not be ex equivale! to de flerance in terms
ff the surface. In such cases, the surco interpretation
‘hall ake precedence asin Pg 76.
(a) Terms fe Sure fa Hoe, While maintaining
the specified size limits ofthe hole, no clement of the
hole surface shall be inside a theoretical boundary (v
{ual condition) oriented o the datum reference rame,
Seog 76,
To) Terms of the Axis of à Hale. Where a hoe is at
MMC (minimum diameter) the feature axis must
fall within a eylindrkal tolerance zone whose axis
oriented to the datum reference frame. The dame
Ser of this zone l equal tothe orientation tolerance
Fig. 69 Speciying Parallelism for an As
(Goth Feature and Datum Feature RFS)
Fig. 6-10 _Spectying Parallelism for an Axis
(Feature at MMC and Datum Feature RES)
To be ame,
$153
02
See Fig. 6-14 Is only where the hole is at MMC that
the specified tolerance zone applies, Where the unre:
(ed actual mating envelope sizeof the hole i larger
than MMC, additional orientation tolerance els. This
increase of orientation tolerance is qual tothe dir.
cece between the specific maximum materi ond
tion mit ofsize (MC) and he unrelated actual mating
‘envelope size ofthe hole. Where the unrlated actual
mating envelope size i lange han MMC, the specified
‘rlentation tolerance for a hole may be exceed and still
sy function and interchangeably requirements
65 TANGENT PLANE
Where ts deste to contol a tangent plane estab
lished by the contacting points of a surface, he tangent
men
91888 00m
plane symbols added inthe feature control frame afer
estate tolerance. See Fig 6-18. Where a tangent plane
symbol specified eth a geometric tolerance, the ste
rest ofthe folernced feature s not controlled by the
frometic tolerance: Where the tangent plane rocks
‘ona convex surface, soe ASME YIAS-IM for methods
‘of verification,
(6.6 ALTERNATIVE PRACTICE
san alerte practice, he angulariy symbol may
be used to contol parallel and perpendicular relation
ships. The tolerance zones derived are the ame as those
‘seit in paro. 642 Soe FiO
(Goth Feature and Datum Feature RFS)
Fig. 6-10 _Spectying Parallelism for an Axis
(Feature at MMC and Datum Feature RES)
To be ame,
$153
02
See Fig. 6-14 Is only where the hole is at MMC that
the specified tolerance zone applies, Where the unre:
(ed actual mating envelope sizeof the hole i larger
than MMC, additional orientation tolerance els. This
increase of orientation tolerance is qual tothe dir.
cece between the specific maximum materi ond
tion mit ofsize (MC) and he unrelated actual mating
‘envelope size ofthe hole. Where the unrlated actual
mating envelope size i lange han MMC, the specified
‘rlentation tolerance for a hole may be exceed and still
sy function and interchangeably requirements
65 TANGENT PLANE
Where ts deste to contol a tangent plane estab
lished by the contacting points of a surface, he tangent
men
91888 00m
plane symbols added inthe feature control frame afer
estate tolerance. See Fig 6-18. Where a tangent plane
symbol specified eth a geometric tolerance, the ste
rest ofthe folernced feature s not controlled by the
frometic tolerance: Where the tangent plane rocks
‘ona convex surface, soe ASME YIAS-IM for methods
‘of verification,
(6.6 ALTERNATIVE PRACTICE
san alerte practice, he angulariy symbol may
be used to contol parallel and perpendicular relation
ships. The tolerance zones derived are the ame as those
‘seit in paro. 642 Soe FiO
axis ata
Fig 6-11 Speciying Perpendicular or
Fig. 612 Speciying Perpendicular or
Eee Do en ng
rn =
6 [sos@lAl
LLisoa]aj
gui
En — a
“1 03 Someter Fe ar tolerance zone
= h
Er} an oe
UN plane A: Le
=
oe
a
re Siena aes
Besen
ee SES
ances wen
Seat he
LE mat oe seri Do spec siete ot
peon
a
Bern,
m
Fig 6-11 Speciying Perpendicular or
Fig. 612 Speciying Perpendicular or
Eee Do en ng
rn =
6 [sos@lAl
LLisoa]aj
gui
En — a
“1 03 Someter Fe ar tolerance zone
= h
Er} an oe
UN plane A: Le
=
oe
a
re Siena aes
Besen
ee SES
ances wen
Seat he
LE mat oe seri Do spec siete ot
peon
a
Bern,
m
Fig. 613 Speciing Perpendicularty for an Ads Showing Acceptance Boundary (PIN or Boss at MMC)
Ths on he Gog Noon Be
Pt 1300 yet cen
cm a tr ae Sone
are
y
Mean (9) Tt mania damatr pin min pr onen is shown amr win 1034 Str pc
{8 wit De pra mana cami (12900) sm sci wat wp OS vr
() BARRE st inn dar (15300), and ario in pony may ase 0008
‘oc
wart wi be Bsa
Ths on he Gog Noon Be
Pt 1300 yet cen
cm a tr ae Sone
are
y
Mean (9) Tt mania damatr pin min pr onen is shown amr win 1034 Str pc
{8 wit De pra mana cami (12900) sm sci wat wp OS vr
() BARRE st inn dar (15300), and ario in pony may ase 0008
‘oc
wart wi be Bsa
Fig. 614 Speciying Perpendicular for an Axis
(Zero Tolerance at MMC)
Fig 615 _Speciving Perpendicular for an Axis
(ero Tolerance at MMC With a Maximum Specified)
Tis me ung
IC
Door]
#]803@JAle] Lis
HET m
(Zero Tolerance at MMC)
Fig 615 _Speciving Perpendicular for an Axis
(ero Tolerance at MMC With a Maximum Specified)
Tis me ung
IC
Door]
#]803@JAle] Lis
HET m
Fig. 616. Speciving Perpendiulaiy fra Rad ig. 6-17. Speciying Perpendicularty fora Radiat
Element fa Surface Element fa Surface
Th ee ae Tee
y
en +
Fig. 618. Specifying a Tangent Plane
Tas a be a
Element fa Surface Element fa Surface
Th ee ae Tee
y
en +
Fig. 618. Specifying a Tangent Plane
Tas a be a
Section 7
Tolerances of Location
7A GENERAL
‚is Section establishes the principles of tolerances of
location Included are position, content and sy
smety used o conto the following relaiorohips:
(a) center distance between Features of iz such 4
holes sos bosses and tabs
1%) ocationof features size [such asin subpara. a)
above] 06a group, from datum features, suchas plone
‘nd mdr sure
(6) conato features of ize
(a) concentricity or symmetry of fun of size—
‘enter distances of correspondingly located feature le
‘nts equally disposed about a datum ais or plane
7.2. POSITIONAL TOLERANCING
Poston i the location of one or more features of size
‘ative toone another or tone or moredatums A post
tina tolerance defines ether ofthe following
(a) à zone within which the center, xs, or center
plane ofa katurgofsizeispermilediovarg rom atras
foret exact poston
(0) (where spied on an MMC or LMC basis) a
‘boundary, defined asthe virtual condition located atthe
true Weert exact) position, hat may not be vio
lat by e surface or suraces o he considered fate
den
Back dimensions establish the true position rom
specified datums and betwen intereatd Features. À
Position tolerance indicate by the position symbol,
A tolerance value, applicable material condition modi
fers and appropriate datum references placed in a
ture control ame
72.4 Components o Positional Tolerancing
‘The following subparagraphs describe the compo
ent of postiomaltlerancing.
7224 Dimensions for True Position. Dimensions
wed f locate true positon shallbebas and defined in
cordance with par. 21.1.2. See Fig 7-1. For appcable
notes in digit dat es, see ASME VA
212 Use of Feature Control Frame. feature com
trolframelsaddedtothenotaton ued o poc ness
and numberof features, Se Figs. 72 through 74. These
figures shor diferent types of fate after dimen
sióning, Figure 72 lusratin (isa screen image of
ia data ie with postiona tolerance feature control
frames and the require datum feature symbols
7.2.43 Idenling Features to Establish Datums. It
is ocean to entity estres or estres of size on à
port o establish datums or dimensions locating trae
positions except where the positioned features estais
{he primary datum. (The exception s explained in para
7623) For example in Fig. 72, datum references had
en omitted st woul! not be cle whether the inde
diameter or the outside diameter vas the intended
‘datum feature forthe dimensions locating true pos
tions The intended datum features are identified with
datum feature symbols, and the applicable datum fe
ture references are included in he ture control frame
For information on speciying datums in an order of
precedence, se pars 10.
7.3. POSITIONAL TOLERANCING FUNDAMENTALS:
The following i general explanation of positional
toleran
73.1 Material Condition Basis
Positional tolerancing is appli on an MMC, RES,
0e EMC basis Where MMC or LMC is require, the
Sppropriate modifier follows the specified tolerance
See para.28,
732. RFS as Related to Positional Tolerancing
The design or funcion of à part may require the
poston teerance datum reference, orb be mai
fined mars ofthe fetus actual mating envelope
sizes. RPS, where applied 10 the positional tolrance of
Sieur features of ze, requires the ais o centerpoint
‘ead feature of ize tobe located within the speci
posonal tolerance regardless of De size of the fate
In ig 75, the a holes may vary in ie from 2540256
ameter Each ole must be locate within he speist
Postioal tolerance regardis ofthe sizeof that hol. A
Postal tolerance apple at RES is more rsricive than
same positional trance applied MMC or LMC.
Tolerances of Location
7A GENERAL
‚is Section establishes the principles of tolerances of
location Included are position, content and sy
smety used o conto the following relaiorohips:
(a) center distance between Features of iz such 4
holes sos bosses and tabs
1%) ocationof features size [such asin subpara. a)
above] 06a group, from datum features, suchas plone
‘nd mdr sure
(6) conato features of ize
(a) concentricity or symmetry of fun of size—
‘enter distances of correspondingly located feature le
‘nts equally disposed about a datum ais or plane
7.2. POSITIONAL TOLERANCING
Poston i the location of one or more features of size
‘ative toone another or tone or moredatums A post
tina tolerance defines ether ofthe following
(a) à zone within which the center, xs, or center
plane ofa katurgofsizeispermilediovarg rom atras
foret exact poston
(0) (where spied on an MMC or LMC basis) a
‘boundary, defined asthe virtual condition located atthe
true Weert exact) position, hat may not be vio
lat by e surface or suraces o he considered fate
den
Back dimensions establish the true position rom
specified datums and betwen intereatd Features. À
Position tolerance indicate by the position symbol,
A tolerance value, applicable material condition modi
fers and appropriate datum references placed in a
ture control ame
72.4 Components o Positional Tolerancing
‘The following subparagraphs describe the compo
ent of postiomaltlerancing.
7224 Dimensions for True Position. Dimensions
wed f locate true positon shallbebas and defined in
cordance with par. 21.1.2. See Fig 7-1. For appcable
notes in digit dat es, see ASME VA
212 Use of Feature Control Frame. feature com
trolframelsaddedtothenotaton ued o poc ness
and numberof features, Se Figs. 72 through 74. These
figures shor diferent types of fate after dimen
sióning, Figure 72 lusratin (isa screen image of
ia data ie with postiona tolerance feature control
frames and the require datum feature symbols
7.2.43 Idenling Features to Establish Datums. It
is ocean to entity estres or estres of size on à
port o establish datums or dimensions locating trae
positions except where the positioned features estais
{he primary datum. (The exception s explained in para
7623) For example in Fig. 72, datum references had
en omitted st woul! not be cle whether the inde
diameter or the outside diameter vas the intended
‘datum feature forthe dimensions locating true pos
tions The intended datum features are identified with
datum feature symbols, and the applicable datum fe
ture references are included in he ture control frame
For information on speciying datums in an order of
precedence, se pars 10.
7.3. POSITIONAL TOLERANCING FUNDAMENTALS:
The following i general explanation of positional
toleran
73.1 Material Condition Basis
Positional tolerancing is appli on an MMC, RES,
0e EMC basis Where MMC or LMC is require, the
Sppropriate modifier follows the specified tolerance
See para.28,
732. RFS as Related to Positional Tolerancing
The design or funcion of à part may require the
poston teerance datum reference, orb be mai
fined mars ofthe fetus actual mating envelope
sizes. RPS, where applied 10 the positional tolrance of
Sieur features of ze, requires the ais o centerpoint
‘ead feature of ize tobe located within the speci
posonal tolerance regardless of De size of the fate
In ig 75, the a holes may vary in ie from 2540256
ameter Each ole must be locate within he speist
Postioal tolerance regardis ofthe sizeof that hol. A
Postal tolerance apple at RES is more rsricive than
same positional trance applied MMC or LMC.
Fig. 7-1. Identiying Basic Dimensions
(0) Base Sorin n etna worin
(6) Bale mens Were y a re.
(0) Bas ends m Gp ie a
7.33. MMC as Related to Positional Tolerancng
‘The positional tolerance and maximum materi con-
tin of mating features are considered in relation 10
sc othe
73:34 Explanation of Positional Tolerance at MMC.
positional oleranceappliedat MMC may beexpained
in terms ofthe surface or the ae of the feature of size
In certain cases of extreme form deviation (within its
of sie) or rientationdevitin of thee the tolerance
in terms ofthe axis may not be ay equivalent to the
tolerance in terms ofthe surface. See Fig. 7-6 In such
ses the sie interpretation shall take precedence
In some instances, the additional tolerance may ind
recy benefit features oer than the one that depart
from MMC.
a) Sure Interpretation. Wie maintaining the spec
ed size limits of he feature, no element ofthe surface
shall volte à theoretical boundary (vital condo)
located tte postion See Pig. 7.7
0) Axé or Conte Pine Interpretation. Where a fee
ture of size ls at MMC, I ais or center plane must
{all within a tolerance zone located at rue poston
‘Thesize of this zone i equal to Ihe postion toler
ance: See Fig. 7-4 illustrations (a) and (0). This toler
nce zone alo defines the limits of variation in the
‘orientation of the axis or center plane of the feature
‘of size in elation tothe datum surface. See Fig. 78,
‘usration (). is only where the feature of sizes at
MMC that the specified tolerance zone applies, Where
the unrelated actual mating envelope sizeof he fsture
‘of size departs from MMC, additional positions toler
Snce results See Fig. 79, This increase of positional
tolerance is equal tothe diffrence Between the spech
od maximum material condition Imi of size (MMC)
and the unrelated actual mating envelope size, Where
the unrelated actual mating envelope size has departed
from MMC, the specified positional tolerance for à
ture of size may be larger than the slated value
and stl St function and. interchangeably
requirements.
7332 Calelatig Positional Tolerance. Figure
7-1 shows à deawing for one of two sential plates
to be assembled with four mm maximum diam-
‘ter fasteners. The 1425 minimum diameter clearance
als ae selected with a ize tolerance as shown, The
required postions toleranos i found by the equation
nd other considerations as given in Nonmandatory
‘Appendix 1. The shown formula does not accom-
media factors other than hole and fastener diameter
tolerances
12514
025 diameter
(0) Base Sorin n etna worin
(6) Bale mens Were y a re.
(0) Bas ends m Gp ie a
7.33. MMC as Related to Positional Tolerancng
‘The positional tolerance and maximum materi con-
tin of mating features are considered in relation 10
sc othe
73:34 Explanation of Positional Tolerance at MMC.
positional oleranceappliedat MMC may beexpained
in terms ofthe surface or the ae of the feature of size
In certain cases of extreme form deviation (within its
of sie) or rientationdevitin of thee the tolerance
in terms ofthe axis may not be ay equivalent to the
tolerance in terms ofthe surface. See Fig. 7-6 In such
ses the sie interpretation shall take precedence
In some instances, the additional tolerance may ind
recy benefit features oer than the one that depart
from MMC.
a) Sure Interpretation. Wie maintaining the spec
ed size limits of he feature, no element ofthe surface
shall volte à theoretical boundary (vital condo)
located tte postion See Pig. 7.7
0) Axé or Conte Pine Interpretation. Where a fee
ture of size ls at MMC, I ais or center plane must
{all within a tolerance zone located at rue poston
‘Thesize of this zone i equal to Ihe postion toler
ance: See Fig. 7-4 illustrations (a) and (0). This toler
nce zone alo defines the limits of variation in the
‘orientation of the axis or center plane of the feature
‘of size in elation tothe datum surface. See Fig. 78,
‘usration (). is only where the feature of sizes at
MMC that the specified tolerance zone applies, Where
the unrelated actual mating envelope sizeof he fsture
‘of size departs from MMC, additional positions toler
Snce results See Fig. 79, This increase of positional
tolerance is equal tothe diffrence Between the spech
od maximum material condition Imi of size (MMC)
and the unrelated actual mating envelope size, Where
the unrelated actual mating envelope size has departed
from MMC, the specified positional tolerance for à
ture of size may be larger than the slated value
and stl St function and. interchangeably
requirements.
7332 Calelatig Positional Tolerance. Figure
7-1 shows à deawing for one of two sential plates
to be assembled with four mm maximum diam-
‘ter fasteners. The 1425 minimum diameter clearance
als ae selected with a ize tolerance as shown, The
required postions toleranos i found by the equation
nd other considerations as given in Nonmandatory
‘Appendix 1. The shown formula does not accom-
media factors other than hole and fastener diameter
tolerances
12514
025 diameter
Fig.72. Positional Tolerancing With Datum References
ooh
CSS)
EH
2
NOTE dara holes wen Laos eu at oon,
Be pre would sl amende with done Rss Dal a
die ane Men rt st pre
734 Zero Positional Tolerance at MMC
‘The application of MMC permits the position tler
ance zon to increase larger than the value specified,
provided the features of siz are within size limits, and
The feature of size locations ae such as to make the
part acceptable. However ejection of usable pars can
Sacar where these features of size are actually located
fom or close to ther true position, but produced lo à
Size smaller than the specified minimum (ouside of
limits. The principle of positional tleraning at MMC
Allows the maximum amount of tolerance for the func-
tion of assembly. This accomplished by adjusting the
‘minimum sie limit ofa hoe tothe absolute minimum
required for insertion of an applicable maximum as-
tener located precsly at true position, and specifying
ero positional tolerance at MMC. In this case the
Positional tolerance allowed is tot dependent on
the unrelated actual mating envelope size of the
‘dete featur, as explains in pars 283 Figure.
Shows a drawing of the same part with à zero pos
tional tolerance at MMC specified, Note that the maxi
‘um size limit of theclearance holes remains the same,
but the minimum was adjusted o correspond with a
eme diameter fastener. This results in an increase
in the size tolerance for the clearance holes, with the
Increase Being equal tothe positional tolerance spi.
fied in Fig, 7-10. Although the positional tolerance
specified in Fig. 7-11 zero at MMC the positional tl
france allowed increases directly withthe actual lea
nee hole size as shown by the following tabulation
ooh
CSS)
EH
2
NOTE dara holes wen Laos eu at oon,
Be pre would sl amende with done Rss Dal a
die ane Men rt st pre
734 Zero Positional Tolerance at MMC
‘The application of MMC permits the position tler
ance zon to increase larger than the value specified,
provided the features of siz are within size limits, and
The feature of size locations ae such as to make the
part acceptable. However ejection of usable pars can
Sacar where these features of size are actually located
fom or close to ther true position, but produced lo à
Size smaller than the specified minimum (ouside of
limits. The principle of positional tleraning at MMC
Allows the maximum amount of tolerance for the func-
tion of assembly. This accomplished by adjusting the
‘minimum sie limit ofa hoe tothe absolute minimum
required for insertion of an applicable maximum as-
tener located precsly at true position, and specifying
ero positional tolerance at MMC. In this case the
Positional tolerance allowed is tot dependent on
the unrelated actual mating envelope size of the
‘dete featur, as explains in pars 283 Figure.
Shows a drawing of the same part with à zero pos
tional tolerance at MMC specified, Note that the maxi
‘um size limit of theclearance holes remains the same,
but the minimum was adjusted o correspond with a
eme diameter fastener. This results in an increase
in the size tolerance for the clearance holes, with the
Increase Being equal tothe positional tolerance spi.
fied in Fig, 7-10. Although the positional tolerance
specified in Fig. 7-11 zero at MMC the positional tl
france allowed increases directly withthe actual lea
nee hole size as shown by the following tabulation
Fig. 73 Positional Tolerancing Relative to Plane Datum Feature Surfaces
paz
am
LONE
paz]
paz
am
LONE
paz]
Fig. 7-4 Positional Tolerancing at MMC Relative to
‘Datum Feature Center Planes.
Fig. 7-5 RES Applied to Feature and RMB 1 à
‘Datum Feature Reference
cs 17
où 6288 ren soni soes
Fig. 7-6 Mlustration of Ditference Between Surface
and Axis Interpretations of Position Tolerancing
fora Cylindrical Hole
Fig.7-7 Boundary for Surface of Hole at MMC
me
‘sre sal be te
oer too
The penton
coon ira dam
Seale de oa
Sor pa]
!
‘Datum Feature Center Planes.
Fig. 7-5 RES Applied to Feature and RMB 1 à
‘Datum Feature Reference
cs 17
où 6288 ren soni soes
Fig. 7-6 Mlustration of Ditference Between Surface
and Axis Interpretations of Position Tolerancing
fora Cylindrical Hole
Fig.7-7 Boundary for Surface of Hole at MMC
me
‘sre sal be te
oer too
The penton
coon ira dam
Seale de oa
Sor pa]
!
Fig. 7-8 Hole Axes in Relation to Positional Tolerance Zones
— Frovinte! wean zone (gu 1 poste enr)
oo zn ven
al DR
\
18.7:9.Incerasein Postional Tolerance Where
Hole ts Wot at MMC Fig 7-10, PostionalTolerancingat MMC
Trance 000 won ol 2 at HMC
mur darts)
Toman zo nosed by a
mur cil copra om MMC
CET RG
am Samet)
re
m
— Frovinte! wean zone (gu 1 poste enr)
oo zn ven
al DR
\
18.7:9.Incerasein Postional Tolerance Where
Hole ts Wot at MMC Fig 7-10, PostionalTolerancingat MMC
Trance 000 won ol 2 at HMC
mur darts)
Toman zo nosed by a
mur cil copra om MMC
CET RG
am Samet)
re
m
Fig. 7-11 Zero Positional Tolerancing at MMC
agus
Hone)
S—-—O =
=
Gene hu Sr) Cnet Alone
735 LAC as Related to Positional Tolerancing
Where positional tolerancingat LMC is specified the
stat positional tolerance appli the feature size init
that rel in the leat strain the part. Speciation
OF LMC requires pere form at LMC: Prlct form at
MMC isnot required. Where the feature departs rom
As LMC limit of size, an increase in positional tolerance
‘allowed, qual tothe amount of such departure. See
Fig. 7-12. LMC may be specified in positional tolerance
ing applications where the functional consideration so
sure a minimum distance fe maintained whe allow
ing am increseinfolernce as the fate of sie departs
from LMC: See Figs 7-13 through 7-17. MC s used to
maintain a desired relationship between the surface of
{feature and is tue poston at toleran extremes, As
Si MMIC, the surface interpretation shall fake poe:
‘slong over the aus interpretation See para. 733.1 and
Bere.
7.354 UNC to Protect Wall Thickness. Figure?
strate a boss and hol combination located by bas
dimensions. Wal thickness minimum where Ihe boss
nd hoe ae their LMC sins and bth fetus of ie
ne displaced in opposite extremes. As ach feature of
Size depart rom LMC the wall thickness may increase
‘he departure rom LMC permits a comesponding
Increase in the posiional tolerance thas maintaining the
sired minimum wall thickens beeen these surface
Fig. 7-12 Increase in Postonal Tolerance Where
oles Wot at LMC.
sl
735.2 UMC Applied to Singe FeaturesofSize. LMC
‘may also be applied o single features of iz, such as
the hole shown in Fig. 713 In this example, he post
tion of the hol relative tothe inside webs rial RES
‘an be specified. However, LMC is applied, permiting
inert in the positional tolerance while protecting
{he wal thickness.
7353 Zero Positional Tolerance at LMC. The
application of LMC permits the tolerance to cnteed
the value speed, provided festuresof size are within
size imite and the eatureofsizelocationsatesuchasto
‘make the part accepable. However rection of usable
parts can our where features of iz auch as holes ae
Sc led no chet tong ik
produced fo a sae larger than the specified merimum
side ofsize limits) The principle of evo positonal
tolerancing at LMC can be extended in applications
where it i desired to protect à minimum distance on
part and allow an increase intolerance when the
toleranced feature departs from LMC. Ts ls com.
plished by adjusting the maximum size limit of hol
fo the absolute maximum allowed to meet funcional
requirements (such as wall thickness) while specifying
zero postions tolerance at LMC, When hiss done,
the positional tolerance allowed is totally dependent
fo the actual minimum material size ofthe considered
‘ature of size. Figure 7.14 shows the some deawing
ts Fig 7-1, excep the tolerances have been changed
lo show zero positional tolerance at LMC. Note that
{he minimum iz limit 0 the hae remains the same,
but the maximum was adjusted to correspond with
3 2025 diameter virtual condition. This results in an
agus
Hone)
S—-—O =
=
Gene hu Sr) Cnet Alone
735 LAC as Related to Positional Tolerancing
Where positional tolerancingat LMC is specified the
stat positional tolerance appli the feature size init
that rel in the leat strain the part. Speciation
OF LMC requires pere form at LMC: Prlct form at
MMC isnot required. Where the feature departs rom
As LMC limit of size, an increase in positional tolerance
‘allowed, qual tothe amount of such departure. See
Fig. 7-12. LMC may be specified in positional tolerance
ing applications where the functional consideration so
sure a minimum distance fe maintained whe allow
ing am increseinfolernce as the fate of sie departs
from LMC: See Figs 7-13 through 7-17. MC s used to
maintain a desired relationship between the surface of
{feature and is tue poston at toleran extremes, As
Si MMIC, the surface interpretation shall fake poe:
‘slong over the aus interpretation See para. 733.1 and
Bere.
7.354 UNC to Protect Wall Thickness. Figure?
strate a boss and hol combination located by bas
dimensions. Wal thickness minimum where Ihe boss
nd hoe ae their LMC sins and bth fetus of ie
ne displaced in opposite extremes. As ach feature of
Size depart rom LMC the wall thickness may increase
‘he departure rom LMC permits a comesponding
Increase in the posiional tolerance thas maintaining the
sired minimum wall thickens beeen these surface
Fig. 7-12 Increase in Postonal Tolerance Where
oles Wot at LMC.
sl
735.2 UMC Applied to Singe FeaturesofSize. LMC
‘may also be applied o single features of iz, such as
the hole shown in Fig. 713 In this example, he post
tion of the hol relative tothe inside webs rial RES
‘an be specified. However, LMC is applied, permiting
inert in the positional tolerance while protecting
{he wal thickness.
7353 Zero Positional Tolerance at LMC. The
application of LMC permits the tolerance to cnteed
the value speed, provided festuresof size are within
size imite and the eatureofsizelocationsatesuchasto
‘make the part accepable. However rection of usable
parts can our where features of iz auch as holes ae
Sc led no chet tong ik
produced fo a sae larger than the specified merimum
side ofsize limits) The principle of evo positonal
tolerancing at LMC can be extended in applications
where it i desired to protect à minimum distance on
part and allow an increase intolerance when the
toleranced feature departs from LMC. Ts ls com.
plished by adjusting the maximum size limit of hol
fo the absolute maximum allowed to meet funcional
requirements (such as wall thickness) while specifying
zero postions tolerance at LMC, When hiss done,
the positional tolerance allowed is totally dependent
fo the actual minimum material size ofthe considered
‘ature of size. Figure 7.14 shows the some deawing
ts Fig 7-1, excep the tolerances have been changed
lo show zero positional tolerance at LMC. Note that
{he minimum iz limit 0 the hae remains the same,
but the maximum was adjusted to correspond with
3 2025 diameter virtual condition. This results in an
Fig.7-13 LMC Applied to Boss and Hole
ee
=
Eos
sn,
BISOREE)
Ta mau ue
ans - o
mee
| IE
%
j
a me
Kom
eo
increase in the size tolerance fr the hole th increase 7.36 Datum Feature Moles
tual to the positional tolerance specified in Tolerances
3. Although the positional tolerance specified
in Fig 7-4 e zero at LMC, the positional tolerance
allowed is directly related to the minimum material
hole size a shown by the following tabulation,
esitonal
References to datum features of size shall be made
regardes of material boundary (RMB), at maximum
‘material boundary (MMB), er at least material bound:
Menue PUNTA GOA Damar 73.6: Datum Features at RMB. The funcional
Mannes led "requirements of some designs may requir tht RMB
202 q applied to a dat kat. Tha E, maybe nce
2000 as ‘Sito require the ans ofan atl datum feature (uch
pl = St datum diameter Bin Fig 79) to be the datum aus
forthe holes in he pater regards ofthe datum fea
ms ous ture’ sie. The RMB aplication dees not permit any
ns
ee
=
Eos
sn,
BISOREE)
Ta mau ue
ans - o
mee
| IE
%
j
a me
Kom
eo
increase in the size tolerance fr the hole th increase 7.36 Datum Feature Moles
tual to the positional tolerance specified in Tolerances
3. Although the positional tolerance specified
in Fig 7-4 e zero at LMC, the positional tolerance
allowed is directly related to the minimum material
hole size a shown by the following tabulation,
esitonal
References to datum features of size shall be made
regardes of material boundary (RMB), at maximum
‘material boundary (MMB), er at least material bound:
Menue PUNTA GOA Damar 73.6: Datum Features at RMB. The funcional
Mannes led "requirements of some designs may requir tht RMB
202 q applied to a dat kat. Tha E, maybe nce
2000 as ‘Sito require the ans ofan atl datum feature (uch
pl = St datum diameter Bin Fig 79) to be the datum aus
forthe holes in he pater regards ofthe datum fea
ms ous ture’ sie. The RMB aplication dees not permit any
ns
Fig. 7-14 Zero Tolerance at UMC Applied o Boss and Hole
Door
Fig.7:5. LMC Applied toa Single Feature
= EIN]
BlsszoR]
a] Zum [332
Door
Fig.7:5. LMC Applied toa Single Feature
= EIN]
BlsszoR]
a] Zum [332
Fig. 7-16 LMC Applied to Patter of Slots
Tie one ame
12x 252008,
CeTosolala]
Ar
16
Tie
=,
E,
re
Comet pire
a |
I
8.7.47. Datum Feature at LUS
o
11_Qo5 731
$IS00/40]
735.
735
[7521
Tie one ame
12x 252008,
CeTosolala]
Ar
16
Tie
=,
E,
re
Comet pire
a |
I
8.7.47. Datum Feature at LUS
o
11_Qo5 731
$IS00/40]
735.
735
[7521
Fig. 7-18. Datum Feature Referenced at MMB.
sx 99-05
ESCO)
BY
mi
nel
Fig.78 Datum Feature
Referenced at MMB (Cont'd)
os
905 Terance oro
‘moon envelope oe eaves
640 Ma as
ote bury
[zaz]
translation or rotation between the ais of the datum
Festus andthe tolerance zone framework forthe pat-
teen of tures, where the datum feature size varie
73.2 Displacement Allowed by Datum Features at
MMB. For some aplication, featur or group of feo
tures (uch as agro of mounting holes) maybe pos
tioned relative toa datum feature) of size at MM Se
Fig, 718. In the given figure, displacement Is allowed
‘who the datum feature departs fom MMB.
73624 Datum Features of Size at MMB. In
Fig 7-18, stration (a), where datum feature Bis at
(MMB, its ais determines the location ofthe pattern
fof features as a group. The olerance zone framework
ls centered (omstrained in translation) on datum
73622 Departure of Datum Features From MMB.
In Fig. 7-18, station) where datum feature B
parts from MMB, relative movement cam ocur
sx 99-05
ESCO)
BY
mi
nel
Fig.78 Datum Feature
Referenced at MMB (Cont'd)
os
905 Terance oro
‘moon envelope oe eaves
640 Ma as
ote bury
[zaz]
translation or rotation between the ais of the datum
Festus andthe tolerance zone framework forthe pat-
teen of tures, where the datum feature size varie
73.2 Displacement Allowed by Datum Features at
MMB. For some aplication, featur or group of feo
tures (uch as agro of mounting holes) maybe pos
tioned relative toa datum feature) of size at MM Se
Fig, 718. In the given figure, displacement Is allowed
‘who the datum feature departs fom MMB.
73624 Datum Features of Size at MMB. In
Fig 7-18, stration (a), where datum feature Bis at
(MMB, its ais determines the location ofthe pattern
fof features as a group. The olerance zone framework
ls centered (omstrained in translation) on datum
73622 Departure of Datum Features From MMB.
In Fig. 7-18, station) where datum feature B
parts from MMB, relative movement cam ocur
Fig. 7-18 Datum Feature Referenced at MMB (Con)
For)
EN
939 ltd octal
Fring tree
94010481 msm
a today
OS Towance one
ue of rte ata
‘aig ene
Haren
pzz]
between datum axis Band the axis ofthe relat actual
‘ating envelope of datum feature. Se par. 4113.
a) Eff on Consider Features, The amount of the
datum features departure rom MMB doesnot provide
sitial poston tolerance foreachet the considered
features in elation teach other within he pater
1) Incio Metal Vara a funcional gage is
used o heck the par, the relative movement between
¿alum axis B and the axis of the datum feature is
utomatically accommadated. However, this relative
‘movement must be then into acount if open setup
inspection method are us
73.63 Displacement Allowed by Datum Features
at LAB, For some applications a feature or group
‘of festures may be positioned relative to datum fea
ture at EMB. See Fig. 7-17 In such a cas, allowable
splacement results when the datum feature departs
from LMB.
A POSITIONAL TOLERANCING FUNDAMENTAL
‘The following expands onthe principles ofthe pre
ing general explanation of poston toleran
7.44 Projected Tolerance Zone
The application of this concept is recommended
‘where the variation in perpendicular of threaded or
preset holes could cause fasteners, auch as scree,
Suds, or pins, to interfere with mating parts See
Fig 719. An interference can occur where a lerance is
specified forthe location of threaded or pres hol,
nd the hole inclined within the postional limits.
Uni the floting fastener application involving ls
ance hoes only, the attitude fa fixed fastener is gov-
eme bythe inclination of the produced ole into which
assembles Figure 720 illustrates how the projected
tolerance zone concept essay teats Ihe condition
shown nig. 7-19, Note hats the variation in perpen
Sicuriy ol he portion ofthe fatner passing wu
ie matin part thats significant. The ation and per.
pendu of the threaded hol are any of impor
{ance sofa a they affect the extended portion of he
‘engaging fastener Where design considerations require
Sclowercontrlin the perpendiculoityofa threads hol
‘han that allowed by the positional tolerance, an int.
tion tolerance applied asa projected tolerance zone may
especie, See Fig I. o contol the feature within
the part, an additonal tolerance may be specie
Where composite or multiple segment feature contol
frame is used the projecte tolerance zone Symbol shall
beshonen inal applicable segments
74414 Clearance Hole in Mating Pats. Specifying
projected tolerance zone will ensure that fixed
fasteners do nat interfere with mating, parts having
For)
EN
939 ltd octal
Fring tree
94010481 msm
a today
OS Towance one
ue of rte ata
‘aig ene
Haren
pzz]
between datum axis Band the axis ofthe relat actual
‘ating envelope of datum feature. Se par. 4113.
a) Eff on Consider Features, The amount of the
datum features departure rom MMB doesnot provide
sitial poston tolerance foreachet the considered
features in elation teach other within he pater
1) Incio Metal Vara a funcional gage is
used o heck the par, the relative movement between
¿alum axis B and the axis of the datum feature is
utomatically accommadated. However, this relative
‘movement must be then into acount if open setup
inspection method are us
73.63 Displacement Allowed by Datum Features
at LAB, For some applications a feature or group
‘of festures may be positioned relative to datum fea
ture at EMB. See Fig. 7-17 In such a cas, allowable
splacement results when the datum feature departs
from LMB.
A POSITIONAL TOLERANCING FUNDAMENTAL
‘The following expands onthe principles ofthe pre
ing general explanation of poston toleran
7.44 Projected Tolerance Zone
The application of this concept is recommended
‘where the variation in perpendicular of threaded or
preset holes could cause fasteners, auch as scree,
Suds, or pins, to interfere with mating parts See
Fig 719. An interference can occur where a lerance is
specified forthe location of threaded or pres hol,
nd the hole inclined within the postional limits.
Uni the floting fastener application involving ls
ance hoes only, the attitude fa fixed fastener is gov-
eme bythe inclination of the produced ole into which
assembles Figure 720 illustrates how the projected
tolerance zone concept essay teats Ihe condition
shown nig. 7-19, Note hats the variation in perpen
Sicuriy ol he portion ofthe fatner passing wu
ie matin part thats significant. The ation and per.
pendu of the threaded hol are any of impor
{ance sofa a they affect the extended portion of he
‘engaging fastener Where design considerations require
Sclowercontrlin the perpendiculoityofa threads hol
‘han that allowed by the positional tolerance, an int.
tion tolerance applied asa projected tolerance zone may
especie, See Fig I. o contol the feature within
the part, an additonal tolerance may be specie
Where composite or multiple segment feature contol
frame is used the projecte tolerance zone Symbol shall
beshonen inal applicable segments
74414 Clearance Hole in Mating Pats. Specifying
projected tolerance zone will ensure that fixed
fasteners do nat interfere with mating, parts having
Fig. 7-19 Interference Diagram, Fastener and Hole
Fig.7-21 Projected Tolerance Zone Specified
Fig. 7-20 Bass for Projected Tolerance Zone
Ti oo be ame
Fig.7-22. Projected Tolerance Zone Indicated
‘With Chain Line
| LE
ss:
1]
€ hole sizes determined by the formulas me
st in Nonmandatory Appendix B. Further
Snlargement of clearance holes to provide for an
Streme variation in perpendicuarity o he fastener Is
fot neces
Ts on be de
r |
=
We ni
wen
Fu”
7412 Application. Figures 721 and 722 ils:
rte Ihe application of a positional tolerance using a
projeced olerance zone. The speed value for the
Projet tolerance zone à a minima
{he maximum permisible mating por
Fig.7-21 Projected Tolerance Zone Specified
Fig. 7-20 Bass for Projected Tolerance Zone
Ti oo be ame
Fig.7-22. Projected Tolerance Zone Indicated
‘With Chain Line
| LE
ss:
1]
€ hole sizes determined by the formulas me
st in Nonmandatory Appendix B. Further
Snlargement of clearance holes to provide for an
Streme variation in perpendicuarity o he fastener Is
fot neces
Ts on be de
r |
=
We ni
wen
Fu”
7412 Application. Figures 721 and 722 ils:
rte Ihe application of a positional tolerance using a
projeced olerance zone. The speed value for the
Projet tolerance zone à a minima
{he maximum permisible mating por
8.7.23. Projected Tolerance Zone Applied for
‘Studs or Dowel Pins
Fig.7-24 Same Positional Tolerance for Holes and
Counterbores, Same Datum References
"fant is eal
=r
maximum installed length or height of the components
Such as screws, studs or dowel pins See para. 741.
‘The direction and height ofthe projecte tolerance zene
ae indicated a illustrated. The minimum extent and
icio ofthe projecte tolerance one are shown in
3 drawing view as 3 dimensioned value with à heavy
‘hain line drawn closely adjacent to an extension ofthe
enter inc of the hol
gs
7.423 Stud and Pin Application. Where studs oF
presi pins are located on an assembly rating the
Specified positional tolerance applies only tothe height
‘ofthe projecting portion of the stud or pi aftr instal
ation, and the specification of projected tolerance
zone is unnecessary. However, à projected tolerance
Zone is applicable where threaded or plain hole for
Studs or pins are located ona detal part drawing. In
these cases, the specified projected height should equal
{he maximum permissible height of the stud or pin
after instalo, not the mating part thickness See
Fig 723.
7.42 Counterbored Holes
‘Where positional tolerances ae use to locate coal
features suchas counterbore holes, he olowing prac:
ties app
a) Where the same positional tolerance is used o.
locate both oles and counterboe, a single feature com
tro ame i placed under the note specsying hole and
Sounierboerogirement See Fig, 7-2 kent diam
‘ster tolerance zones fr hole and couterbore are co
lly located constrained in translation and rotation) at
{rue position mative othe specie’ datums
0) Where different positional tolerances are used
to locate holes and counterbores (lative o common
datum features), two feature contol frames re wed
‘One festure contol frame is pliced under the note
specifying hole requirements and the other under the
Taw be ae
Eisolaso]
?
gen
fa
pe True postion ax
ooo
He
o se à
note spciying countrbore requirements. Se Fig. 725
Different diameter tolerance zones for hole and counter:
bore ave coaxially cated! tive position relative tothe
specified datum
e) Where positional tolerances are used to locate
holes and to control individual counterboretorhoe
relationships (relative to different datum features)
{to feature control frames are used as in subpara
D above. In addition a note placed under the datum
feature symbol forthe hole and under the feature
control frame for the counterbore, indicating. the
number 01 places each applies on an individual basis
See Fig 726
7.43 Closer Control at One End ofa Feature of Size
Where design permits, different positional tolerances
may be pecied forth extremities of long holes: this
«stable à comica! eather than a eylindrkal tolerance
Zone. So Fi 727.
‘Studs or Dowel Pins
Fig.7-24 Same Positional Tolerance for Holes and
Counterbores, Same Datum References
"fant is eal
=r
maximum installed length or height of the components
Such as screws, studs or dowel pins See para. 741.
‘The direction and height ofthe projecte tolerance zene
ae indicated a illustrated. The minimum extent and
icio ofthe projecte tolerance one are shown in
3 drawing view as 3 dimensioned value with à heavy
‘hain line drawn closely adjacent to an extension ofthe
enter inc of the hol
gs
7.423 Stud and Pin Application. Where studs oF
presi pins are located on an assembly rating the
Specified positional tolerance applies only tothe height
‘ofthe projecting portion of the stud or pi aftr instal
ation, and the specification of projected tolerance
zone is unnecessary. However, à projected tolerance
Zone is applicable where threaded or plain hole for
Studs or pins are located ona detal part drawing. In
these cases, the specified projected height should equal
{he maximum permissible height of the stud or pin
after instalo, not the mating part thickness See
Fig 723.
7.42 Counterbored Holes
‘Where positional tolerances ae use to locate coal
features suchas counterbore holes, he olowing prac:
ties app
a) Where the same positional tolerance is used o.
locate both oles and counterboe, a single feature com
tro ame i placed under the note specsying hole and
Sounierboerogirement See Fig, 7-2 kent diam
‘ster tolerance zones fr hole and couterbore are co
lly located constrained in translation and rotation) at
{rue position mative othe specie’ datums
0) Where different positional tolerances are used
to locate holes and counterbores (lative o common
datum features), two feature contol frames re wed
‘One festure contol frame is pliced under the note
specifying hole requirements and the other under the
Taw be ae
Eisolaso]
?
gen
fa
pe True postion ax
ooo
He
o se à
note spciying countrbore requirements. Se Fig. 725
Different diameter tolerance zones for hole and counter:
bore ave coaxially cated! tive position relative tothe
specified datum
e) Where positional tolerances are used to locate
holes and to control individual counterboretorhoe
relationships (relative to different datum features)
{to feature control frames are used as in subpara
D above. In addition a note placed under the datum
feature symbol forthe hole and under the feature
control frame for the counterbore, indicating. the
number 01 places each applies on an individual basis
See Fig 726
7.43 Closer Control at One End ofa Feature of Size
Where design permits, different positional tolerances
may be pecied forth extremities of long holes: this
«stable à comica! eather than a eylindrkal tolerance
Zone. So Fi 727.
Fig. 7-25 Different Positional Tolerances for Holes
and Counterbores, Same Datum References.
Fig. 7-26 Positional Tolerances fr Holes and
‘Counterbores, Diferent Datum References
This an mm nu
Esrmonen)
D gere ges
Heron)
esse Tre ps axis
1-05 posta
121025 postor
LL anne
mum po À
744 Bidirectional Positional Tolerancing of
Features of Size
Wheel desire to specify a grater toleranceinone
dicton than another, bidirectional posional oran.
ing may be applied. Bsirctionl postions tolerancing
ult in nöngylindeial tolerance zone for lating
round holes therefore, he diameter symbol omite
From the entre control frame in these applications
NOTE ets feet a preity win eps
AAA Rectangular Coordinate Method. For feo
tures located by rectangular coordinate dimensions,
Separate feature contol frames are used to indicate
the direction and magnitude of eich positional tole
ance relative to speced datums. See Fig. 7-28. The
feature control frames are attached to dimension Hines
applied in perpendicular directions. Each tolerance
Vale represents a distance between two prall plans
«qual disposed about the tue poston
Tha on be dani
og. rece
Seven
r
baa IE
so HL
Pont mn ot
180.15 pnts,
Ypres
es
7442 Polat Coordinate Method. Bidinctona pos
tional tolerancingmay also beappli testes located
ty polar coordinate dimensions relative to specified.
‘anima. Where diferent tolerance is desired in each
‘ition, one dimension ines applied ina radial diese
tion and the other perpendicular to the lineocenters
The position tolerance valves represent distances
een two concentric are Boundaries (or the raat
ction), and two parallel planes, equally disposed
shout the te poston See ig 723 In this example, à
further roquirement of porpendicloiy within the pon
rane zone as ben specified. The example
in ig. 7.29 typical ofa gear center application. In all
cases the shape and extent ofthetolerante zone Shall be
made ler
and Counterbores, Same Datum References.
Fig. 7-26 Positional Tolerances fr Holes and
‘Counterbores, Diferent Datum References
This an mm nu
Esrmonen)
D gere ges
Heron)
esse Tre ps axis
1-05 posta
121025 postor
LL anne
mum po À
744 Bidirectional Positional Tolerancing of
Features of Size
Wheel desire to specify a grater toleranceinone
dicton than another, bidirectional posional oran.
ing may be applied. Bsirctionl postions tolerancing
ult in nöngylindeial tolerance zone for lating
round holes therefore, he diameter symbol omite
From the entre control frame in these applications
NOTE ets feet a preity win eps
AAA Rectangular Coordinate Method. For feo
tures located by rectangular coordinate dimensions,
Separate feature contol frames are used to indicate
the direction and magnitude of eich positional tole
ance relative to speced datums. See Fig. 7-28. The
feature control frames are attached to dimension Hines
applied in perpendicular directions. Each tolerance
Vale represents a distance between two prall plans
«qual disposed about the tue poston
Tha on be dani
og. rece
Seven
r
baa IE
so HL
Pont mn ot
180.15 pnts,
Ypres
es
7442 Polat Coordinate Method. Bidinctona pos
tional tolerancingmay also beappli testes located
ty polar coordinate dimensions relative to specified.
‘anima. Where diferent tolerance is desired in each
‘ition, one dimension ines applied ina radial diese
tion and the other perpendicular to the lineocenters
The position tolerance valves represent distances
een two concentric are Boundaries (or the raat
ction), and two parallel planes, equally disposed
shout the te poston See ig 723 In this example, à
further roquirement of porpendicloiy within the pon
rane zone as ben specified. The example
in ig. 7.29 typical ofa gear center application. In all
cases the shape and extent ofthetolerante zone Shall be
made ler
Fig.7:27. Different Positional Tolerance at Each
‘End of Long Hole
Te oie doy
et
EIRSOREE)
AT SURF c
7A5 Nonclcular Features of Size
‘The fundamental principles of true poston dimen:
sloning and positional tlerancing for Grcular features
of size, suchas Boles and boxes, apply also to none
‘ae fetes of siz, such a opennd sos, tabs, and
‘ongated holes. For such fetus of size, a poational
folerance is used to locate the center plane established
by pall suraces ofthe feature of se, The tolerance
value represents a distance between two parle planes.
"The diente symbols omitted fom the feature control
frame, See Fig. 7-30 and 7-3
7.5.4 Noncicuar Features of Sie at MMC. Where
a portional tolerance 0 à noncrclae feature of size
Apples st MMC, the fllosing apply
To) In Tormo he Surfaces of on Interna Feature of Sze
‘While maintaining the specie sie limits of the intr
al feature, no element ofthe internal feature of size ur
ces shall be inside a theoretical boundary located at
tee postion. See Fig, 732.
In Ter of the Centr Plc of Internal Future of
‘Six Where an intemal feature f size at MMC (min
‘am size), ts center plane must al within a tolerance
“one defined by two paral planes equally disposed
bout true position. The width thi zones qual othe
positional tolerance. Se Fig. 7-33. This tolerance zone
so define the mis of variations inthe orientation of
{he center plane o the intemal featur of size in relation
to the datum surface I 8 only where the internals
ture of size sat MMC that the specified tolerance zone
pls. Where the unrelated actual mating envelope
See ofthe internal feature of size i ager than MMC,
‘ditional posäona tolerance resus, This increase of
positional tolerance is equal o the difference between
{he specified maximum mater condition mit of size
(MMO) and the unrlatetactal matingenvelope sizeof
{he internal feature of size. Where the unrelated actual
mating envelope size ls anger than MAC, the speci
positional tolerance for am infernal feature of size may
Be excel and sil say function and interchange
silty requirements
e) In Tro he Boundary fon Internal entre sfSize
A positional olerance applied o a future of size estab-
ichs a contol of the surface relative to à boundary.
‘While meting the specified size mit ofthe feature
of size, no clement of is surface shall wnat à tort
al boundaryof dental shape located tte poston
‘The sizeof he boundary sequal tothe MMC sz of the
intemal feature of size minus ls poston tolerance. See
Fig. 74. The term BOUNDARY may be placed beneath
the feature conta frames, but is not required I this
‘sample a greater posiionaltolrance is allowed for is
Tength than forts wi. Where the sane positions a
crane canbe allowed for both, only one feature contol
frame is necessary, directed 1 the feature by a leader
and separated fom the size dimensions.
[NOTE ha boundary man ae apli tein
‘nad sa) wher Deco ei ae Se
dat Pattern of Slats. In
Fig. 7-16, adil pattern of slots i load raie to
an end face and à center hol. LMC is specified 10
‘End of Long Hole
Te oie doy
et
EIRSOREE)
AT SURF c
7A5 Nonclcular Features of Size
‘The fundamental principles of true poston dimen:
sloning and positional tlerancing for Grcular features
of size, suchas Boles and boxes, apply also to none
‘ae fetes of siz, such a opennd sos, tabs, and
‘ongated holes. For such fetus of size, a poational
folerance is used to locate the center plane established
by pall suraces ofthe feature of se, The tolerance
value represents a distance between two parle planes.
"The diente symbols omitted fom the feature control
frame, See Fig. 7-30 and 7-3
7.5.4 Noncicuar Features of Sie at MMC. Where
a portional tolerance 0 à noncrclae feature of size
Apples st MMC, the fllosing apply
To) In Tormo he Surfaces of on Interna Feature of Sze
‘While maintaining the specie sie limits of the intr
al feature, no element ofthe internal feature of size ur
ces shall be inside a theoretical boundary located at
tee postion. See Fig, 732.
In Ter of the Centr Plc of Internal Future of
‘Six Where an intemal feature f size at MMC (min
‘am size), ts center plane must al within a tolerance
“one defined by two paral planes equally disposed
bout true position. The width thi zones qual othe
positional tolerance. Se Fig. 7-33. This tolerance zone
so define the mis of variations inthe orientation of
{he center plane o the intemal featur of size in relation
to the datum surface I 8 only where the internals
ture of size sat MMC that the specified tolerance zone
pls. Where the unrelated actual mating envelope
See ofthe internal feature of size i ager than MMC,
‘ditional posäona tolerance resus, This increase of
positional tolerance is equal o the difference between
{he specified maximum mater condition mit of size
(MMO) and the unrlatetactal matingenvelope sizeof
{he internal feature of size. Where the unrelated actual
mating envelope size ls anger than MAC, the speci
positional tolerance for am infernal feature of size may
Be excel and sil say function and interchange
silty requirements
e) In Tro he Boundary fon Internal entre sfSize
A positional olerance applied o a future of size estab-
ichs a contol of the surface relative to à boundary.
‘While meting the specified size mit ofthe feature
of size, no clement of is surface shall wnat à tort
al boundaryof dental shape located tte poston
‘The sizeof he boundary sequal tothe MMC sz of the
intemal feature of size minus ls poston tolerance. See
Fig. 74. The term BOUNDARY may be placed beneath
the feature conta frames, but is not required I this
‘sample a greater posiionaltolrance is allowed for is
Tength than forts wi. Where the sane positions a
crane canbe allowed for both, only one feature contol
frame is necessary, directed 1 the feature by a leader
and separated fom the size dimensions.
[NOTE ha boundary man ae apli tein
‘nad sa) wher Deco ei ae Se
dat Pattern of Slats. In
Fig. 7-16, adil pattern of slots i load raie to
an end face and à center hol. LMC is specified 10
ig. 7-28. Bidirectional Positional Tolerancng, Rectangular Coordinate Method
Tar te oa
ent
Laos it
nz oe
jte VER |
„+ — ee
eL dd
oo En
AAA a,
Fi8.7:29. Bidirectional Positional Tolerancing, Polar Coordinate Method
ed
io]
Tar te oa
ent
Laos it
nz oe
jte VER |
„+ — ee
eL dd
oo En
AAA a,
Fi8.7:29. Bidirectional Positional Tolerancing, Polar Coordinate Method
ed
io]
Fig. 7-30 Positional Folerancing of Tabs
Fig. 731, Positional Tolerancing of Slots
AT.
Tiens
3;
LEE
CHE 989
E
2
Fig. 732. Virtual Condition fer Surfaces
ot at MC
Fig. 733 Tolerance Zone or Center Plane
of Slot at MMC
ent pie st
Fe= irn zo)
Tr ne
5 ES e
na ra)
om
Fig. 731, Positional Tolerancing of Slots
AT.
Tiens
3;
LEE
CHE 989
E
2
Fig. 732. Virtual Condition fer Surfaces
ot at MC
Fig. 733 Tolerance Zone or Center Plane
of Slot at MMC
ent pie st
Fe= irn zo)
Tr ne
5 ES e
na ra)
om
Fig. 7-34 Positional Tolerancng, Boundary Concept
Tis on mm am
ur
GEST)
A
GIFS)
5
EJ \ 9-14
T
Ja TE mul I
528 Posten tes
SEHEN un;
memes, E
Ser CELS
ms
Tis on mm am
ur
GEST)
A
GIFS)
5
EJ \ 9-14
T
Ja TE mul I
528 Posten tes
SEHEN un;
memes, E
Ser CELS
ms
Fig. 7-35. Sphetica Feature Located by Positional
Tolerancing
Tis he ong az
[26000
Paez.
LS” moon far]
‘ainsi the desired relationship between the side sur
Faces fe lots aná he tee postion, where rations
ligament with the mating part may be ential
7.46 Spherical Features
Apostiona tolerance may be used 1 contol the loca
sion ofa spherical tre relative o other features of
part See Fig, 75. The symbol for spherical diameter
recados the size dimension ofthe feature and the pos
tonal tolerance value, o indicate aspherical tolerance
one. Where intended forthe tolerance zone shape
lo be otherwise special indication i shown, simile o
the example shown fora bidiretionatolerance zone of
8 9ylindekal hae See Fig. 7-28,
7.47 Nonparallel Axis Hole Patterns
Postal tlerancing may be applied to à pattern
‘of hole where au ar not parallel 1 cach other and
‘where axes ae not normal to the surface Se Fig 7-36
7.48 Repetitive Pattern of Features of Size Related
toa Repeated Datum Reference Frame
Where positions tolerance are used to locate pattems
‘of features af size relative to repetitive datums, he far
ture contol frames and datums are specifi a shown
in Figs. 726 and 7.37. A notes place beneath o adj
‘cent to the datum (stur symbol and another Beneath
‘or adjacent to the feature control fame forthe control
Te features ol size indisting the number of places each
applies on an individual basis o establish ascociation
‘with one line of a multiple segment feature contol
frame, placement shal be adjacent to the applicable
segment Should the individual requirements be shown
fn the main view or in à CAD modal without deta
‘View the indication ofthe number of occurrences shall
bbeshown. Figure 7-37 shows the appeaion of individ
al requirements in a detail view: When à dead view
Includes notation ofthe numberof occurrence of hat
etal view, then the 6K on the INDIVIDUALLY notation
‘may be emitted. The 6X INDIVIDUALLY notation beside
he datum feature D symbol indices that sch es
occurrence of the 74 diameter hole acts a a separate
‘tum feature nd estables à separate datum D. The
EX INDIVIDUALY notation associated with the second
segment of the positional tolerances onthe X 3 diam
cer hoes indices hat each pattem of four holes has a
tolerance zane framework tht i located relative 1 the
specified datums
7.5 PATTERN LOCATION
A patte of features of size may have multiple levels
‘of postional conta required The pater of features of
Sine may require larger tolerance relative tothe datum
reference Fame while à smaller tolerance is require
‘within the pattern. Multiple levels of tolerance contol
may be applied using composite positional tolerances or
‘multiple Single segment feature contol frames
7.54 Composite Positional Toterancing
Compositepostionaltolerncing provides anapplica-
tion of positional tolerancing fr the location of feature
of siz pattems as well asthe interrelation constrained
In rotation and translation) of features of size within
these poema. Requirements are annotated By the use
fof compost saure contol fame See para. 44 aná
Fig. 326 illustration a). The postion symbol entere
Tolerancing
Tis he ong az
[26000
Paez.
LS” moon far]
‘ainsi the desired relationship between the side sur
Faces fe lots aná he tee postion, where rations
ligament with the mating part may be ential
7.46 Spherical Features
Apostiona tolerance may be used 1 contol the loca
sion ofa spherical tre relative o other features of
part See Fig, 75. The symbol for spherical diameter
recados the size dimension ofthe feature and the pos
tonal tolerance value, o indicate aspherical tolerance
one. Where intended forthe tolerance zone shape
lo be otherwise special indication i shown, simile o
the example shown fora bidiretionatolerance zone of
8 9ylindekal hae See Fig. 7-28,
7.47 Nonparallel Axis Hole Patterns
Postal tlerancing may be applied to à pattern
‘of hole where au ar not parallel 1 cach other and
‘where axes ae not normal to the surface Se Fig 7-36
7.48 Repetitive Pattern of Features of Size Related
toa Repeated Datum Reference Frame
Where positions tolerance are used to locate pattems
‘of features af size relative to repetitive datums, he far
ture contol frames and datums are specifi a shown
in Figs. 726 and 7.37. A notes place beneath o adj
‘cent to the datum (stur symbol and another Beneath
‘or adjacent to the feature control fame forthe control
Te features ol size indisting the number of places each
applies on an individual basis o establish ascociation
‘with one line of a multiple segment feature contol
frame, placement shal be adjacent to the applicable
segment Should the individual requirements be shown
fn the main view or in à CAD modal without deta
‘View the indication ofthe number of occurrences shall
bbeshown. Figure 7-37 shows the appeaion of individ
al requirements in a detail view: When à dead view
Includes notation ofthe numberof occurrence of hat
etal view, then the 6K on the INDIVIDUALLY notation
‘may be emitted. The 6X INDIVIDUALLY notation beside
he datum feature D symbol indices that sch es
occurrence of the 74 diameter hole acts a a separate
‘tum feature nd estables à separate datum D. The
EX INDIVIDUALY notation associated with the second
segment of the positional tolerances onthe X 3 diam
cer hoes indices hat each pattem of four holes has a
tolerance zane framework tht i located relative 1 the
specified datums
7.5 PATTERN LOCATION
A patte of features of size may have multiple levels
‘of postional conta required The pater of features of
Sine may require larger tolerance relative tothe datum
reference Fame while à smaller tolerance is require
‘within the pattern. Multiple levels of tolerance contol
may be applied using composite positional tolerances or
‘multiple Single segment feature contol frames
7.54 Composite Positional Toterancing
Compositepostionaltolerncing provides anapplica-
tion of positional tolerancing fr the location of feature
of siz pattems as well asthe interrelation constrained
In rotation and translation) of features of size within
these poema. Requirements are annotated By the use
fof compost saure contol fame See para. 44 aná
Fig. 326 illustration a). The postion symbol entere
Fig. 7-36 Nonparlll Moles Including Those Not Normal to Surface
Fig. 7-38 Hole Patterns Located by Composite Positional Toerancing.
eme
POLLITO
og}
[Bezsala]
ages"
rende)
El
E
JS:
a
ra
EN
at ne)
a Taig
nce nappa al ol gent Eh (D dtu a pce Lor eget
ompletehoriontalsepmentinthefesturecentrlfames they govern the rotation of the FRIZF relative 10 the
‘of Figs 7-38 and 7-29 may be ved separately
(a) Pater Locating Trance Zone Fumewerk(PLTZP). ere bythe
(he acronym is pronounced “Plaht") Where c
‘datums and within the Boundaries established and gov
om (3) Where datum feature references are specified,
poste controls are use, the uppermost segment isthe one or more ofthe datum feature references specifi in
patlelocating contol. The PLIZF 1 constained In he upper segment of the frame ae repented as appl
fotation and transition relative to he specified datums. — cable and inthe same order of precdence, o constrain
species the lager positional ele
ofthe pattern of star o ie
race forthe lcs
ion ration of the FRTZE In some instances the repented
“gros. Applicable datum estu references may not constrain any degrees
‘datum features are erence in adesied order of prc: of eeom: however, they ar necessary lo maintain he
‘sien andere rate he PLIZFtothedatumreter.kentcal datum reference frame, such a datum entre
fence rame. See Fig. 7-38, illustration (0).
Bine lower segment in Fig. 7-2
10) Feature Relating Tolrunce Zone Framework
(RIZE). (ie acrony is pronounced Fate”) Eh _ 75.1.1 Primary Datum Repeated in Lower
lower sogment ia Kuturereting control They gov- Segment. Ascanbessen from the sectional view of the
er the smaller positional tolerance foreach fear of tolerance zones in Fig. 738, stration (since datum.
Sze within the pattern (eatureto-eatre relationship) plane A has been repeated in the lower segment of the
Basi dimensions used to relate the PLIZF to spec
ied Compost feature conta frame, the sue of both the
datums are not applicable to the locaton of the FRTZE. PLTZF and FRIZF cylinders are perpendicular to datom
See Fig 738, station (o)
i), Where datum references are not specified
the FRTZE i fre o rotate and transit within
boundaries established and govemed by the PLIZE
plane À and therefore parallel to eachother. In certain
ina sance portion ofthe smaller sones moy fal yond
‚ner segment ofthe composite feature control ame, the peripheries ofthe lager tolerance zones. However,
the these portions of the smaller teerance ones are not
sable because the axes ofthe features must not vila
eme
POLLITO
og}
[Bezsala]
ages"
rende)
El
E
JS:
a
ra
EN
at ne)
a Taig
nce nappa al ol gent Eh (D dtu a pce Lor eget
ompletehoriontalsepmentinthefesturecentrlfames they govern the rotation of the FRIZF relative 10 the
‘of Figs 7-38 and 7-29 may be ved separately
(a) Pater Locating Trance Zone Fumewerk(PLTZP). ere bythe
(he acronym is pronounced “Plaht") Where c
‘datums and within the Boundaries established and gov
om (3) Where datum feature references are specified,
poste controls are use, the uppermost segment isthe one or more ofthe datum feature references specifi in
patlelocating contol. The PLIZF 1 constained In he upper segment of the frame ae repented as appl
fotation and transition relative to he specified datums. — cable and inthe same order of precdence, o constrain
species the lager positional ele
ofthe pattern of star o ie
race forthe lcs
ion ration of the FRTZE In some instances the repented
“gros. Applicable datum estu references may not constrain any degrees
‘datum features are erence in adesied order of prc: of eeom: however, they ar necessary lo maintain he
‘sien andere rate he PLIZFtothedatumreter.kentcal datum reference frame, such a datum entre
fence rame. See Fig. 7-38, illustration (0).
Bine lower segment in Fig. 7-2
10) Feature Relating Tolrunce Zone Framework
(RIZE). (ie acrony is pronounced Fate”) Eh _ 75.1.1 Primary Datum Repeated in Lower
lower sogment ia Kuturereting control They gov- Segment. Ascanbessen from the sectional view of the
er the smaller positional tolerance foreach fear of tolerance zones in Fig. 738, stration (since datum.
Sze within the pattern (eatureto-eatre relationship) plane A has been repeated in the lower segment of the
Basi dimensions used to relate the PLIZF to spec
ied Compost feature conta frame, the sue of both the
datums are not applicable to the locaton of the FRTZE. PLTZF and FRIZF cylinders are perpendicular to datom
See Fig 738, station (o)
i), Where datum references are not specified
the FRTZE i fre o rotate and transit within
boundaries established and govemed by the PLIZE
plane À and therefore parallel to eachother. In certain
ina sance portion ofthe smaller sones moy fal yond
‚ner segment ofthe composite feature control ame, the peripheries ofthe lager tolerance zones. However,
the these portions of the smaller teerance ones are not
sable because the axes ofthe features must not vila
Fig. 7-38 Hole Patterns Located by Composite Positional Tlerancing (Con)
(Pattern Locating Tolerance Zone Framework — PLIZF)
Fig. 7-38 Hole Patterns Locate by Composite Positional Tolerancing (Con)
(Pattern Locating Tolerance Zone Framework — PLTZF)
Fo
D
* [gala
a Bi
One possi Giant laca! fear pat,
w
(Pattern Locating Tolerance Zone Framework — PLIZF)
Fig. 7-38 Hole Patterns Locate by Composite Positional Tolerancing (Con)
(Pattern Locating Tolerance Zone Framework — PLTZF)
Fo
D
* [gala
a Bi
One possi Giant laca! fear pat,
w
Fig.738. Hole Patterns Located by Composite PosionalTolerancng (Con's)
‘Tolerance Zones for Hole Pattern)
TE Ojala]
De
APE
ANNE
LI. Gos
‘Actual hole axis within both
Zones shown at is extreme,
Grantaton to datum plane À
Possible displacements
sa
FETE]
Fig.7:38. Hole Patterns Located by Composite Positional Toerancing (Con)
(Pattern Locating Tolerance Zone Framework — PLTZF)
sl
‘Tolerance Zones for Hole Pattern)
TE Ojala]
De
APE
ANNE
LI. Gos
‘Actual hole axis within both
Zones shown at is extreme,
Grantaton to datum plane À
Possible displacements
sa
FETE]
Fig.7:38. Hole Patterns Located by Composite Positional Toerancing (Con)
(Pattern Locating Tolerance Zone Framework — PLTZF)
sl
Fig. 7-38 Hole Patterns Located by Composite Positional Tlerancing (Con)
(Featue-Reating Tolerance Zone Framework — FRTZF)
=
MENO
Sue ren a
rete: ig or
18.738. Woe Paters acto by Compost Posi
“acetone Dar Ra Pat)
i, 0 me Pa
Biba SS ie AA
3 a o] BA sot
Datum ~
=. | _
H N /
IA,
DEL seca ony nm,
Sass Seas
pg peers en
the boundaries o he lager tolerance zones. The axes Be amount theese ear
of the oles must fe within the larger tolerance anes "ss btw zus cu
nd within the smaller tolerance zones The ave ofthe
Sule ay vay blue (ot pels 752 prima and Secondary Datums Repeated in
y) nly within de confine of the respective smaller tomes Segment.” gure 79 repens he hol paies
Positional tolerance Zones (FRTZP of Fi 738 In Eg 729, the lower segment ofthe come
NOTE Te min ign. 7.28an 79 atest a My att posite ena contol ame repeats date Aand The
ANIC of i ous ag mes nöd Town oro Pattern trance rooms sl by
(Featue-Reating Tolerance Zone Framework — FRTZF)
=
MENO
Sue ren a
rete: ig or
18.738. Woe Paters acto by Compost Posi
“acetone Dar Ra Pat)
i, 0 me Pa
Biba SS ie AA
3 a o] BA sot
Datum ~
=. | _
H N /
IA,
DEL seca ony nm,
Sass Seas
pg peers en
the boundaries o he lager tolerance zones. The axes Be amount theese ear
of the oles must fe within the larger tolerance anes "ss btw zus cu
nd within the smaller tolerance zones The ave ofthe
Sule ay vay blue (ot pels 752 prima and Secondary Datums Repeated in
y) nly within de confine of the respective smaller tomes Segment.” gure 79 repens he hol paies
Positional tolerance Zones (FRTZP of Fi 738 In Eg 729, the lower segment ofthe come
NOTE Te min ign. 7.28an 79 atest a My att posite ena contol ame repeats date Aand The
ANIC of i ous ag mes nöd Town oro Pattern trance rooms sl by
Fig.739 Hole Patterns of ig. 7-38 With Secondary Datums in Feature-Reating Segments
‘of Composite Feature Control Frames
epa
ee
te
E H x3]
7 exert
MS
psp
att |/ Lee
a |!
eH al el
Fig.739 Hole Patterns for Fig. 7-39 With Secondary Datums in Festure-Relating Segments
‘of Composit Feature Control Frames (Cont) (Tolerance Zones fo Si-Hole Pattern)
REO
ERKUNDEN
+ févaswtate
‘of Composite Feature Control Frames
epa
ee
te
E H x3]
7 exert
MS
psp
att |/ Lee
a |!
eH al el
Fig.739 Hole Patterns for Fig. 7-39 With Secondary Datums in Festure-Relating Segments
‘of Composit Feature Control Frames (Cont) (Tolerance Zones fo Si-Hole Pattern)
REO
ERKUNDEN
+ févaswtate
rear Pattern of Features
Co]
a]
78:8)
rs]
Fig.7-40 Composite Positional Toleraning of a Circular Pattern of Features (Cont')
DER
ms)
the frst segment ar the same a explained in Fig. 7-38.
Figure 7-3 illustration (a shows hat the tolerance cy
inders ofthe FRTZF may be translated (displced) fom
the true poston locations (as a group) as governed by
the tolerance elinders of the PLIZT, while contained
in rotation to datum planes and B. Figure 73
tration (a) shoves that the actual axes ofthe holes in the
actual feature pattern must reside within both the ot.
‘nce cylinders ofthe FRTZF and the PLIZE.
75.3 InTems ol Hole Surfaces. Figure 7 ilu
teations( through (D tot he positional tolerance
requirements ofthe sichole pattem of Fig. 738, and
‘explained in terms of hole surfaces relative to accept:
‘ce boundaries. See para. 733.10), The resul the
‘Sime forthe sue explanation as fora ai, except as
rote in para 73.31
7.5.1.4 Applied to Patterns of Features of ie Relative
to Datum Features, Composite positional toleancing
moy be appli to pates of features of size on circula
parts Se Fig 7-40 and 740, ration (), With datum
‘Rrepeated inthe Lower segment ofthe compost feature
control frame, Fig. 7-40, lation (0) shows the tle
[ce elder ofthe FRIZE wanted (asa group) rom
the basic locations within the bounds impor y the
PÉTZE wile contains in rotation to datum Plane A
754.5 Radial Hole Pattern. Figure 7-41 shows an
‘example of radial hole pattern where the plane ofthe
PLTZF de locats from a datum fae by a baie dimen-
Sion. Where datum references are not specified in the
lower segment ofa composite feature conta frame,
{he FRTZEi ret rotate and transit as governed by
the tolerance zones ofthe PLTZE The same explanation
ven in pare, 75:1 also applies to Fig. 7-1. With datum
Plane A referenced in the lower segment of the com
Post feature control frame, the tolerance Zones o the
FFRIZF (sa group) are constrained in rotation (parallel
to datum plane A) and may be translated a governed
Co]
a]
78:8)
rs]
Fig.7-40 Composite Positional Toleraning of a Circular Pattern of Features (Cont')
DER
ms)
the frst segment ar the same a explained in Fig. 7-38.
Figure 7-3 illustration (a shows hat the tolerance cy
inders ofthe FRTZF may be translated (displced) fom
the true poston locations (as a group) as governed by
the tolerance elinders of the PLIZT, while contained
in rotation to datum planes and B. Figure 73
tration (a) shoves that the actual axes ofthe holes in the
actual feature pattern must reside within both the ot.
‘nce cylinders ofthe FRTZF and the PLIZE.
75.3 InTems ol Hole Surfaces. Figure 7 ilu
teations( through (D tot he positional tolerance
requirements ofthe sichole pattem of Fig. 738, and
‘explained in terms of hole surfaces relative to accept:
‘ce boundaries. See para. 733.10), The resul the
‘Sime forthe sue explanation as fora ai, except as
rote in para 73.31
7.5.1.4 Applied to Patterns of Features of ie Relative
to Datum Features, Composite positional toleancing
moy be appli to pates of features of size on circula
parts Se Fig 7-40 and 740, ration (), With datum
‘Rrepeated inthe Lower segment ofthe compost feature
control frame, Fig. 7-40, lation (0) shows the tle
[ce elder ofthe FRIZE wanted (asa group) rom
the basic locations within the bounds impor y the
PÉTZE wile contains in rotation to datum Plane A
754.5 Radial Hole Pattern. Figure 7-41 shows an
‘example of radial hole pattern where the plane ofthe
PLTZF de locats from a datum fae by a baie dimen-
Sion. Where datum references are not specified in the
lower segment ofa composite feature conta frame,
{he FRTZEi ret rotate and transit as governed by
the tolerance zones ofthe PLTZE The same explanation
ven in pare, 75:1 also applies to Fig. 7-1. With datum
Plane A referenced in the lower segment of the com
Post feature control frame, the tolerance Zones o the
FFRIZF (sa group) are constrained in rotation (parallel
to datum plane A) and may be translated a governed
Fig. 7-40 Composite Positional Tolerant
cing of Circular Pattern of Features (Con's)
GET)
8 pater ocaing
Fig. 7-41 Radial Hole Patter Located by Composite
Positional Tolerancing
mp
a À
Out 073
T
ag
re
res
by the tolerance zones af he PLIZE Se also Fig 7-4,
ilustrations @) rough (8)
7.516 Where Radial Location is Important. The
conta shown in Figs. 7-42 and 7-43 may be specified
here rotational comtrin s importa. The design,
however, permis à eaturerelating tolerance zone o
te displaced within the bounds governed by a patter
Tocatingtolerance zone, hike eld parallel and perpen:
cular tothe Ihre mutually perpendicular planos of
the datum reference frame. See alo Fig. 742, lastra
tions (a) and 6)
75.17 Projected Tolerance Zones for Composite
Positional Tolerancia Where the design dictates the
use of a projected tolerance zone for composite pos-
tional tolerancing the projected tolerance zonesymbolis
placed inthe applicable segment) of the composite es
{ue control frame as required. The projecte tolerance
zone applies only to the segment in which the symbol
{shown Where a projected tolerance zone speed,
{he feature aves shal smullaneously
pattern and feature locating toleran
7518 Composite Positional Tolerances: Multiple
Segments. Composite tolerances have two or more
segments: Each aopment wtabishes tolerance zones aná
‘onsrsint to any referenced datums shown in the seg
‘ment. Datum references in the fist segment establish
AU applicable rotational and translational consents
nt to the mferenced datums. Datum references
in the second and subsequent segments establish only
‘tational constraints tive othe referenced datum.
See Fig 7-H. Absence of datum references ina Segment
indicate that no rotations o transition constants re
«tables by that segment. For a pate of features
‘with a compost postonal tolerance applied
[created by the fst segment and à 0 F
‘reat by enchofhesubsequent segments: Each FRIZE
‘constrained only tothe referenced datums wih the
Segment See Fig. 745. The ist segment of the given
1
cing of Circular Pattern of Features (Con's)
GET)
8 pater ocaing
Fig. 7-41 Radial Hole Patter Located by Composite
Positional Tolerancing
mp
a À
Out 073
T
ag
re
res
by the tolerance zones af he PLIZE Se also Fig 7-4,
ilustrations @) rough (8)
7.516 Where Radial Location is Important. The
conta shown in Figs. 7-42 and 7-43 may be specified
here rotational comtrin s importa. The design,
however, permis à eaturerelating tolerance zone o
te displaced within the bounds governed by a patter
Tocatingtolerance zone, hike eld parallel and perpen:
cular tothe Ihre mutually perpendicular planos of
the datum reference frame. See alo Fig. 742, lastra
tions (a) and 6)
75.17 Projected Tolerance Zones for Composite
Positional Tolerancia Where the design dictates the
use of a projected tolerance zone for composite pos-
tional tolerancing the projected tolerance zonesymbolis
placed inthe applicable segment) of the composite es
{ue control frame as required. The projecte tolerance
zone applies only to the segment in which the symbol
{shown Where a projected tolerance zone speed,
{he feature aves shal smullaneously
pattern and feature locating toleran
7518 Composite Positional Tolerances: Multiple
Segments. Composite tolerances have two or more
segments: Each aopment wtabishes tolerance zones aná
‘onsrsint to any referenced datums shown in the seg
‘ment. Datum references in the fist segment establish
AU applicable rotational and translational consents
nt to the mferenced datums. Datum references
in the second and subsequent segments establish only
‘tational constraints tive othe referenced datum.
See Fig 7-H. Absence of datum references ina Segment
indicate that no rotations o transition constants re
«tables by that segment. For a pate of features
‘with a compost postonal tolerance applied
[created by the fst segment and à 0 F
‘reat by enchofhesubsequent segments: Each FRIZE
‘constrained only tothe referenced datums wih the
Segment See Fig. 745. The ist segment of the given
1
Fig. 7-41 Radial Hole Pattern Located by Composite PostionalTolerancing (Con's)
(olerance Zones for Radial Hole Patter)
[Re 741] PATTERN-LOCATING TOLERANCE ZONE FRAMEWORK
gu aja
+
Fest segment of
out means hs:
24008 patrtocaing
arc foe cys at NMC
SE
Fig. 7-41 Radial Hole Pattern Located by Composite Positional Tolerancing (Cont'd)
(Tolerance Zones for Radial Hole Patter)
as FEATURE-RELATING TOLERANCE ZONE FRAMEWORK
ea? A
Pr Ha rs
AL“
or
nn Yen SAA
a Sin RT i
RES sobs of to cmon one cana ame
Gaal
(olerance Zones for Radial Hole Patter)
[Re 741] PATTERN-LOCATING TOLERANCE ZONE FRAMEWORK
gu aja
+
Fest segment of
out means hs:
24008 patrtocaing
arc foe cys at NMC
SE
Fig. 7-41 Radial Hole Pattern Located by Composite Positional Tolerancing (Cont'd)
(Tolerance Zones for Radial Hole Patter)
as FEATURE-RELATING TOLERANCE ZONE FRAMEWORK
ea? A
Pr Ha rs
AL“
or
nn Yen SAA
a Sin RT i
RES sobs of to cmon one cana ame
Gaal
Fig.7-41 Radia Hole Pattern Located by Composite Positional Tlerancing (Cont)
(olerance Zones for Radial Hole Pattern)
A Du
à Er Tr
4 {> if aa
LD D
ar an dun pao À
i=
A
a
E ere
One prie lemen otre: ir trance Zoe tarot
RTE rito pato “cing torres sare ameno (AR
pers
Fig. 7-41 Radiat Hole Pattern Located by Composite Positional Tlerancing (Cont)
(olerance Zones for Radial Hole Pattern)
Ferm
17
(olerance Zones for Radial Hole Pattern)
A Du
à Er Tr
4 {> if aa
LD D
ar an dun pao À
i=
A
a
E ere
One prie lemen otre: ir trance Zoe tarot
RTE rito pato “cing torres sare ameno (AR
pers
Fig. 7-41 Radiat Hole Pattern Located by Composite Positional Tlerancing (Cont)
(olerance Zones for Radial Hole Pattern)
Ferm
17
Fig. 7-42. Radial Hole Pattern Located by Composite Positional Tolerancing
mp
2 ox:
1
st}
Din |
Fig. 7-42 Radial Hole Pattern Located by Composite Post
pra
tonal Tolerancing (Cont)
mp
2 ox:
1
st}
Din |
Fig. 7-42 Radial Hole Pattern Located by Composite Post
pra
tonal Tolerancing (Cont)
Fig. 7-43 Orientation Relative to Three Datum Planes
Tis on be ang
m
sample crests a PLTZE that is straight segment with
{seo US diameter tolerance zone at MMC) constrined
in rotation and tarlation relative to datums A, Bat
MMB, and € at MMB. The second segment crests à
FRTZE that isa straight segment with vo 12 diameter
tolerance zone (a MMC) that are constrained in rotation
relative to datum A, The third segment rates à FRTZF
that ia staght segment with two 07-diameor tle
ance zones at MMC with no constrain fo any datum.
7.5.2 Multiple Singe-Segment Postiona Tlerancing
Multiple singlesegment positional tolerances pro
vide mulipie positional tolerancing requirements for
the location of features of size and establishes require.
ments for pattem location as wel the interrelation
(Constrained in rotation and wandaton) of features
‘of size within the patems. Requirement are anno-
{ated by the use of two or more feature control frames.
‘The positon symbol is entered in each of the single
segments. The datum feature references in any sep
ment ae not permite bean exact repeat of al the
‘datum feature references in ater segments Each com
plete horizontal segment i verified separately Where
multiple singlesegment positional control are used,
Sich segment creates a tolerance zone framework, ti
either à PLIZE nor PRIZE, since those terms are spe
‘cto composite tolerances. Applicable datum feature
references are specified in a denned order of procedo:
‘nce and serve to relate the tolerance one framework to
the datum reference fame. See Figs 226, illustration
(746,747: and 748.
7.52.4 Multiple SingleSegment Feature Control
Frames. Where its desind fo invoke bask dimen
ions long withthe datum reference, single-segment
feature control frames are used. igure 7-0 shows wo
singlesegment feature contol frames. The lower far
{ure contol frame repeats datums A and B. Figure 7-6,
¡Nusration (a) shows that the tolerance cylinders ofthe
tolerance zone framework for Sogment 2 (as à group)
ae fee to be transit (spaced) to the let or Fight
35 governed by the basil located tolerance cinders
of the tolerance zone Famer for Segment 1, while
remaining perpendicular to datum plane A and bas
ily locate o tum plane B
{@) shows that he actu ae of he holes inthe actual
feature pattern must reside within both the tolerance
‘inde o he tolerance zone framework or Segment 2
and the tolerance zone framework for Segment 1
Figure 7-0, dlhatation () repeats the heretofore
described relationship forthe sichole pattem offs
tures shown in ig. 746
7.52.2 Multiple Single Segments Applied to
Patterns of Features of Sie Relative to Datum Features,
“Multiple singlesegment potion tleranding may be
‘ppl o pattern ol features of size on cular part.
Figure 7-7 shows two single segment feature control
frames. Those are used here it desi lo th
3 comi relationship between the tolerance zone
framework for Segment 2 and the Segment 1. Figure
7-47, lusteaton (a) shows thatthe tolerance zone fame-
‘work for Segment 2 may rotate relative to the tolerance
Tis on be ang
m
sample crests a PLTZE that is straight segment with
{seo US diameter tolerance zone at MMC) constrined
in rotation and tarlation relative to datums A, Bat
MMB, and € at MMB. The second segment crests à
FRTZE that isa straight segment with vo 12 diameter
tolerance zone (a MMC) that are constrained in rotation
relative to datum A, The third segment rates à FRTZF
that ia staght segment with two 07-diameor tle
ance zones at MMC with no constrain fo any datum.
7.5.2 Multiple Singe-Segment Postiona Tlerancing
Multiple singlesegment positional tolerances pro
vide mulipie positional tolerancing requirements for
the location of features of size and establishes require.
ments for pattem location as wel the interrelation
(Constrained in rotation and wandaton) of features
‘of size within the patems. Requirement are anno-
{ated by the use of two or more feature control frames.
‘The positon symbol is entered in each of the single
segments. The datum feature references in any sep
ment ae not permite bean exact repeat of al the
‘datum feature references in ater segments Each com
plete horizontal segment i verified separately Where
multiple singlesegment positional control are used,
Sich segment creates a tolerance zone framework, ti
either à PLIZE nor PRIZE, since those terms are spe
‘cto composite tolerances. Applicable datum feature
references are specified in a denned order of procedo:
‘nce and serve to relate the tolerance one framework to
the datum reference fame. See Figs 226, illustration
(746,747: and 748.
7.52.4 Multiple SingleSegment Feature Control
Frames. Where its desind fo invoke bask dimen
ions long withthe datum reference, single-segment
feature control frames are used. igure 7-0 shows wo
singlesegment feature contol frames. The lower far
{ure contol frame repeats datums A and B. Figure 7-6,
¡Nusration (a) shows that the tolerance cylinders ofthe
tolerance zone framework for Sogment 2 (as à group)
ae fee to be transit (spaced) to the let or Fight
35 governed by the basil located tolerance cinders
of the tolerance zone Famer for Segment 1, while
remaining perpendicular to datum plane A and bas
ily locate o tum plane B
{@) shows that he actu ae of he holes inthe actual
feature pattern must reside within both the tolerance
‘inde o he tolerance zone framework or Segment 2
and the tolerance zone framework for Segment 1
Figure 7-0, dlhatation () repeats the heretofore
described relationship forthe sichole pattem offs
tures shown in ig. 746
7.52.2 Multiple Single Segments Applied to
Patterns of Features of Sie Relative to Datum Features,
“Multiple singlesegment potion tleranding may be
‘ppl o pattern ol features of size on cular part.
Figure 7-7 shows two single segment feature control
frames. Those are used here it desi lo th
3 comi relationship between the tolerance zone
framework for Segment 2 and the Segment 1. Figure
7-47, lusteaton (a) shows thatthe tolerance zone fame-
‘work for Segment 2 may rotate relative to the tolerance
Tags
Categories
GeneralDownload
Download Slideshow Get the original presentation fileQuick Actions
Statistics
- Views 25,586
- Slides 151
- Favorites 2
- Age 1440 days
Related Slideshows
22
Pray For The Peace Of Jerusalem and You Will Prosper
RodolfoMoralesMarcuc
34 views
26
Don_t_Waste_Your_Life_God.....powerpoint
chalobrido8
37 views
31
VILLASUR_FACTORS_TO_CONSIDER_IN_PLATING_SALAD_10-13.pdf
JaiJai148317
34 views
14
Fertility awareness methods for women in the society
Isaiah47
31 views
35
Chapter 5 Arithmetic Functions Computer Organisation and Architecture
RitikSharma297999
30 views
5
syakira bhasa inggris (1) (1).pptx.......
ourcommunity56
31 views